Novel nucleic acid sequences encoding G-protein coupled receptors

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

[0002] The invention relates to novel nucleic acid sequences and polypeptides. Also provided are vectors, host cells, and recombinant methods for making and using the novel molecules.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

[0003] Chapter 1 2871 Receptor, A Novel G-Protein Coupled Receptor

[0004] i) SEQ ID NOS: 1-6

[0005] ii) FIGS. 1A-10

[0006] iii) Continuation-In-Part of 09/741,783, filed Dec. 18, 2000, now pending, which is a continuation-in-part of 09/464,685, filed Dec. 16, 1999, now pending, which is a continuation-in-part of 09/324,465, filed Jun. 2, 1999, now pending; which is a continuation-in-part of 09/088,857, filed Jun. 2, 1998, now abandoned

[0007] Chapter 2 14926 Receptor, A Novel G-Protein Coupled Receptor

[0008] i) SEQ ID NOS: 7-9

[0009] ii) FIGS. 11A-15

[0010] iii) Continuation-In-Part of 09/383,745, filed Aug. 26, 1999, which is a continuation-in-part of 09/145,745, filed Sep. 2, 1998, now pending

[0011] Chapter 3 17723 Receptor, A Novel G-Protein Coupled Receptor

[0012] i) SEQ ID NOS: 10-12

[0013] ii) FIGS. 16A-20B

[0014] iii) Continuation-In-Part of 09/234,923, filed Jan. 21, 1999

[0015] Chapter 4 23992 Receptor, A Novel G-Protein Coupled Receptor

[0016] i) SEQ ID NOS: 12-26

[0017] ii) FIGS. 21A-25

[0018] iii) Continuation-In-Part of 09/340,880, filed Jun. 28, 1999

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

[0019] FIGS. 1A-1D show the 2871 nucleotide sequence (SEQ ID NO: 2) and the deduced 2871 amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO: 1). It is predicted that amino acids 1-42 constitute the extracellular domain, amino acids 43-318 constitute the transmembrane domain, and amino acids 319-359 constitute the intracellular domain.

[0020]
FIG. 2 shows a comparison of the 2871 receptor against the Prosite data base of protein patterns, specifically showing a high score against the seven transmembrane domain rhodopsin family. The underlined area shows a GPCR signature. The most commonly conserved intracellular sequence is the aspartate, arginine, tyrosine (DRY) triplet adjacent to TM3. Arginine is invariant. Aspartate is conservatively placed in several GPCRs. DRY is implicated in signal transduction.

[0021]
FIG. 3 shows an analysis of the 2871 amino acid sequence: αβturn and coil regions; hydrophilicity; amphipathic regions; flexible regions; antigenic index; and surface probability.

[0022]
FIG. 4 shows a 2871 receptor hydrophobicity plot. The amino acids correspond to 43-318 and show the seven transmembrane segments.

[0023]
FIG. 5 shows 2871 RNA expression in various tissues.

[0024]
FIG. 6 shows 2871 RNA expression in various normal human tissues.

[0025]
FIG. 7 shows expression of 2871 RNA expression in various hematopoeitic cells. mPB: mobilized peripheral blood; ABM: adult bone marrow; Meg: megakaryocytes; BM: bone marrow.

[0026]
FIG. 8 shows expression of gene 2871 in Glio, placenta and skin cells as well as elevated expression in breast tumor cells, colon tumor cells, colon metastatic cells, and lung tumor cells as compared to the respective normal breast, colon, and lung cells.

[0027]
FIG. 9 shows the expression level of the 2871 mRNA in various tissues. Elevated expression of the 2871 mRNA was found in ovary tumors and lung tumors when compared to normal ovary and lung samples. Significant expression levels of the 2871 mRNA was also seen in brain cortex, epithelial cells, pancreas, and aorta. The expression level of the β2 mRNA was monitored in each tissue sample and used as a control to allow the expression levels of the 2871 mRNA to be compared across samples.

[0028]
FIG. 10 shows that gene 2871 is downregulated in the presence of p53. H125 is a lung tumor cell line mutated to eliminate the expression of p53. H125 vector indicates expression of 2871 in lung tumor cell lines infected with a control retroviral vector. H125 p53 indicates expression of 2871 in lung tumor cell lines infected with a retroviral vector expressing p53.

[0029] FIGS. 11A-11B show the 14926 nucleotide sequence (SEQ ID NO: 8) and the deduced 14926 amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO: 7). It is predicted that amino acids 1-23 constitute the amino terminal extracellular domain, amino acids 24-341 constitute the region spanning the transmembrane domain, and amino acids 342-370 constitute the carboxy terminal intracellular domain. The transmembrane domain contains seven transmembrane segments, three extracellular loops and three intracellular loops. The transmembrane segments are found from about amino acid 24 to about amino acid 46, from about amino acid 56 to about amino acid 78, from about amino acid 96 to about amino acid 117, from about amino acid 133 to about amino acid 154, from about amino acid 185 to about amino acid 209, from about amino acid 286 to about amino acid 307, and from about amino acid 318 to about amino acid 341. Within the region spanning the entire transmembrane domain are three intracellular and three extracellular loops. The three intracellular loops are found from about amino acid 47 to about amino acid 55, from about amino acid 118 to about amino acid 132, and from about amino acid 210 to about amino acid 285. The three extracellular loops are found at from about amino acid 79 to about amino acid 95, from about amino acid 155 to about amino acid 184, and from about amino acid 308 to about amino acid 317.

[0030] The transmembrane domain includes a GPCR signal transduction signature, TRY, at residues 118-120. The sequence includes an arginine at residue 119, an invariant amino acid in GPCRs.

[0031]
FIG. 12 shows a comparison of the 14926 receptor against the Prosite database of protein patterns, specifically showing a high score against the seven transmembrane segment rhodopsin superfamily. The underlined area shows a GPCR signature, and specifically the position of an arginine residue, conserved in GPCRs. The most commonly conserved sequence is an aspartate, arginine, tyrosine (DRY) triplet. DRY is implicated in signal transduction. Arginine is invariant. Aspartate is conservatively placed in several GPCRs. In the present case, the arginine is found in the sequence TRY, which matches the position of DRY or invariant arginine in GPCRs of the rhodopsin superfamily of receptors.

[0032]
FIG. 13 shows an analysis of the 14926 amino acid sequence: αβturn and coil regions; hydrophilicity; amphipathic regions; flexible regions; antigenic index; and surface probability plot.

[0033]
FIG. 14 shows a 14926 receptor hydrophobicity plot. The amino acids correspond to 1-370 and show the seven transmembrane segments.

[0034]
FIG. 15 shows an analysis of the 14926 open reading frame for amino acids corresponding to specific functional sites. A glycosylation site is found at amino acids 3-6, which corresponds to the amino terminal extracellular domain. A second glycosylation site is found at amino acids 83-86, which corresponds to the first extracellular loop. A third glycosylation site is found at amino acids 182-185, which spans the second extracellular loop and fifth transmembrane segment. A fourth glycosylation site is found at amino acids 227-230, which corresponds to the third intracellular loop. A fifth glycosylation site occurs at amino acids 264-267, also in the third intracellular loop. A cyclic AMP or cyclic GMP-dependent protein kinase phosphorylation site is found at amino acids 131-134 and spans the second intracellular loop and fourth transmembrane segment, and at amino acids 281-284, corresponding to the third intracellular loop. A protein kinase C phosphorylation site is found at amino acids 80-82, corresponding to the first intracellular loop. A second protein kinase C phosphorylation site is found at amino acids 93-95, corresponding to the first extracellular loop. A third protein kinase C phosphorylation site is found at amino acids 130-132, corresponding to the second intracellular loop. A fourth protein kinase C phosphorylation site is found at amino acids 178-180, corresponding to the second extracellular loop. A fifth protein kinase C phosphorylation site is found at amino acids 266-268, corresponding to the third intracellular loop. A sixth protein kinase C phosphorylation site is found at amino acids 342-344, corresponding to the carboxy terminal intracellular domain. A casein kinase II phosphorylation site occurs at amino acids 342-345, corresponding to the carboxy terminal intracellular domain. N-myristoylation sites occur at amino acids 84-89 and 90-95, corresponding to the first extracellular loop; 101-106, corresponding to the third transmembrane segment; 237-242 and 258-263, corresponding to the third intracellular loop; and 318-323, corresponding to the seventh transmembrane segment. An amidation site is found at amino acids 266-269, corresponding to the third intracellular loop. In addition, amino acids corresponding in position to the GPCR signature and containing the invariant arginine are found in the sequence TRY at amino acids 118-120.

[0035] FIGS. 16A-16B show the 17723 nucleotide sequence (SEQ ID NO: 11) and the deduced 17723 amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO: 10). It is predicted that amino acids 1-43 constitute the amino terminal extracellular domain, amino acids 44-307 constitute the region spanning the transmembrane domain, and amino acids 308-402 constitute the carboxy terminal intracellular domain. The transmembrane domain contains seven transmembrane segments, three extracellular loops and three intracellular loops. The transmembrane segments are found from about amino acid 44 to about amino acid 67, from about amino acid 78 to about amino acid 100, from about amino acid 119 to about amino acid 137, from about amino acid 157 to about amino acid 176, from about amino acid 202 to about amino acid 226, from about amino acid 256 to about amino acid 279, and from about amino acid 287 to about amino acid 307. Within the region spanning the entire transmembrane domain are three intracellular and three extracellular loops. The three intracellular loops are found from about amino acid 68 to about amino acid 77, from about amino acid 138 to about amino acid 156, and from about amino acid 227 to about amino acid 255. The three extracellular loops are found at from about amino acid 101 to about amino acid 118, from about amino acid 177 to about amino acid 201, and from about amino acid 280 to about amino acid 286.

[0036] The transmembrane domain includes a GPCR signal transduction signature, ERY, at residues 138-140. The sequence includes an arginine at residue 139, an invariant amino acid in GPCRs.

[0037]
FIG. 17 shows a comparison of the 17723 receptor (amino acid residues 58-309 of SEQ ID NO: 10) against the Prosite data base of protein patterns, specifically showing a high score against the seven transmembrane segment rhodopsin superfamily (set forth in SEQ ID NO: 12). The underlined area shows a GPCR signature, and specifically the position of an arginine residue, conserved in GPCRs. The most commonly conserved sequence is an aspartate, arginine, tyrosine (DRY) triplet. DRY is implicated in signal transduction. Arginine is invariant. Aspartate is conservatively placed in several GPCRs. In the present case, the arginine is found in the sequence ERY, which matches the position of DRY or invariant arginine in GPCRs of the rhodopsin superfamily of receptors.

[0038]
FIG. 18 shows an analysis of the 17723 amino acid sequence: αβturn and coil regions; hydrophilicity; amphipathic regions; flexible regions; antigenic index; and surface probability plot.

[0039]
FIG. 19 shows a 17723 receptor hydrophobicity plot. The amino acids correspond to 1-402 and show the seven transmembrane segments.

[0040] FIGS. 20A-20B show an analysis of the 17723 open reading frame for amino acids corresponding to specific functional sites of SEQ ID NO: 10. Six glycosylation sites are found in the protein from about amino acids 5-8, 82-85, 150-153, 198-201, 367-370, and 390-393 of SEQ ID NO: 10. A cAMP- and cGMP-dependent protein kinase phosphorylation site is found from about amino acids 362-365 of SEQ ID NO: 10. Three protein kinase C phosphorylation sites are found from about amino acids 228-230, 353-355, and 386-388 of SEQ ID NO: 10. Five casein kinase II phosphorylation sites are found at about amino acids 84-87, 353-356, 376-379, 382-385, and 392-395 of SEQ ID NO: 10. Six N-myristoylation sites are found from about amino acids 4-9, 15-20, 55-60, 94-99, 121-126, and 185-190 of SEQ ID NO: 10. A visual pigments (opsins) retinal binding site is found from about amino acids 298-316 of SEQ ID NO: 10. In addition, amino acids corresponding in position to the GPCR signature and containing the invariant arginine are found in the sequence ERY at amino acids 138-140 of SEQ ID NO: 10.

[0041] FIGS. 21A-21B show the 23992 nucleotide sequence (SEQ ID NO: 14) and the deduced 23992 amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO: 13).

[0042]
FIG. 22 shows a comparison of the 23992 receptor against the Prosite data base of protein patterns, specifically showing a high score against the seven transmembrane segment rhodopsin superfamily (SEQ ID NO: 15 and 16). The underlined area shows a GPCR signature, and specifically the position of an arginine residue, conserved in GPCRs. The most commonly conserved sequence is an aspartate, arginine, tyrosine (DRY) triplet. DRY is implicated in signal transduction. Arginine is invariant. Aspartate is conservatively placed in several GPCRs. In the present case, the arginine is found in the sequence RYL, which corresponds to the DRY or invariant arginine in GPCRs of the rhodopsin superfamily of receptors.

[0043]
FIG. 23 shows an analysis of the 23992 amino acid sequence: αβturn and coil regions; hydrophilicity; amphipathic regions; flexible regions; antigenic index; and surface probability plot.

[0044]
FIG. 24 shows a 23992 receptor hydrophobicity plot. The amino acids correspond to 1-333 and show the seven transmembrane segments.

[0045]
FIG. 25 shows an analysis of the 23992 open reading frame (SEQ ID NO: 13) for amino acids corresponding to specific functional sites. Glycosylation sites are found from about amino acid 8 to about amino acid 11 (SEQ ID NO: 17), from about amino acid 110 to about amino acid 113 (SEQ ID NO: 18), and from about amino acid 300 to about amino acid 303 (SEQ ID NO: 19). Protein kinase C phosphorylation sites are found from about amino acid 89 to about amino acid 91, from about amino acid 172 to about amino acid 174, and from about amino acid 224 to about amino acid 226. Casein kinase II phosphorylation sites are found from about amino acid 60 to about amino acid 63 (SEQ ID NO: 20) and from about amino acid 218 to about amino acid 221 (SEQ ID NO: 21). Tyrosine kinase phosphorylation sites are found from about amino acid 264 to about amino acid 270 (SEQ ID NO: 22). N-myristoylation sites are found from about amino acid 33 to about amino acid 38 (SEQ ID NO: 23), from about amino acid 41 to about amino acid 46 (SEQ ID NO: 24), from about amino acid 73 to about amino acid 78 (SEQ ID NO: 25), and from amino acid 154 to about amino acid 159 (SEQ ID NO: 26). It is predicted that amino acids 1-25 constitute the amino terminal extracellular domain, amino acids 26-296 constitute the region spanning the transmembrane domain, and amino acids 297-333 constitute the carboxy terminal intracellular domain. The transmembrane domain contains seven transmembrane segments, three extracellular loops and three intracellular loops. The transmembrane segments are found from about amino acid 26 to about amino acid 50, from about amino acid 64 to about amino acid 85, from about amino acid 103 to about amino acid 125, from about amino acid 147 to about amino acid 167, from about amino acid 191 to about amino acid 210, from about amino acid 234 to about amino acid 255, and from about amino acid 280 to about amino acid 296. Within the region spanning the entire transmembrane domain are three intracellular and three extracellular loops. The three intracellular loops are found from about amino acid 51 to about amino acid 63, from about amino acid 126 to about amino acid 146, and from about amino acid 211 to about amino acid 233. The three extracellular loops are found at from about amino acid 86 to about amino acid 102, from about amino acid 168 to about amino acid 190, and from about amino acid 256 to about amino acid 279.

[0046] The transmembrane domain includes a GPCR signal transduction signature, RYL, at residues 138-140. The sequence includes an arginine at residue 139, an invariant amino acid in GPCRs. Predicted transmembrane segments for the presumed mature peptide are also included in this figure (amino acids 44-334 of SEQ ID NO: 13).

CHAPTER 1

2871 Receptor, A Novel G-Protein Coupled Receptor

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

[0047] G-Protein Coupled Receptors

[0048] G-protein coupled receptors (GPCRs) constitute a major class of proteins responsible for transducing a signal within a cell. GPCRs have seven transmembrane domains. Upon binding of a ligand to an extracellular portion of a GPCR, a signal is transduced within the cell that results in a change in a biological or physiological property of the cell. GPCRs, along with G-proteins and effectors (intracellular enzymes and channels modulated by G-proteins), are the components of a modular signaling system that connects the state of intracellular second messengers to extracellular inputs.

[0049] GPCR genes and gene-products are potential causative agents of disease (Spiegel et al., J Clin. Invest. 92:1119-1125 (1993); McKusick et al., J Med. Genet. 30:1-26 (1993)). Specific defects in the rhodopsin gene and the V2 vasopressin receptor gene have been shown to cause various forms of retinitis pigmentosum (Nathans et al., Annu. Rev. Genet. 26:403-424(1992)), nephrogenic diabetes insipidus (Holtzman et al., Hum. Mol. Genet. 2:1201-1204 (1993)). These receptors are of critical importance to both the central nervous system and peripheral physiological processes. Evolutionary analyses suggest that the ancestor of these proteins originally developed in concert with complex body plans and nervous systems.

[0050] The GPCR protein superfamily can be divided into five families: Family I, receptors typified by rhodopsin and the beta2-adrenergic receptor and currently represented by over 200 unique members (Dohlman et al., Annu. Rev. Biochem. 60:653-688 (1991)); Family II, the parathyroid hormone/calcitonin/secretin receptor family (Juppner et al., Science 254:1024-1026 (1991); Lin et al., Science 254:1022-1024 (1991)); Family III, the metabotropic glutamate receptor family (Nakanishi, Science 258 597:603 (1992)); Family IV, the cAMP receptor family, important in the chemotaxis and development of D. discoideum (Klein et al., Science 241:1467-1472 (1988)); and Family V, the fungal mating pheromone receptors such as STE2 (Kurjan, Annu. Rev. Biochem. 61:1097-1129 (1992)).

[0051] There are also a small number of other proteins which present seven putative hydrophobic segments and appear to be unrelated to GPCRs; however, they have not been shown to couple to G-proteins. Drosophila expresses a photoreceptor-specific protein, bride of sevenless (boss), a seven-transmembrane-segment protein which has been extensively studied and does not show evidence of being a GPCR (Hart et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5047-5051 (1993)). The gene frizzled (fz) in Drosophila is also thought to be a protein with seven transmembrane segments. Like boss, fz has not been shown to couple to G-proteins (Vinson et al., Nature 338:263-264 (1989)).

[0052] G proteins represent a family of heterotrimeric proteins composed of α, β and γ subunits, that bind guanine nucleotides. These proteins are usually linked to cell surface receptors, e.g., receptors containing seven transmembrane domains. Following ligand binding to the GPCR, a conformational change is transmitted to the G protein, which causes the α-subunit to exchange a bound GDP molecule for a GTP molecule and to dissociate from the βγ-subunits. The GTP-bound form of the α-subunit typically functions as an effector-modulating moiety, leading to the production of second messengers, such as cAMP (e.g., by activation of adenyl cyclase), diacylglycerol or inositol phosphates. Greater than 20 different types of α-subunits are known in humans. These subunits associate with a smaller pool of β and γ subunits. Examples of mammalian G proteins include Gi, Go, Gq, Gs and Gt. G proteins are described extensively in Lodish et al., Molecular Cell Biology, (Scientific American Books Inc., New York, N.Y., 1995), the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

[0053] GPCRs are a major target for drug action and development. Accordingly, it is valuable to the field of pharmaceutical development to identify and characterize previously unknown GPCRs. The present invention advances the state of the art by providing a previously unidentified human GPCR.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

[0054] It is an object of the invention to identify novel GPCR receptors.

[0055] It is a further object of the invention to provide novel GPCR receptor polypeptides that are useful as reagents or targets in receptor assays applicable to treatment and diagnosis of GPCR-mediated disorders.

[0056] It is a further object of the invention to provide polynucleotides corresponding to the novel GPCR receptor polypeptides that are useful as targets and reagents in receptor assays applicable to treatment and diagnosis of GPCR-mediated disorders and useful for producing novel receptor polypeptides by recombinant methods.

[0057] A specific object of the invention is to identify compounds that act as agonists and antagonists and modulate the expression of the receptor.

[0058] A further specific object of the invention is to provide the compounds that modulate the expression of the receptor for treatment and diagnosis of GPCR related disorders.

[0059] The invention is thus based on the identification of a novel GPCR, designated the 2871 receptor.

[0060] The invention provides isolated 2871 receptor polypeptides including a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1, or the amino acid sequence encoded by the cDNA deposited as ATCC No. PTA-2369 on Aug. 11, 2000 (“the deposited cDNA”).

[0061] The invention also provides isolated 2871 receptor nucleic acid molecules having the sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 or in the deposited cDNA.

[0062] The invention also provides variant polypeptides having an amino acid sequence that is substantially homologous to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 or encoded by the deposited cDNA.

[0063] The invention also provides variant nucleic acid sequences that are substantially homologous to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 or in the deposited cDNA.

[0064] The invention also provides fragments of the polypeptide shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 and nucleotide shown in SEQ ID NO: 2, as well as substantially homologous fragments of the polypeptide or nucleic acid.

[0065] The invention also provides vectors and host cells for expression of the receptor nucleic acid molecules and polypeptides and particularly recombinant vectors and host cells.

[0066] The invention also provides methods of making the vectors and host cells and methods for using them to produce the receptor nucleic acid molecules and polypeptides.

[0067] The invention also provides antibodies that selectively bind the receptor polypeptides and fragments.

[0068] The invention also provides methods of screening for compounds that modulate the activity of the receptor polypeptides. Modulation can be at the level of the polypeptide receptor or at the level of controlling the expression of nucleic acid expressing the receptor polypeptide.

[0069] The invention also provides a process for modulating receptor polypeptide activity, especially using the screened compounds, including to treat conditions related to expression of the receptor polypeptides.

[0070] The invention also provides diagnostic assays for determining the presence of and level of the receptor polypeptides or nucleic acid molecules in a biological sample.

[0071] The invention also provides diagnostic assays for determining the presence of a mutation in the receptor polypeptides or nucleic acid molecules.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

[0072] The present inventions now will be described more fully hereinafter with reference to the accompanying drawings, in which some, but not all embodiments of the invention are shown. Indeed, these inventions may be embodied in many different forms and should not be construed as limited to the embodiments set forth herein; rather, these embodiments are provided so that this disclosure will satisfy applicable legal requirements. Like numbers refer to like elements throughout.

[0073] Many modifications and other embodiments of the inventions set forth herein will come to mind to one skilled in the art to which these inventions pertain having the benefit of the teachings presented in the foregoing descriptions and the associated drawings. Therefore, it is to be understood that the inventions are not to be limited to the specific embodiments disclosed and that modifications and other embodiments are intended to be included within the scope of the appended claims. Although specific terms are employed herein, they are used in a generic and descriptive sense only and not for purposes of limitation.

[0074] Receptor Function/Signal Pathway

[0075] The 2871 receptor protein is a GPCR that participates in signaling pathways. As used herein, a “signaling pathway” refers to the modulation (e.g., stimulation or inhibition) of a cellular function/activity upon the binding of a ligand to the GPCR (2871 protein). Examples of such functions include mobilization of intracellular molecules that participate in a signal transduction pathway, e.g., phosphatidylinositol 4,5-bisphosphate (PIP2), inositol 1,4,5-triphosphate (IP3) or adenylate cyclase; polarization of the plasma membrane; production or secretion of molecules; alteration in the structure of a cellular component; cell proliferation, e.g., synthesis of DNA; cell migration; cell differentiation; and cell survival. Since the 2871 receptor protein is expressed in uterus, placenta, prostate, testis, pancreas, tonsils, CD34+ cells, and other cells and tissues such as those disclosed herein, as in FIGS. 5-7, cells participating in a 2871 receptor protein signaling pathway include, but are not limited to cells derived from these tissues.

[0076] Depending on the type of cell, the response mediated by the receptor protein may be different. For example, in some cells, binding of a ligand to the receptor protein may stimulate an activity such as release of compounds, gating of a channel, cellular adhesion, migration, differentiation, etc., through phosphatidylinositol or cyclic AMP metabolism and turnover while in other cells, the binding of the ligand will produce a different result. Regardless of the cellular activity/response modulated by the receptor protein, it is universal that the protein is a GPCR and interacts with G proteins to produce one or more secondary signals, in a variety of intracellular signal transduction pathways, e.g., through phosphatidylinositol or cyclic AMP metabolism and turnover, in a cell.

[0077] As used herein, “phosphatidylinositol turnover and metabolism” refers to the molecules involved in the turnover and metabolism of phosphatidylinositol 4,5-bisphosphate (PIP2) as well as to the activities of these molecules. PIP2 is a phospholipid found in the cytosolic leaflet of the plasma membrane. Binding of ligand to the receptor activates, in some cells, the plasma-membrane enzyme phospholipase C that in turn can hydrolyze PIP2 to produce 1,2-diacylglycerol (DAG) and inositol 1,4,5-triphosphate (IP3). Once formed IP3 can diffuse to the endoplasmic reticulum surface where it can bind an IP3 receptor, e.g., a calcium channel protein containing an IP3 binding site. IP3 binding can induce opening of the channel, allowing calcium ions to be released into the cytoplasm. IP3 can also be phosphorylated by a specific kinase to form inositol 1,3,4,5-tetraphosphate (IP4), a molecule which can cause calcium entry into the cytoplasm from the extracellular medium. IP3 and IP4 can subsequently be hydrolyzed very rapidly to the inactive products inositol 1,4-biphosphate (IP2) and inositol 1,3,4-triphosphate, respectively. These inactive products can be recycled by the cell to synthesize PIP2. The other second messenger produced by the hydrolysis of PIP2, namely 1,2-diacylglycerol (DAG), remains in the cell membrane where it can serve to activate the enzyme protein kinase C. Protein kinase C is usually found soluble in the cytoplasm of the cell, but upon an increase in the intracellular calcium concentration, this enzyme can move to the plasma membrane where it can be activated by DAG. The activation of protein kinase C in different cells results in various cellular responses such as the phosphorylation of glycogen synthase, or the phosphorylation of various transcription factors, e.g., NF-kB. The language “phosphatidylinositol activity”, as used herein, refers to an activity of PIP2 or one of its metabolites.

[0078] Another signaling pathway the receptor may participate in is the cAMP turnover pathway. As used herein, “cyclic AMP turnover and metabolism” refers to the molecules involved in the turnover and metabolism of cyclic AMP (cAMP) as well as to the activities of these molecules. Cyclic AMP is a second messenger produced in response to ligand induced stimulation of certain G protein coupled receptors. In the cAMP signaling pathway, binding of a ligand to a GPCR can lead to the activation of the enzyme adenyl cyclase, which catalyzes the synthesis of cAMP. The newly synthesized cAMP can in turn activate a cAMP-dependent protein kinase. This activated kinase can phosphorylate a voltage-gated potassium channel protein, or an associated protein, and lead to the inability of the potassium channel to open during an action potential. The inability of the potassium channel to open results in a decrease in the outward flow of potassium, which normally repolarizes the membrane of a neuron, leading to prolonged membrane depolarization.

[0079] Pharmacogenomics

[0080] Pharmacogenomics deal with clinically significant hereditary variations in the response to drugs due to altered drug disposition and abnormal action in affected persons. See, e.g., Eichelbaum, M. (1996) Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Physiol. 23(10-11):983-985 and Linder, M. W. (1997) Clin. Chem. 43(2):254-266. The clinical outcomes of these variations result in severe toxicity of therapeutic drugs in certain individuals or therapeutic failure of drugs in certain individuals as a result of individual variation in metabolism. Thus, the genotype of the individual can determine the way a therapeutic compound acts on the body or the way the body metabolizes the compound. Further, the activity of drug metabolizing enzymes effects both the intensity and duration of drug action. Thus, the pharmacogenomics of the individual permit the selection of effective compounds and effective dosages of such compounds for prophylactic or therapeutic treatment based on the individual's genotype. The discovery of genetic polymorphisms in some drug metabolizing enzymes has explained why some patients do not obtain the expected drug effects, show an exaggerated drug effect, or experience serious toxicity from standard drug dosages. Polymorphisms can be expressed in the phenotype of the extensive metabolizer and the phenotype of the poor metabolizer.

[0081] Disorders/Cellular Functions

[0082] The present invention relates to methods and compositions for the modulation, diagnosis, and treatment of immune and respiratory disorders, especially T helper (Th) cell and Th cell-like related disorders. Such immune disorders include, but are not limited to, chronic inflammatory diseases and disorders, such as Crohn's disease, reactive arthritis, including Lyme disease, insulin-dependent diabetes, organ-specific autoimmunity, including multiple sclerosis, Hashimoto's thyroiditis and Grave's disease, contact dermatitis, psoriasis, graft rejection, graft versus host disease, sarcoidosis, atopic conditions, such as asthma and allergy, including allergic rhinitis, gastrointestinal allergies, including food allergies, eosinophilia, conjunctivitis, glomerular nephritis, certain pathogen susceptibilities such as helminthic (e.g., leishmaniasis), certain viral infections, including HIV, and bacterial infections, including tuberculosis and lepromatous leprosy.

[0083] Respiratory disorders include, but are not limited to, apnea, asthma, particularly bronchial asthma, berillium disease, bronchiectasis, bronchitis, bronchopneumonia, cystic fibrosis, diphtheria, dyspnea, emphysema, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, allergic bronchopulmonary aspergillosis, pneumonia, acute pulmonary edema, pertussis, pharyngitis, atelectasis, Wegener's granulomatosis, Legionnaires disease, pleurisy, rheumatic fever, and sinusitis.

[0084] The present invention also relates to methods and compositions for the modulation, diagnosis, and treatment of hematopoeitic disorders involving cells of leukocyte, erythrocyte, and platelet lineages, i.e., the differentiated cells and their less-differentiated progenitors including, but not limited to, erythroblasts, megakaryocytes, and leukocytes that are not fully differentiated, as well as CD34+ stem cells.

[0085] Disorders involving the prostate include, but are not limited to, inflammations, benign enlargement, for example, nodular hyperplasia (benign prostatic hypertrophy or hyperplasia), and tumors such as carcinoma.

[0086] Disorders of the breast include, but are not limited to, disorders of development; inflammations, including but not limited to, acute mastitis, periductal mastitis, periductal mastitis (recurrent subareolar abscess, squamous metaplasia of lactiferous ducts), mammary duct ectasia, fat necrosis, granulomatous mastitis, and pathologies associated with silicone breast implants; fibrocystic changes; proliferative breast disease including, but not limited to, epithelial hyperplasia, sclerosing adenosis, and small duct papillomas; tumors including, but not limited to, stromal tumors such as fibroadenoma, phyllodes tumor, and sarcomas, and epithelial tumors such as large duct papilloma; carcinoma of the breast including in situ (noninvasive) carcinoma that includes ductal carcinoma in situ (including Paget's disease) and lobular carcinoma in situ, and invasive (infiltrating) carcinoma including, but not limited to, invasive ductal carcinoma, no special type, invasive lobular carcinoma, medullary carcinoma, colloid (mucinous) carcinoma, tubular carcinoma, and invasive papillary carcinoma, and miscellaneous malignant neoplasms.

[0087] Disorders in the male breast include, but are not limited to, gynecomastia and carcinoma.

[0088] Disorders involving the skeletal muscle include tumors such as rhabdomyosarcoma.

[0089] Disorders involving the brain include, but are not limited to, disorders involving neurons, and disorders involving glia, such as astrocytes, oligodendrocytes, ependymal cells, and microglia; cerebral edema, raised intracranial pressure and herniation, and hydrocephalus; malformations and developmental diseases, such as neural tube defects, forebrain anomalies, posterior fossa anomalies, and syringomyelia and hydromyelia; perinatal brain injury; cerebrovascular diseases, such as those related to hypoxia, ischemia, and infarction, including hypotension, hypoperfusion, and low-flow states—global cerebral ischemia and focal cerebral ischemia—infarction from obstruction of local blood supply, intracranial hemorrhage, including intracerebral (intraparenchymal) hemorrhage, subarachnoid hemorrhage and ruptured berry aneurysms, and vascular malformations, hypertensive cerebrovascular disease, including lacunar infarcts, slit hemorrhages, and hypertensive encephalopathy; infections, such as acute meningitis, including acute pyogenic (bacterial) meningitis and acute aseptic (viral) meningitis, acute focal suppurative infections, including brain abscess, subdural empyema, and extradural abscess, chronic bacterial meningoencephalitis, including tuberculosis and mycobacterioses, neurosyphilis, and neuroborreliosis (Lyme disease), viral meningoencephalitis, including arthropod-borne (Arbo) viral encephalitis, Herpes simplex virus Type 1, Herpes simplex virus Type 2, Varicalla-zzoster virus (Herpes zoster), cytomegalovirus, poliomyelitis, rabies, and human immunodeficiency virus 1, including HIV-1 meningoencephalitis (subacute encephalitis), vacuolar myelopathy, AIDS-associated myopathy, peripheral neuropathy, and AIDS in children, progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy, subacute sclerosing panencephalitis, fungal meningoencephalitis, other infectious diseases of the nervous system; transmissible spongiform encephalopathies (prion diseases); demyelinating diseases, including multiple sclerosis, multiple sclerosis variants, acute disseminated encephalomyelitis and acute necrotizing hemorrhagic encephalomyelitis, and other diseases with demyelination; degenerative diseases, such as degenerative diseases affecting the cerebral cortex, including Alzheimer disease and Pick disease, degenerative diseases of basal ganglia and brain stem, including Parkinsonism, idiopathic Parkinson disease (paralysis agitans), progressive supranuclear palsy, corticobasal degenration, multiple system atrophy, including striatonigral degenration, Shy-Drager syndrome, and olivopontocerebellar atrophy, and Huntington disease; spinocerebellar degenerations, including spinocerebellar ataxias, including Friedreich ataxia, and ataxia-telanglectasia, degenerative diseases affecting motor neurons, including amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (motor neuron disease), bulbospinal atrophy (Kennedy syndrome), and spinal muscular atrophy; inborn errors of metabolism, such as leukodystrophies, including Krabbe disease, metachromatic leukodystrophy, adrenoleukodystrophy, Pelizaeus-Merzbacher disease, and Canavan disease, mitochondrial encephalomyopathies, including Leigh disease and other mitochondrial encephalomyopathies; toxic and acquired metabolic diseases, including vitamin deficiencies such as thiamine (vitamin B1) deficiency and vitamin B12 deficiency, neurologic sequelae of metabolic disturbances, including hypoglycemia, hyperglycemia, and hepatic encephatopathy, toxic disorders, including carbon monoxide, methanol, ethanol, and radiation, including combined methotrexate and radiation-induced injury; tumors, such as gliomas, including astrocytoma, including fibrillary (diffuse) astrocytoma and glioblastoma multiforme, pilocytic astrocytoma, pleomorphic xanthoastrocytoma, and brain stem glioma, oligodendroglioma, and ependymoma and related paraventricular mass lesions, neuronal tumors, poorly differentiated neoplasms, including medulloblastoma, other parenchymal tumors, including primary brain lymphoma, gerrn cell tumors, and pineal parenchymal tumors, meningiomas, metastatic tumors, paraneoplastic syndromes, peripheral nerve sheath tumors, including schwannoma, neurofibroma, and malignant peripheral nerve sheath tumor (malignant schwannoma), and neurocutaneous syndromes (phakomatoses), including neurofibromotosis, including Type 1 neurofibromatosis (NF1) and TYPE 2 neurofibromatosis (NF2), tuberous sclerosis, and Von Hippel-Lindau disease.

[0090] Disorders involving blood vessels include, but are not limited to, responses of vascular cell walls to injury, such as endothelial dysfunction and endothelial activation and intimal thickening; vascular diseases including, but not limited to, congenital anomalies, such as arteriovenous fistula, atherosclerosis, and hypertensive vascular disease, such as hypertension; inflammatory disease—the vasculitides, such as giant cell (temporal) arteritis, Takayasu arteritis, polyarteritis nodosa (classic), Kawasaki syndrome (mucocutaneous lymph node syndrome), microscopic polyanglitis (microscopic polyarteritis, hypersensitivity or leukocytoclastic anglitis), Wegener granulomatosis, thromboanglitis obliterans (Buerger disease), vasculitis associated with other disorders, and infectious arteritis; Raynaud disease; aneurysms and dissection, such as abdominal aortic aneurysms, syphilitic (luetic) aneurysms, and aortic dissection (dissecting hematoma); disorders of veins and lymphatics, such as varicose veins, thrombophlebitis and phlebothrombosis, obstruction of superior vena cava (superior vena cava syndrome), obstruction of inferior vena cava (inferior vena cava syndrome), and lymphangitis and lymphedema; tumors, including benign tumors and tumor-like conditions, such as hemangioma, lymphangioma, glomus tumor (glomangioma), vascular ectasias, and bacillary angiomatosis, and intermediate-grade (borderline low-grade malignant) tumors, such as Kaposi sarcoma and hemangloendothelioma, and malignant tumors, such as angiosarcoma and hemangiopericytoma; and pathology of therapeutic interventions in vascular disease, such as balloon angioplasty and related techniques and vascular replacement, such as coronary artery bypass graft surgery.

[0091] Disorders involving the testis and epididymis include, but are not limited to, congenital anomalies such as cryptorchidism, regressive changes such as atrophy, inflammations such as nonspecific epididymitis and orchitis, granulomatous (autoimmune) orchitis, and specific inflammations including, but not limited to, gonorrhea, mumps, tuberculosis, and syphilis, vascular disturbances including torsion, testicular tumors including germ cell tumors that include, but are not limited to, seminoma, spermatocytic seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, yolk sac tumor choriocarcinoma, teratoma, and mixed tumors, tumore of sex cord-gonadal stroma including, but not limited to, leydig (interstitial) cell tumors and sertoli cell tumors (androblastoma), and testicular lymphoma, and miscellaneous lesions of tunica vaginalis.

[0092] Disorders involving the thyroid include, but are not limited to, hyperthyroidism; hypothyroidism including, but not limited to, cretinism and myxedema; thyroiditis including, but not limited to, hashimoto thyroiditis, subacute (granulomatous) thyroiditis, and subacute lymphocytic (painless) thyroiditis; Graves disease; diffuse and multinodular goiter including, but not limited to, diffuse nontoxic (simple) goiter and multinodular goiter; neoplasms of the thyroid including, but not limited to, adenomas, other benign tumors, and carcinomas, which include, but are not limited to, papillary carcinoma, follicular carcinoma, medullary carcinoma, and anaplastic carcinoma; and cogenital anomalies.

[0093] Disorders involving the kidney include, but are not limited to, congenital anomalies including, but not limited to, cystic diseases of the kidney, that include but are not limited to, cystic renal dysplasia, autosomal dominant (adult) polycystic kidney disease, autosomal recessive (childhood) polycystic kidney disease, and cystic diseases of renal medulla, which include, but are not limited to, medullary sponge kidney, and nephronophthisis-uremic medullary cystic disease complex, acquired (dialysis-associated) cystic disease, such as simple cysts; glomerular diseases including pathologies of glomerular injury that include, but are not limited to, in situ immune complex deposition, that includes, but is not limited to, anti-GBM nephritis, Heymann nephritis, and antibodies against planted antigens, circulating immune complex nephritis, antibodies to glomerular cells, cell-mediated immunity in glomerulonephritis, activation of alternative complement pathway, epithelial cell injury, and pathologies involving mediators of glomerular injury including cellular and soluble mediators, acute glomerulonephritis, such as acute proliferative (poststreptococcal, postinfectious) glomerulonephritis, including but not limited to, poststreptococcal glomerulonephritis and nonstreptococcal acute glomerulonephritis, rapidly progressive (crescentic) glomerulonephritis, nephrotic syndrome, membranous glomerulonephritis (membranous nephropathy), minimal change disease (lipoid nephrosis), focal segmental glomerulosclerosis, membranoproliferative glomerulonephritis, IgA nephropathy (Berger disease), focal proliferative and necrotizing glomerulonephritis (focal glomerulonephritis), hereditary nephritis, including but not limited to, Alport syndrome and thin membrane disease (benign familial hematuria), chronic glomerulonephritis, glomerular lesions associated with systemic disease, including but not limited to, systemic lupus erythematosus, Henoch-Schönlein purpura, bacterial endocarditis, diabetic glomerulosclerosis, amyloidosis, fibrillary and immunotactoid glomerulonephritis, and other systemic disorders; diseases affecting tubules and interstitium, including acute tubular necrosis and tubulointerstitial nephritis, including but not limited to, pyelonephritis and urinary tract infection, acute pyelonephritis, chronic pyelonephritis and reflux nephropathy, and tubulointerstitial nephritis induced by drugs and toxins, including but not limited to, acute drug-induced interstitial nephritis, analgesic abuse nephropathy, nephropathy associated with nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs, and other tubulointerstitial diseases including, but not limited to, urate nephropathy, hypercalcemia and nephrocalcinosis, and multiple myeloma; diseases of blood vessels including benign nephrosclerosis, malignant hypertension and accelerated nephrosclerosis, renal artery stenosis, and thrombotic microangiopathies including, but not limited to, classic (childhood) hemolytic-uremic syndrome, adult hemolytic-uremic syndrome/thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura, idiopathic HUS/TTP, and other vascular disorders including, but not limited to, atherosclerotic ischemic renal disease, atheroembolic renal disease, sickle cell disease nephropathy, diffuse cortical necrosis, and renal infarcts; urinary tract obstruction (obstructive uropathy); urolithiasis (renal calculi, stones); and tumors of the kidney including, but not limited to, benign tumors, such as renal papillary adenoma, renal fibroma or hamartoma (renomedullary interstitial cell tumor), angiomyolipoma, and oncocytoma, and malignant tumors, including renal cell carcinoma (hypernephroma, adenocarcinoma of kidney), which includes urothelial carcinomas of renal pelvis.

[0094] Disorders involving the pancreas include those of the exocrine pancreas such as congenital anomalies, including but not limited to, ectopic pancreas; pancreatitis, including but not limited to, acute pancreatitis; cysts, including but not limited to, pseudocysts; tumors, including but not limited to, cystic tumors and carcinoma of the pancreas; and disorders of the endocrine pancreas such as, diabetes mellitus; islet cell tumors, including but not limited to, insulinomas, gastrinomas, and other rare islet cell tumors.

[0095] Disorders involving the thymus include developmental disorders, such as DiGeorge syndrome with thymic hypoplasia or aplasia; thymic cysts; thymic hypoplasia, which involves the appearance of lymphoid follicles within the thymus, creating thymic follicular hyperplasia; and thymomas, including germ cell tumors, lynphomas, Hodgkin disease, and carcinoids. Thymomas can include benign or encapsulated thymoma, and malignant thymoma Type I (invasive thymoma) or Type II, designated thymic carcinoma.

[0096] Disorders involving the spleen include, but are not limited to, splenomegaly, including nonspecific acute splenitis, congestive spenomegaly, and spenic infarcts; neoplasms, congenital anomalies, and rupture. Disorders associated with splenomegaly include infections, such as nonspecific splenitis, infectious mononucleosis, tuberculosis, typhoid fever, brucellosis, cytomegalovirus, syphilis, malaria, histoplasmosis, toxoplasmosis, kala-azar, trypanosomiasis, schistosomiasis, leishmaniasis, and echinococcosis; congestive states related to partial hypertension, such as cirrhosis of the liver, portal or splenic vein thrombosis, and cardiac failure; lymphohematogenous disorders, such as Hodgkin disease, non-Hodgkin lymphomas/leukemia, multiple myeloma, myeloproliferative disorders, hemolytic anemias, and thrombocytopenic purpura; immunologic-inflammatory conditions, such as rheumatoid arthritis and systemic lupus erythematosus; storage diseases such as Gaucher disease, Niemann-Pick disease, and mucopolysaccharidoses; and other conditions, such as amyloidosis, primary neoplasms and cysts, and secondary neoplasms.

[0097] Disorders involving the heart, include but are not limited to, heart failure, including but not limited to, cardiac hypertrophy, left-sided heart failure, and right-sided heart failure; ischemic heart disease, including but not limited to angina pectoris, myocardial infarction, chronic ischemic heart disease, and sudden cardiac death; hypertensive heart disease, including but not limited to, systemic (left-sided) hypertensive heart disease and pulmonary (right-sided) hypertensive heart disease; valvular heart disease, including but not limited to, valvular degeneration caused by calcification, such as calcific aortic stenosis, calcification of a congenitally bicuspid aortic valve, and mitral annular calcification, and myxomatous degeneration of the mitral valve (mitral valve prolapse), rheumatic fever and rheumatic heart disease, infective endocarditis, and noninfected vegetations, such as nonbacterial thrombotic endocarditis and endocarditis of systemic lupus erythematosus (Libman-Sacks disease), carcinoid heart disease, and complications of artificial valves; myocardial disease, including but not limited to dilated cardiomyopathy, hypertrophic cardiomyopathy, restrictive cardiomyopathy, and myocarditis; pericardial disease, including but not limited to, pericardial effusion and hemopericardium and pericarditis, including acute pericarditis and healed pericarditis, and rheumatoid heart disease; neoplastic heart disease, including but not limited to, primary cardiac tumors, such as myxoma, lipoma, papillary fibroelastoma, rhabdomyoma, and sarcoma, and cardiac effects of noncardiac neoplasms; congenital heart disease, including but not limited to, left-to-right shunts—late cyanosis, such as atrial septal defect, ventricular septal defect, patent ductus arteriosus, and atrioventricular septal defect, right-to-left shunts—early cyanosis, such as tetralogy of fallot, transposition of great arteries, truncus arteriosus, tricuspid atresia, and total anomalous pulmonary venous connection, obstructive congenital anomalies, such as coarctation of aorta, pulmonary stenosis and atresia, and aortic stenosis and atresia, and disorders involving cardiac transplantation.

[0098] Disorders involving the liver include, but are not limited to, hepatic injury; jaundice and cholestasis, such as bilirubin and bile formation; hepatic failure and cirrhosis, such as cirrhosis, portal hypertension, including ascites, portosystemic shunts, and splenomegaly; infectious disorders, such as viral hepatitis, including hepatitis A-E infection and infection by other hepatitis viruses, clinicopathologic syndromes, such as the carrier state, asymptomatic infection, acute viral hepatitis, chronic viral hepatitis, and fulminant hepatitis; autoimmune hepatitis; drug- and toxin-induced liver disease, such as alcoholic liver disease; inborn errors of metabolism and pediatric liver disease, such as hemochromatosis, Wilson disease, α1-antitrypsin deficiency, and neonatal hepatitis; intrahepatic biliary tract disease, such as secondary biliary cirrhosis, primary biliary cirrhosis, primary sclerosing cholangitis, and anomalies of the biliary tree; circulatory disorders, such as impaired blood flow into the liver, including hepatic artery compromise and portal vein obstruction and thrombosis, impaired blood flow through the liver, including passive congestion and centrilobular necrosis and peliosis hepatis, hepatic vein outflow obstruction, including hepatic vein thrombosis (Budd-Chiari syndrome) and veno-occlusive disease; hepatic disease associated with pregnancy, such as preeclampsia and eclampsia, acute fatty liver of pregnancy, and intrehepatic cholestasis of pregnancy; hepatic complications of organ or bone marrow transplantation, such as drug toxicity after bone marrow transplantation, graft-versus-host disease and liver rejection, and nonimmunologic damage to liver allografts; tumors and tumorous conditions, such as nodular hyperplasias, adenomas, and malignant tumors, including primary carcinoma of the liver and metastatic tumors.

[0099] Disorders involving T-cells include, but are not limited to, cell-mediated hypersensitivity, such as delayed type hypersensitivity and T-cell-mediated cytotoxicity, and transplant rejection; autoimmune diseases, such as systemic lupus erythematosus, Sjögren syndrome, systemic sclerosis, inflammatory myopathies, mixed connective tissue disease, and polyarteritis nodosa and other vasculitides; immunologic deficiency syndromes, including but not limited to, primary immunodeficiencies, such as thymic hypoplasia, severe combined immunodeficiency diseases, and AIDS; leukopenia; reactive (inflammatory) proliferations of white cells, including but not limited to, leukocytosis, acute nonspecific lymphadenitis, and chronic nonspecific lymphadenitis; neoplastic proliferations of white cells, including but not limited to lymphoid neoplasms, such as precursor T-cell neoplasms, such as acute lymphoblastic leukemia/lymphoma, peripheral T-cell and natural killer cell neoplasms that include peripheral T-cell lymphoma, unspecified, adult T-cell leukemia/lymphoma, mycosis fingoides and Sezary syndrome, and Hodgkin disease.

[0100] Disorders involving B-cells include, but are not limited to precursor B-cell neoplasms, such as lymphoblastic leukemia/lymphoma. Peripheral B-cell neoplasms include, but are not limited to, chronic lymphocytic leukemia/small lymphocytic lymphoma, follicular lymphoma, diffuse large B-cell lymphoma, Burkitt lymphoma, plasma cell neoplasms, multiple myeloma, and related entities, lymphoplasmacytic lymphoma (Waldenstrom macroglobulinemia), mantle cell lymphoma, marginal zone lymphoma (MALToma), and hairy cell leukemia.

[0101] In normal bone marrow, the myelocytic series (polymorphoneuclear cells) make up approximately 60% of the cellular elements, and the erythrocytic series, 20-30%. Lymphocytes, monocytes, reticular cells, plasma cells and megakaryocytes together constitute 10-20%. Lymphocytes make up 5-15% of normal adult marrow. In the bone marrow, cell types are add mixed so that precursors of red blood cells (erythroblasts), macrophages (monoblasts), platelets (megakaryocytes), polymorphoneuclear leucocytes (myeloblasts), and lymphocytes (lymphoblasts) can be visible in one microscopic field. In addition, stem cells exist for the different cell lineages, as well as a precursor stem cell for the committed progenitor cells of the different lineages. The various types of cells and stages of each would be known to the person of ordinary skill in the art and are found, for example, on page 42 (FIGS. 2-8) of Immunology, Imunopathology and Immunity, Fifth Edition, Sell et al. Simon and Schuster (1996), incorporated by reference for its teaching of cell types found in the bone marrow. According, the invention is directed to disorders arising from these cells. These disorders include but are not limited to the following: diseases involving hematopoeitic stem cells; committed lymphoid progenitor cells; lymphoid cells including B and T-cells; committed myeloid progenitors, including monocytes, granulocytes, and megakaryocytes; and committed erythroid progenitors. These include but are not limited to the leukemias, including B-lymphoid leukemias, T-lymphoid leukemias, undifferentiated leukemias; erythroleukemia, megakaryoblastic leukemia, monocytic; [leukemias are encompassed with and without differentiation]; chronic and acute lymphoblastic leukemia, chronic and acute lymphocytic leukemia, chronic and acute myelogenous leukemia, lymphoma, myelo dysplastic syndrome, chronic and acute myeloid leukemia, myelomonocytic leukemia; chronic and acute myeloblastic leukemia, chronic and acute myelogenous leukemia, chronic and acute promyelocytic leukemia, chronic and acute myelocytic leukemia, hematologic malignancies of monocyte-macrophage lineage, such as juvenile chronic myelogenous leukemia; secondary AML, antecedent hematological disorder; refractory anemia; aplastic anemia; reactive cutaneous angioendotheliomatosis; fibrosing disorders involving altered expression in dendritic cells, disorders including systemic sclerosis, E-M syndrome, epidemic toxic oil syndrome, eosinophilic fasciitis localized forms of scleroderma, keloid, and fibrosing colonopathy; angiomatoid malignant fibrous histiocytoma; carcinoma, including primary head and neck squamous cell carcinoma; sarcoma, including kaposi's sarcoma; fibroadanoma and phyllodes tumors, including mammary fibroadenoma; stromal tumors; phyllodes tumors, including histiocytoma; erythroblastosis; neurofibromatosis; diseases of the vascular endothelium; demyelinating, particularly in old lesions; gliosis, vasogenic edema, vascular disease, Alzheimer's and Parkinson's disease; T-cell lymphomas; B-cell lymphomas.

[0102] Disorders related to reduced platelet number, thrombocytopenia, include idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura, including acute idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura, drug-induced thrombocytopenia, HIV-associated thrombocytopenia, and thrombotic microangiopathies: thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura and hemolytic-uremic syndrome.

[0103] Disorders involving precursor T-cell neoplasms include precursor T lymphoblastic leukemia/lymphoma. Disorders involving peripheral T-cell and natural killer cell neoplasms include T-cell chronic lymphocytic leukemia, large granular lymphocytic leukemia, mycosis fungoides and Sezary syndrome, peripheral T-cell lymphoma, unspecified, angioimmunoblastic T-cell lymphoma, angiocentric lymphoma (NK/T-cell lymphoma4a), intestinal T-cell lymphoma, adult T-cell leukemia/lymphoma, and anaplastic large cell lymphoma.

[0104] The gene is expressed at significant levels in all blood cell progenitors analyzed by the inventors. It is highly expressed in bone marrow (CD34+), G-CSF-mobilized peripheral blood (containing circulating progenitors derived from bone marrow) and is moderately expressed in CD34+ adult bone marrow and CD34+ cord blood cells. It is also highly expressed in megakaryocytes as well as CD41+ (CD14−) bone marrow cells. G-CSF-mobilized peripheral blood contains circulating progenitors derived from bone marrow. Accordingly, expression of the gene is relevant for treating disorders associated with the formation of differentiated and/or mature blood cells. In this regard, disorders that are particularly relevant include anemia, neutropenia, and thrombocytopenia.

[0105] Additionally, 2871 protein mediate various disorders, including cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders. Examples of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders include cancer, e.g., carcinoma, sarcoma, metastatic disorders or hematopoietic neoplastic disorders, e.g., leukemias. A metastatic tumor can arise from a multitude of primary tumor types, including but not limited to those of prostate, colon, lung, breast, ovary, and liver origin.

[0106] As used herein, the terms “cancer,” “hyperproliferative” and “neoplastic” refer to cells having the capacity for autonomous growth, i.e., an abnormal state or condition characterized by rapidly proliferating cell growth. Hyperproliferative and neoplastic disease states may be categorized as pathologic, i.e., characterizing or constituting a disease state, or may be categorized as non-pathologic, i.e., a deviation from normal but not associated with a disease state. The term is meant to include all types of cancerous growths or oncogenic processes, metastataic tissues or malignantly transformed cells, tissues, or organs, irrespective of histopathologic type or stage of invasiveness. “Pathologic hyperproliferative” cells occur in disease states characterized by malignant tumor growth. Examples of non-pathologic hyperproliferative cells include proliferation of cells associated with wound repair.

[0107] The terms “cancer” or “neoplasms” include malignancies of the various organ systems, such as affecting lung, breast, thyroid, lymphoid, gastrointestinal, ovary, and genitourinary tract, as well as adenocarcinomas which include malignancies such as most colon cancers, renal-cell carcinoma, prostate cancer and/or testicular tumors, non-small cell carcinoma of the lung, cancer of the small intestine and cancer of the esophagus.

[0108] The term “carcinoma” is art recognized and refers to malignancies of epithelial or endocrine tissues including respiratory system carcinomas, gastrointestinal system carcinomas, genitourinary system carcinomas, and melanomas. Exemplary carcinomas include those forming from tissue of the cervix, lung, prostate, breast, head and neck, colon, and ovary. The term also includes carcinosarcomas, e.g., which include malignant tumors composed of carcinomatous and sarcomatous tissues. An “adenocarcinoma” refers to a carcinoma derived from glandular tissue or in which the tumor cells form recognizable glandular structures.

[0109] The term “sarcoma” is art recognized and refers to malignant tumors of mesenchymal derivation.

[0110] The 2871 gene is expressed in elevated levels in breast tumor cells, glio cells, colon tumor cells, lung tumor cells, ovary cells, placenta, brain cortex, pancreas, aorta, and skin cells. The expression of 2871 is downregulated in the presence of p53. p53 is a tumor-suppressor gene that can act to upregulate or downregulate genes. Because genes that are downregulated or suppressed in the presence of p53 maybe involved in tumorigenesis, 2871 may be involved in tumorigenesis, particularly in breast, colon, lung, and ovarian cancer.

[0111] As used interchangeably herein a “2871 activity”, “biological activity of 2871” or “fuctional activity of 2871”, refers to an activity exerted by a 2871 protein, polypeptide or nucleic acid molecule on a 2871 responsive cell as determined in vivo, or in vitro, according to standard techniques. In one embodiment, a 2871 activity is a direct activity, such as an association with a target protein, preferably a 2871 target molecule (e.g., a G-protein alpha subunit or a 2871 ligand). In another embodiment, a 2871 activity is an indirect activity, such as inhibiting the synthesis or activity of a second protein (e.g., a protein of a signal transduction pathway). In a preferred embodiment, a 2871 activity is at least one or more of the following activities: (i) interaction of a 2871 protein in the plasma membrane with a protein or other organic molecule secreted from the same cell which expresses the 2871 protein molecule (e.g., a 2871 ligand); (ii) interaction of a 2871 protein in the plasma membrane with a protein or other organic molecule secreted from a different cell from that which contains the 2871 protein molecule (e.g., a 2871 ligand); (iii) complex formation between a 2871 protein and a secreted peptide, polypeptide, or small molecule; (iv) interaction of a 2871 protein with a target molecule in the extracellular milieu (e.g., a soluble target molecule); (v) interaction of the 2871 protein with an intracellular target molecule (e.g., interaction with an internalized or endocytosed ligand); and (vi) complex formation with one, two, or more, intracellular target molecules.

[0112] In yet another preferred embodiment, a 2871 activity is at least one or more of the following activities: (1) modulating, for example, agonizing or antagonizing a signal transduction pathway (e.g., a 2871-dependent pathway); (2) modulating cytokine production and/or secretion (e.g., production and/or secretion of a proinflammatory cytokine); (3) modulating lymphokine production and/or secretion; (4) modulating brain function; (5) modulating production of adhesion molecules and/or cellular adhesion; (6) modulating expression or activity of nuclear transcription factors; (7) modulating expression of IL-4, IL-5, or of other cytokines involved in T-cell function; (8) modulating cell proliferation, development or differentiation, for example, helper T-cell differentiation to Th1 versus Th2 cells; (9) modulating cell proliferation, development or differentiation of bone marrow and/or megakaryocyte precursor cells; (10) modulating cellular immune responses; (11) modulating cytokine-mediated proinflammatory actions (e.g., inhibiting acute phase protein synthesis by hepatocytes, fever, and/or prostaglandin synthesis, for example PGE2 synthesis); (12) promoting and/or potentiating wound healing; and, (13) modulating cellular proliferation.

[0113] In yet another preferred embodiment, a 2871 activity is also modulating the differentiation, development, proliferation, and generally the production of cells in the leukocyte, platelet, and erythrocyte lineages. These include CD34+ stem cells that give rise to cells of all three lineages, and to the subsequently produced progenitor cells in the developmental pathway that gives rise to the three fully differentiated cell types.

[0114] Methods Generally

[0115] The invention is directed to methods, uses, and reagents applicable to methods and uses that are applied to cells, tissues and disorders of these cells and tissues wherein the receptor expression is relevant. The receptor is expressed in a variety of tissues as shown in FIGS. 5-7. Accordingly, the methods and uses of the invention as disclosed in greater detail herein above and below apply to these tissues, disorders involving these tissues, and particularly to the disorders with which gene expression is associated, as shown in these figures and as disclosed herein. Therefore, the methods, uses, and reagents disclosed in greater detail herein especially apply to thymus, brain, CD34+ cells, prostate, testis, placenta, pancreas, red blood cells and progenitors thereof, leukocytes (e.g., B-cells, T-cells, monocytes or granulocytes) and progenitors thereof, and platelets and progenitors thereof (e.g., megakaryocytes). In addition, lower but positive expression was observed in several other tissues and cells and accordingly the uses, reagents, and methods disclosed in detail herein apply also to these tissues, cell types and disorders involving these tissues and cell types.

[0116] Polypeptides

[0117] The invention is based on the discovery of a novel G-coupled protein receptor. Specifically, an expressed sequence tag (EST) was selected based on homology to G-protein-coupled receptor sequences. This EST was used to design primers based on sequences that it contains and used to identify a cDNA from a prostate cDNA library. Positive clones were sequenced and the overlapping fragments were assembled. Analysis of the assembled sequence revealed that the cloned cDNA molecule encodes a G-protein coupled receptor.

[0118] The invention thus relates to a novel GPCR having the deduced amino acid sequence shown in FIGS. 1A-1D (SEQ ID NO: 1) or having the amino acid sequence encoded by the deposited cDNA, ATCC No. PTA-2369 on Aug. 11, 2000.

[0119] The deposit will be maintained under the terms of the Budapest Treaty on the International Recognition of the Deposit of Microorganisms. The deposit is provided as a convenience to those of skill in the art and is not an admission that a deposit is required under 35 U.S.C. §112. The deposited sequence, as well as the polypeptide encoded by the sequence, is incorporated herein by reference and controls in the event of any conflict, such as a sequencing error, with description in this application.

[0120] The “2871 receptor polypeptide” or “2871 receptor protein” refers to the polypeptide in SEQ ID NO: 1 or encoded by the deposited cDNA. The term “receptor protein” or “receptor polypeptide”, however, further includes the numerous variants described herein, as well as fragments derived from the full length 2871 polypeptide and variants.

[0121] The present invention thus provides an isolated or purified 2871 receptor polypeptide and variants and fragments thereof.

[0122] The 2871 polypeptide is a 359 residue protein exhibiting three main structural domains. The extracellular domain is identified to be within residues 1 to about 42 in SEQ ID NO: 1. The transmembrane domain is identified to be within residues from about 43 to about 318 in SEQ ID NO: 1. The intracellular domain is identified to be within residues from about 319 to about 359 in SEQ ID NO: 1. The transmembrane domain includes a GPCR signal transduction signature, DRY, at residues 138-140.

[0123] As used herein, a polypeptide is said to be “isolated” or “purified” when it is substantially free of cellular material when it is isolated from recombinant and non-recombinant cells, or free of chemical precursors or other chemicals when it is chemically synthesized. A polypeptide, however, can be joined to another polypeptide with which it is not normally associated in a cell and still be considered “isolated” or “purified.”

[0124] The receptor polypeptides can be purified to homogeneity. It is understood, however, that preparations in which the polypeptide is not purified to homogeneity are useful and considered to contain an isolated form of the polypeptide. The critical feature is that the preparation allows for the desired function of the polypeptide, even in the presence of considerable amounts of other components. Thus, the invention encompasses various degrees of purity.

[0125] In one embodiment, the language “substantially free of cellular material” includes preparations of the receptor polypeptide having less than about 30% (by dry weight) other proteins (i.e., contaminating protein), less than about 20% other proteins, less than about 10% other proteins, or less than about 5% other proteins. When the receptor polypeptide is recombinantly produced, it can also be substantially free of culture medium, i.e., culture medium represents less than about 20%, less than about 10%, or less than about 5% of the volume of the protein preparation.

[0126] The language “substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals” includes preparations of the receptor polypeptide in which it is separated from chemical precursors or other chemicals that are involved in its synthesis. In one embodiment, the language “substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals” includes preparations of the polypeptide having less than about 30% (by dry weight) chemical precursors or other chemicals, less than about 20% chemical precursors or other chemicals, less than about 10% chemical precursors or other chemicals, or less than about 5% chemical precursors or other chemicals.

[0127] In one embodiment, the receptor polypeptide comprises the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1. However, the invention also encompasses sequence variants. Variants include a substantially homologous protein encoded by the same genetic locus in an organism, i.e., an allelic variant. Variants also encompass proteins derived from other genetic loci in an organism, but having substantial homology to the 2871 receptor protein of SEQ ID NO: 1. Variants also include proteins substantially homologous to the 2871 receptor protein but derived from another organism, i.e., an ortholog. Variants also include proteins that are substantially homologous to the 2871 receptor protein that are produced by chemical synthesis. Variants also include proteins that are substantially homologous to the 2871 receptor protein that are produced by recombinant methods.

[0128] As used herein, two proteins (or a region of the proteins) are substantially homologous when the amino acid sequences are at least about 55-60%, typically at least about 70-75%, more typically at least about 80-85%, and most typically at least about 90-95% or more homologous. A substantially homologous amino acid sequence, according to the present invention, will be encoded by a nucleic acid sequence hybridizing to the nucleic acid sequence, or portion thereof, of the sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 under stringent conditions as more fully described below.

[0129] To determine the percent homology of two amino acid sequences, or of two nucleic acids, the sequences are aligned for optimal comparison purposes (e.g., gaps can be introduced in the sequence of one protein or nucleic acid for optimal alignment with the other protein or nucleic acid). The amino acid residues or nucleotides at corresponding amino acid positions or nucleotide positions are then compared. When a position in one sequence is occupied by the same amino acid residue or nucleotide as the corresponding position in the other sequence, then the molecules are homologous at that position. As used herein, amino acid or nucleic acid “homology” is equivalent to amino acid or nucleic acid “identity”. The percent homology between the two sequences is a function of the number of identical positions shared by the sequences (i.e., per cent homology equals the number of identical positions/total number of positions times 100).

[0130] The invention also encompasses polypeptides having a lower degree of identity but having sufficient similarity so as to perform one or more of the same functions performed by the 2871 polypeptide. Similarity is determined by conserved amino acid substitution. Such substitutions are those that substitute a given amino acid in a polypeptide by another amino acid of like characteristics. Conservative substitutions are likely to be phenotypically silent. Typically seen as conservative substitutions are the replacements, one for another, among the aliphatic amino acids Ala, Val, Leu, and Ile; interchange of the hydroxyl residues Ser and Thr, exchange of the acidic residues Asp and Glu, substitution between the amide residues Asn and Gln, exchange of the basic residues Lys and Arg and replacements among the aromatic residues Phe, Tyr. Guidance concerning which amino acid changes are likely to be phenotypically silent are found in Bowie et al., Science 247:1306-1310 (1990).

1TABLE 1Conservative Amino Acid Substitutions.AromaticPhenylalanineTryptophanTyrosineHydrophobicLeucineIsoleucineValinePolarGlutamineAsparagineBasicArginineLysineHistidineAcidicAspartic AcidGlutamic AcidSmallAlanineSerineThreonineMethionineGlycine

[0131] Both identity and similarity can be readily calculated (Computational Molecular Biology, Lesk, A. M., ed., Oxford University Press, New York, 1988; Biocomputing: Informatics and Genome Projects, Smith, D. W., ed., Academic Press, New York, 1993; Computer Analysis of Sequence Data, Part 1, Griffin, A. M., and Griffin, H. G., eds., Humana Press, New Jersey, 1994; Sequence Analysis in Molecular Biology, von Heinje, G., Academic Press, 1987; and Sequence Analysis Primer, Gribskov, M. and Devereux, J., eds., M Stockton Press, New York, 1991).

[0132] Preferred computer program methods to determine identify and similarity between two sequences include, but are not limited to, GCG program package (Devereux, J., et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 12(1):387 (1984)), BLASTP, BLASTN, FASTA (Atschul, S. F. et al., J. Molec. Biol. 215:403 (1990)).

[0133] A variant polypeptide can differ in amino acid sequence by one or more substitutions, deletions, insertions, inversions, fusions, and truncations or a combination of any of these.

[0134] Variant polypeptides can be fully functional or can lack function in one or more activities. Thus, in the present case, variations can effect the function, for example, of one or more of the regions corresponding to ligand binding, transmembrane association, G-protein binding and signal transduction.

[0135] Fully functional variants typically contain only conservative variation or variation in non-critical residues or in non-critical regions. Functional variants can also contain substitution of similar amino acids which result in no change or an insignificant change in function. Alternatively, such substitutions may positively or negatively effect function to some degree.

[0136] Non-functional variants typically contain one or more non-conservative amino acid substitutions, deletions, insertions, inversions, or truncation or a substitution, insertion, inversion, or deletion in a critical residue or critical region.

[0137] As indicated, variants can be naturally-occurring or can be made by recombinant means or chemical synthesis to provide useful and novel characteristics for the receptor polypeptide. This includes preventing immunogenicity from pharmaceutical formulations by preventing protein aggregation.

[0138] Useful variations further include alteration of ligand binding characteristics. For example, one embodiment involves a variation at the binding site that results in binding but not release of ligand. A further useful variation at the same sites can result in a higher affinity for ligand. Useful variations also include changes that provide for affinity for another ligand. Another useful variation includes one that allows binding but which prevents activation by the ligand. Another useful variation includes variation in the transmembrane G-protein-binding/signal transduction domain that provides for reduced or increased binding by the appropriate G-protein or for binding by a different G-protein than the one with which the receptor is normally associated. Another useful variation provides a fusion protein in which one or more domains is operationally fused to one or more domains from another G-protein coupled receptor.

[0139] Amino acids that are essential for function can be identified by methods known in the art, such as site-directed mutagenesis or alanine-scanning mutagenesis (Cunningham et al., Science 244:1081-1085 (1989)). The latter procedure introduces single alanine mutations at every residue in the molecule. The resulting mutant molecules are then tested for biological activity such as receptor binding or in vitro, or in vitro proliferative activity. Sites that are critical for ligand-receptor binding can also be determined by structural analysis such as crystallization, nuclear magnetic resonance or photoaffinity labeling (Smith et al., J. Mol. Biol. 224:899-904 (1992); de Vos et al. Science 255:306-312 (1992)).

[0140] The invention also includes polypeptide fragments of the 2871 receptor protein. Fragments can be derived from the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1. However, the invention also encompasses fragments of the variants of the 2871 receptor protein as described herein.

[0141] As used herein, a fragment comprises at least 12 contiguous amino acids. Fragments retain one or more of the biological activities of the protein, for example the ability to bind to a G-protein or ligand, as well as fragments that can be used as an immunogen to generate receptor antibodies.

[0142] Biologically active fragments (peptides which are, for example, 12, 15, 20, 30, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 50, 100 or more amino acids in length) can comprise a domain or motif, e.g., an extracellular domain, one or more transmembrane domains, G-protein binding domain, or GPCR signature.

[0143] Possible fragments include, but are not limited to: 1) soluble peptides comprising the entire extracellular domain from about amino acid 1 to about amino acid 42 of SEQ ID NO: 1; 2) peptides comprising the intracellular domain from about amino acid 319 to about amino acid 359 of SEQ ID NO: 1; 3) peptides comprising the entire transmembrane domain from about amino acid 43 to amino acid 318.

[0144] The invention also provides fragments with immunogenic properties. These contain an epitope-bearing portion of the 2871 receptor protein and variants. These epitope-bearing peptides are useful to raise antibodies that bind specifically to a receptor polypeptide or region or fragment. These peptides can contain at least 12, at least 14, or between at least about 15 to about 30 amino acids.

[0145] Non-limiting examples of antigenic polypeptides that can be used to generate antibodies include peptides derived from the extracellular domain.

[0146] The epitope-bearing receptor and polypeptides may be produced by any conventional means (Houghten, R. A., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:5131-5135 (1985)). Simultaneous multiple peptide synthesis is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,631,211.

[0147] Fragments can be discrete (not fused to other amino acids or polypeptides) or can be within a larger polypeptide. Further, several fragments can be comprised within a single larger polypeptide. In one embodiment a fragment designed for expression in a host can have heterologous pre- and pro-polypeptide regions fused to the amino terminus of the receptor fragment and an additional region fused to the carboxyl terminus of the fragment.

[0148] The invention thus provides chimeric or fusion proteins. These comprise a receptor protein operatively linked to a heterologous protein having an amino acid sequence not substantially homologous to the receptor protein. “Operatively linked” indicates that the receptor protein and the heterologous protein are fused in-frame. The heterologous protein can be fused to the N-terminus or C-terminus of the receptor protein.

[0149] In one embodiment the fusion protein does not affect receptor function per se. For example, the fusion protein can be a GST-fusion protein in which the receptor sequences are fused to the C-terminus of the GST sequences. Other types of fusion proteins include, but are not limited to, enzymatic fusion proteins, for example beta-galactosidase fusions, yeast two-hybrid GAL fusions, poly-His fusions and Ig fusions. Such fusion proteins, particularly poly-His fusions, can facilitate the purification of recombinant receptor protein. In certain host cells (e.g., mammalian host cells), expression and/or secretion of a protein can be increased by using a heterologous signal sequence. Therefore, in another embodiment, the fusion protein contains a heterologous signal sequence at its N-terminus.

[0150] EP-A-O 464 533 discloses fusion proteins comprising various portions of immunoglobin constant regions. The Fc is useful in therapy and diagnosis and thus results, for example, in improved pharmacokinetic properties (EP-A 0232 262). In drug discovery, for example, human proteins have been fused with Fc portions for the purpose of high-throughput screening assays to identify antagonists. Bennett et al., Journal of Molecular Recognition 8:52-58 (1995) and Johanson et al., The Journal of Biological Chemistry 270,16:9459-9471 (1995). Thus, this invention also encompasses soluble fusion proteins containing a receptor polypeptide and various portions of the constant regions of heavy or light chains of immunoglobulins of various subclass (IgG, IgM, IgA, IgE). Preferred as immunoglobulin is the constant part of the heavy chain of human IgG, particularly IgG1, where fusion takes place at the hinge region. For some uses it is desirable to remove the Fc after the fusion protein has been used for its intended purpose, for example when the fusion protein is to be used as antigen for immunizations. In a particular embodiment, the Fc part can be removed in a simple way by a cleavage sequence which is also incorporated and can be cleaved with factor Xa.

[0151] A chimeric or fusion protein can be produced by standard recombinant DNA techniques. For example, DNA fragments coding for the different protein sequences are ligated together in-frame in accordance with conventional techniques. In another embodiment, the fusion gene can be synthesized by conventional techniques including automated DNA synthesizers. Alternatively, PCR amplification of gene fragments can be carried out using anchor primers which give rise to complementary overhangs between two consecutive gene fragments which can subsequently be annealed and re-amplified to generate a chimeric gene sequence (see Ausubel et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, 1992). Moreover, many expression vectors are commercially available that already encode a fusion moiety (e.g., a GST protein). A receptor protein-encoding nucleic acid can be cloned into such an expression vector such that the fusion moiety is linked in-frame to the receptor protein.

[0152] Another form of fusion protein is one that directly affects receptor functions. Accordingly, a receptor polypeptide encompassed by the present invention in which one or more of the receptor domains has been replaced by homologous domains from another G-protein coupled receptor or other type of receptor. Accordingly, various permutations are possible. The extracellular domain, or subregion thereof, (for example, ligand-binding) may be replaced with the domain or subregion from another ligand-binding receptor protein. Alternatively, transmembrane regions, for example, G-protein-binding/signal transduction, may be replaced. Finally, the intracellular domain may be replaced. Thus, chimeric receptors can be formed in which one or more of the native domains or subregions has been replaced.

[0153] The isolated receptor protein can be purified from cells that naturally express it, such as from prostate, placenta, uterus, testis, pancreas, tonsils, thymus, brain, CD34+ cells, including megakaryocytes, and as shown in FIGS. 5-7, purified from cells that have been altered to express it (recombinant), or synthesized using known protein synthesis methods.

[0154] In one embodiment, the protein is produced by recombinant DNA techniques. For example, a nucleic acid molecule encoding the receptor polypeptide is cloned into an expression vector, the expression vector introduced into a host cell and the protein expressed in the host cell. The protein can then be isolated from the cells by an appropriate purification scheme using standard protein purification techniques.

[0155] Polypeptides often contain amino acids other than the 20 amino acids commonly referred to as the 20 naturally-occurring amino acids. Further, many amino acids, including the terminal amino acids, may be modified by natural processes, such as processing and other post-translational modifications, or by chemical modification techniques well known in the art. Common modifications that occur naturally in polypeptides are described in basic texts, detailed monographs, and the research literature, and they are well known to those of skill in the art.

[0156] Accordingly, the polypeptides also encompass derivatives or analogs in which a substituted amino acid residue is not one encoded by the genetic code, in which a substituent group is included, in which the mature polypeptide is fused with another compound, such as a compound to increase the half-life of the polypeptide (for example, polyethylene glycol), or in which the additional amino acids are fused to the mature polypeptide, such as a leader or secretory sequence or a sequence for purification of the mature polypeptide or a pro-protein sequence.

[0157] Known modifications include, but are not limited to, acetylation, acylation, ADP-ribosylation, amidation, covalent attachment of flavin, covalent attachment of a heme moiety, covalent attachment of a nucleotide or nucleotide derivative, covalent attachment of a lipid or lipid derivative, covalent attachment of phosphotidylinositol, cross-linking, cyclization, disulfide bond formation, demethylation, formation of covalent crosslinks, formation of cystine, formation of pyroglutamate, formylation, gamma carboxylation, glycosylation, GPI anchor formation, hydroxylation, iodination, methylation, myristoylation, oxidation, proteolytic processing, phosphorylation, prenylation, racemization, selenoylation, sulfation, transfer-RNA mediated addition of amino acids to proteins such as arginylation, and ubiquitination.

[0158] Such modifications are well known to those of skill in the art and have been described in great detail in the scientific literature. Several particularly common modifications, glycosylation, lipid attachment, sulfation, gamma-carboxylation of glutamic acid residues, hydroxylation and ADP-ribosylation, for instance, are described in most basic texts, such as Proteins—Structure and Molecular Properties, 2nd Ed., T. E. Creighton, W. H. Freeman and Company, New York (1993). Many detailed reviews are available on this subject, such as by Wold, F., Posttranslational Covalent Modification of Proteins, B. C. Johnson, Ed., Academic Press, New York 1-12 (1983); Seifter et al., Meth. Enzymol. 182: 626-646 (1990) and Rattan et al., Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci. 663:48-62 (1992).

[0159] As is also well known, polypeptides are not always entirely linear. For instance, polypeptides may be branched as a result of ubiquitination, and they may be circular, with or without branching, generally as a result of post-translation events, including natural processing event and events brought about by human manipulation which do not occur naturally. Circular, branched and branched circular polypeptides may be synthesized by non-translational natural processes and by synthetic methods.

[0160] Modifications can occur anywhere in a polypeptide, including the peptide backbone, the amino acid side-chains and the amino or carboxyl termini. Blockage of the amino or carboxyl group in a polypeptide, or both, by a covalent modification, is common in naturally-occurring and synthetic polypeptides. For instance, the amino terminal residue of polypeptides made in E. coli, prior to proteolytic processing, almost invariably will be N-formylmethionine.

[0161] The modifications can be a function of how the protein is made. For recombinant polypeptides, for example, the modifications will be determined by the host cell posttranslational modification capacity and the modification signals in the polypeptide amino acid sequence. Accordingly, when glycosylation is desired, a polypeptide should be expressed in a glycosylating host, generally a eukaryotic cell. Insect cells often carry out the same posttranslational glycosylations as mammalian cells and, for this reason, insect cell expression systems have been developed to efficiently express mammalian proteins having native patterns of glycosylation. Similar considerations apply to other modifications.

[0162] The same type of modification may be present in the same or varying degree at several sites in a given polypeptide. Also, a given polypeptide may contain more than one type of modification.

[0163] Polypeptide Uses

[0164] The receptor polypeptides are useful for producing antibodies specific for the 2871 receptor protein, regions, or fragments.

[0165] The receptor polypeptides are also useful in drug screening assays, in cell-based or cell-free systems. Cell-based systems can be native i.e., cells that normally express the receptor protein, as a biopsy or expanded in cell culture, for example, in the cells disclosed herein. In one embodiment, however, cell-based assays involve recombinant host cells expressing the receptor protein.

[0166] The polypeptides can be used to identify compounds that modulate receptor activity. Both 2871 protein and appropriate variants and fragments can be used in high throughput screens to assay candidate compounds for the ability to bind to the receptor. These compounds can be further screened against a functional receptor to determine the effect of the compound on the receptor activity. Compounds can be identified that activate (agonist) or inactivate (antagonist) the receptor to a desired degree.

[0167] The receptor polypeptides can be used to screen a compound for the ability to stimulate or inhibit interaction between the receptor protein and a target molecule that normally interacts with the receptor protein. The target can be ligand or a component of the signal pathway with which the receptor protein normally interacts (for example, a G-protein or other interactor involved in cAMP or phosphatidylinositol turnover and/or adenylate cyclase, or phospholipase C activation). The assay includes the steps of combining the receptor protein with a candidate compound under conditions that allow the receptor protein or fragment to interact with the target molecule, and to detect the formation of a complex between the protein and the target or to detect the biochemical consequence of the interaction with the receptor protein and the target, such as any of the associated effects of signal transduction such as G-protein phosphorylation, cyclic AMP or phosphatidylinositol turnover, and adenylate cyclase or phospholipase C activation.

[0168] Candidate compounds include, for example, 1) peptides such as soluble peptides, including Ig-tailed fusion peptides and members of random peptide libraries (see, e.g., Lam et al., Nature 354:82-84 (1991); Houghten et al., Nature 354:84-86 (1991)) and combinatorial chemistry-derived molecular libraries made of D- and/or L- configuration amino acids; 2) phosphopeptides (e.g., members of random and partially degenerate, directed phosphopeptide libraries, see, e.g., Songyang et al., Cell 72:767-778 (1993)); 3) antibodies (e.g., polyclonal, monoclonal, humanized, anti-idiotypic, chimeric, and single chain antibodies as well as Fab, F(ab′)2, Fab expression library fragments, and epitope-binding fragments of antibodies); and 4) small organic and inorganic molecules (e.g., molecules obtained from combinatorial and natural product libraries).

[0169] One candidate compound is a soluble full-length receptor or fragment that competes for ligand binding. Other candidate compounds include mutant receptors or appropriate fragments containing mutations that affect receptor function and thus compete for ligand. Accordingly, a fragment that competes for ligand, for example with a higher affinity, or a fragment that binds ligand but does not allow release, is encompassed by the invention.

[0170] The invention provides other end points to identify compounds that modulate (stimulate or inhibit) receptor activity. The assays typically involve an assay of events in the signal transduction pathway that indicate receptor activity. Thus, the expression of genes that are up- or down-regulated in response to the receptor protein dependent signal cascade can be assayed. In one embodiment, the regulatory region of such genes can be operably linked to a marker that is easily detectable, such as luciferase. Alternatively, phosphorylation of the receptor protein, or a receptor protein target, could also be measured.

[0171] Binding and/or activating compounds can also be screened by using chimeric receptor proteins in which the extracellular domain, the transmembrane domain or subregions, and the intracellular domain can be replaced by heterologous domains. For example, a G-protein-binding region can be used that interacts with a different G-protein then that which is recognized by the native receptor. Accordingly, a different set of signal transduction components is available as an end-point assay for activation. Alternatively, the transmembrane portion can be replaced with the transmembrane portion specific to a host cell that is different from the host cell from which the extracellular domain and/or the G-protein-binding region are derived. This allows for assays to be performed in other than the specific host cell from which the receptor is derived. Alternatively, the extracellular domain could be replaced by a domain binding a different ligand, thus, enabling an assay for test compounds that interact with the heterologous extracellular domain but still cause signal transduction. Finally, activation can be detected by a reporter gene containing an easily detectable coding region operably linked to a transcriptional regulatory sequence that is part of the native signal transduction pathway.

[0172] The receptor polypeptides are also useful in competition binding assays in methods designed to discover compounds that interact with the receptor. Thus, a compound is exposed to a receptor polypeptide under conditions that allow the compound to bind or to otherwise interact with the polypeptide. Soluble receptor polypeptide is also added to the mixture. If the test compound interacts with the soluble receptor polypeptide, it decreases the amount of complex formed or activity from the receptor target. This type of assay is particularly useful in cases in which compounds are sought that interact with specific regions of the receptor. Thus, the soluble polypeptide that competes with the target receptor region is designed to contain peptide sequences corresponding to the region of interest.

[0173] To perform cell free drug screening assays, it is desirable to immobilize either the receptor protein, or fragment, or its target molecule to facilitate separation of complexes from uncomplexed forms of one or both of the proteins, as well as to accommodate automation of the assay.

[0174] Techniques for immobilizing proteins on matrices can be used in the drug screening assays. In one embodiment, a fusion protein can be provided which adds a domain that allows the protein to be bound to a matrix. For example, glutathione-S-transferase/2871 fusion proteins can be adsorbed onto glutathione sepharose beads (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, Mo.) or glutathione derivatized microtitre plates, which are then combined with the cell lysates (e.g., 35S-labeled) and the candidate compound, and the mixture incubated under conditions conducive to complex formation (e.g., at physiological conditions for salt and pH). Following incubation, the beads are washed to remove any unbound label, and the matrix immobilized and radiolabel determined directly, or in the supernatant after the complexes are dissociated. Alternatively, the complexes can be dissociated from the matrix, separated by SDS-PAGE, and the level of receptor-binding protein found in the bead fraction quantitated from the gel using standard electrophoretic techniques. For example, either the polypeptide or its target molecule can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin using techniques well known in the art. Alternatively, antibodies reactive with the protein but which do not interfere with binding of the protein to its target molecule can be derivatized to the wells of the plate, and the protein trapped in the wells by antibody conjugation. Preparations of a receptor-binding protein and a candidate compound are incubated in the receptor protein-presenting wells and the amount of complex trapped in the well can be quantitated. Methods for detecting such complexes, in addition to those described above for the GST-immobilized complexes, include immunodetection of complexes using antibodies reactive with the receptor protein target molecule, or which are reactive with receptor protein and compete with the target molecule; as well as enzyme-linked assays which rely on detecting an enzymatic activity associated with the target molecule.

[0175] Modulators of receptor protein activity identified according to these drug screening assays can be used to treat a subject with a disorder mediated by the receptor pathway, including, but not limited to, those disclosed herein, especially neutropenia, anemia, and thrombocytopenia. These methods of treatment include the steps of administering the modulators of protein activity in a pharmaceutical composition as described herein, to a subject in need of such treatment.

[0176] The receptor polypeptides also are useful to provide a target for diagnosing a disease or predisposition to disease mediated by the receptor protein, such as those disclosed herein, especially neutropenia, anemia, and thrombocytopenia. Accordingly, methods are provided for detecting the presence, or levels of, the receptor protein in a cell, tissue, or organism. The method involves contacting a biological sample with a compound capable of interacting with the receptor protein such that the interaction can be detected.

[0177] One agent for detecting receptor protein is an antibody capable of selectively binding to receptor protein. A biological sample includes tissues, cells and biological fluids isolated from a subject, as well as tissues, cells and fluids present within a subject.

[0178] The receptor protein also provides a target for diagnosing active disease, or predisposition to disease, in a patient having a variant receptor protein. Thus, receptor protein can be isolated from a biological sample, assayed for the presence of a genetic mutation that results in aberrant receptor protein. This includes amino acid substitution, deletion, insertion, rearrangement, (as the result of aberrant splicing events), and inappropriate post-translational modification. Analytic methods include altered electrophoretic mobility, altered tryptic peptide digest, altered receptor activity in cell-based or cell-free assay, alteration in ligand or antibody-binding pattern, altered isoelectric point, direct amino acid sequencing, and any other of the known assay techniques useful for detecting mutations in a protein.

[0179] In vitro techniques for detection of receptor protein include enzyme linked immunosorbent assays (ELISAs), Western blots, immunoprecipitations and immunofluorescence. Alternatively, the protein can be detected in vivo in a subject by introducing into the subject a labeled anti-receptor antibody. For example, the antibody can be labeled with a radioactive marker whose presence and location in a subject can be detected by standard imaging techniques. Particularly useful are methods which detect the allelic variant of a receptor protein expressed in a subject and methods which detect fragments of a receptor protein in a sample.

[0180] The receptor polypeptides are also useful in pharmacogenomic analysis. Accordingly, genetic polymorphism may lead to allelic protein variants of the receptor protein in which one or more of the receptor functions in one population is different from those in another population. The polypeptides thus allow a target to ascertain a genetic predisposition that can affect treatment modality. Thus, in a ligand-based treatment, polymorphism may give rise to extracellular domains that are more or less active in ligand binding, and receptor activation. Accordingly, ligand dosage would necessarily be modified to maximize the therapeutic effect within a given population containing a polymorphism. As an alternative to genotyping, specific polymorphic polypeptides could be identified.

[0181] The receptor polypeptides are also useful for monitoring therapeutic effects during clinical trials and other treatment. Thus, the therapeutic effectiveness of an agent that is designed to increase or decrease gene expression, protein levels or receptor activity can be monitored over the course of treatment using the receptor polypeptides as an end-point target.

[0182] The receptor polypeptides are also useful for treating a receptor-associated disorder, such as those disclosed herein. Accordingly, methods for treatment include the use of soluble receptor or fragments of the receptor protein that compete for ligand binding. These receptors or fragments can have a higher affinity for the ligand so as to provide effective competition.

[0183] Antibodies

[0184] The invention also provides antibodies that selectively bind to the 2871 receptor protein and its variants and fragments. An antibody is considered to selectively bind, even if it also binds to other proteins that are not substantially homologous with the receptor protein. These other proteins share homology with a fragment or domain of the receptor protein. This conservation in specific regions gives rise to antibodies that bind to both proteins by virtue of the homologous sequence. In this case, it would be understood that antibody binding to the receptor protein is still selective.

[0185] Antibodies can be polyclonal or monoclonal. An intact antibody, or a fragment thereof (e.g., Fab or F(ab′)2) can be used.

[0186] Detection can be facilitated by coupling (i.e., physically linking) the antibody to a detectable substance. Examples of detectable substances include various enzymes, prosthetic groups, fluorescent materials, luminescent materials, bioluminescent materials, and radioactive materials. Examples of suitable enzymes include horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, β-galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase; examples of suitable prosthetic group complexes include streptavidin/biotin and avidin/biotin; examples of suitable fluorescent materials include umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride or phycoerythrin; an example of a luminescent material includes luminol; examples of bioluminescent materials include luciferase, luciferin, and aequorin, and examples of suitable radioactive material include 125I, 131I, 35S or 3H.

[0187] To generate antibodies, an isolated receptor polypeptide is used as an immunogen to generate antibodies using standard techniques for polyclonal and monoclonal antibody preparation. Either the full-length protein or antigenic peptide fragment can be used. An antigenic fragment will typically comprise at least 12 contiguous amino acid residues. The antigenic peptide can comprise, however, at least 14 amino acid residues, at least 15 amino acid residues, at least 20 amino acid residues, or at least 30 amino acid residues. In one embodiment, fragments correspond to regions that are located on the surface of the protein, e.g., hydrophilic regions.

[0188] An appropriate immunogenic preparation can be derived from native, recombinantly expressed, protein or chemically synthesized peptides.

[0189] Antibody Uses

[0190] The antibodies can be used to isolate a receptor protein by standard techniques, such as affinity chromatography or immunoprecipitation. The antibodies can facilitate the purification of the natural receptor protein from cells and recombinantly produced receptor protein expressed in host cells.

[0191] The antibodies are useful to detect the presence of receptor protein in cells or tissues to determine the pattern of expression of the receptor among various tissues in an organism and over the course of normal development.

[0192] The antibodies can be used to detect receptor protein in situ, in vitro, or in a cell lysate or supernatant in order to evaluate the abundance and pattern of expression.

[0193] The antibodies can be used to assess abnormal tissue distribution or abnormal expression during development.

[0194] Antibody detection of circulating fragments of the full-length receptor protein can be used to identify receptor turnover.

[0195] Further, the antibodies can be used to assess receptor expression in disease states such as in active stages of the disease or in an individual with a predisposition toward disease related to receptor function. When a disorder is caused by an inappropriate tissue distribution, developmental expression, or level of expression of the receptor protein, the antibody can be prepared against the normal receptor protein. If a disorder is characterized by a specific mutation in the receptor protein, antibodies specific for this mutant protein can be used to assay for the presence of the specific mutant receptor protein.

[0196] The antibodies can also be used to assess normal and aberrant subcellular localization of cells in the various tissues in an organism. Antibodies can be developed against the whole receptor or portions of the receptor, for example, portions of the extracellular domain.

[0197] The diagnostic uses can be applied, not only in genetic testing, but also in monitoring a treatment modality. Accordingly, where treatment is ultimately aimed at correcting receptor expression level or the presence of aberrant receptors and aberrant tissue distribution or developmental expression, antibodies directed against the receptor or relevant fragments can be used to monitor therapeutic efficacy.

[0198] Additionally, antibodies are useful in pharmocogenomic analysis. Thus, antibodies prepared against polymorphic receptor proteins can be used to identify individuals that require modified treatment modalities.

[0199] The antibodies are also useful as diagnostic tools as an immunological marker for aberrant receptor protein analyzed by electrophoretic mobility, isoelectric point, tryptic peptide digest, and other physical assays known to those in the art.

[0200] The antibodies are also useful for tissue typing. Thus, where a specific receptor protein has been correlated with expression in a specific tissue, antibodies that are specific for this receptor protein can be used to identify a tissue type.

[0201] The antibodies are also useful in forensic identification. Accordingly, where an individual has been correlated with a specific genetic polymorphism resulting in a specific polymorphic protein, an antibody specific for the polymorphic protein can be used as an aid in identification.

[0202] The antibodies are also useful for inhibiting receptor function, for example, blocking ligand binding.

[0203] These uses can also be applied in a therapeutic context in which treatment involves inhibiting receptor function. An antibody can be used, for example, to block ligand binding. Antibodies can be prepared against specific fragments containing sites required for function or against intact receptor associated with a cell. The invention also encompasses kits for using antibodies to detect the presence of a receptor protein in a biological sample. The kit can comprise antibodies such as a labeled or labelable antibody and a compound or agent for detecting receptor protein in a biological sample; means for determining the amount of receptor protein in the sample; and means for comparing the amount of receptor protein in the sample with a standard. The compound or agent can be packaged in a suitable container. The kit can further comprise instructions for using the kit to detect receptor protein.

[0204] Polynucleotides

[0205] The nucleotide sequence in SEQ ID NO: 2 was obtained by sequencing the deposited human full length cDNA. Accordingly, the sequence of the deposited clone is controlling as to any discrepancies between the two and any reference to the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 2 includes reference to the sequence of the deposited cDNA.

[0206] The specifically disclosed cDNA comprises the coding region, 5′ and 3′ untranslated sequences (SEQ ID NO: 2). In one embodiment, the receptor nucleic acid comprises only the coding region.

[0207] The human 2871 receptor cDNA is approximately 1489 nucleotides in length and encodes a full length protein that is approximately 359 amino acid residues in length. The nucleic acid is expressed in cells and tissues including, but not limited to, those disclosed hereinabove, such as shown in FIGS. 5-7. Structural analysis of the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 is provided in FIG. 3, a hydropathy plot. The figure shows the putative structure of the seven transmembrane domains, the extracellular domain and the intracellular domain. As used herein, the term “transmembrane domain” refers to a structural amino acid motif which includes a hydrophobic helix that spans the plasma membrane.

[0208] The invention provides isolated polynucleotides encoding a 2871 receptor protein. The term “2871 polynucleotide” or “2871 nucleic acid” refers to the sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 or in the deposited cDNA. The term “receptor polynucleotide” or “receptor nucleic acid” further includes variants and fragments of the 2871 polynucleotide.

[0209] An “isolated” receptor nucleic acid is one that is separated from other nucleic acid present in the natural source of the receptor nucleic acid. Preferably, an “isolated” nucleic acid is free of sequences which naturally flank the nucleic acid (i.e., sequences located at the 5′ and 3′ ends of the nucleic acid) in the genomic DNA of the organism from which the nucleic acid is derived. However, there can be some flanking nucleotide sequences, for example up to about 5KB. The important point is that the nucleic acid is isolated from flanking sequences such that it can be subjected to the specific manipulations described herein such as recombinant expression, preparation of probes and primers, and other uses specific to the receptor nucleic acid sequences.

[0210] Moreover, an “isolated” nucleic acid molecule, such as a cDNA molecule, can be substantially free of other cellular material, or culture medium when produced by recombinant techniques, or chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized. However, the nucleic acid molecule can be fused to other coding or regulatory sequences and still be considered isolated.

[0211] For example, recombinant DNA molecules contained in a vector are considered isolated. Further examples of isolated DNA molecules include recombinant DNA molecules maintained in heterologous host cells or purified (partially or substantially) DNA molecules in solution. Isolated RNA molecules include in vivo or in vitro RNA transcripts of the isolated DNA molecules of the present invention. Isolated nucleic acid molecules according to the present invention further include such molecules produced synthetically.

[0212] The receptor polynucleotides can encode the mature protein plus additional amino or carboxyl-terminal amino acids, or amino acids interior to the mature polypeptide (when the mature form has more than one polypeptide chain, for instance). Such sequences may play a role in processing of a protein from precursor to a mature form, facilitate protein trafficking, prolong or shorten protein half-life or facilitate manipulation of a protein for assay or production, among other things. As generally is the case in situ, the additional amino acids may be processed away from the mature protein by cellular enzymes.

[0213] The receptor polynucleotides include, but are not limited to, the sequence encoding the mature polypeptide alone, the sequence encoding the mature polypeptide and additional coding sequences, such as a leader or secretory sequence (e.g., a pre-pro or pro-protein sequence), the sequence encoding the mature polypeptide, with or without the additional coding sequences, plus additional non-coding sequences, for example introns and non-coding 5′ and 3′ sequences such as transcribed but non-translated sequences that play a role in transcription, mRNA processing (including splicing and polyadenylation signals), ribosome binding and stability of mRNA. In addition, the polynucleotide may be fused to a marker sequence encoding, for example, a peptide that facilitates purification.

[0214] Receptor polynucleotides can be in the form of RNA, such as mRNA, or in the form DNA, including cDNA and genomic DNA obtained by cloning or produced by chemical synthetic techniques or by a combination thereof. The nucleic acid, especially DNA, can be double-stranded or single-stranded. Single-stranded nucleic acid can be the coding strand (sense strand) or the non-coding strand (anti-sense strand).

[0215] One receptor nucleic acid comprises the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2, corresponding to human prostate cDNA.

[0216] The invention further provides variant receptor polynucleotides, and fragments thereof, that differ from the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 due to degeneracy of the genetic code and thus encode the same protein as that encoded by the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2.

[0217] The invention also provides receptor nucleic acid molecules encoding the variant polypeptides described herein. Such polynucleotides may be naturally occurring, such as allelic variants (same locus), homologs (different locus), and orthologs (different organism), or may be constructed by recombinant DNA methods or by chemical synthesis. Such non-naturally occurring variants may be made by mutagenesis techniques, including those applied to polynucleotides, cells, or organisms. Accordingly, as discussed above, the variants can contain nucleotide substitutions, deletions, inversions and insertions.

[0218] Variation can occur in either or both the coding and non-coding regions. The variations can produce both conservative and non-conservative amino acid substitutions.

[0219] Orthologs, homologs, and allelic variants can be identified using methods well known in the art. These variants comprise a nucleotide sequence encoding a receptor that is at least about 55%, typically at least about 70-75%, more typically at least about 80-85%, and most typically at least about 90-95% or more homologous to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 or a fragment of this sequence. Such nucleic acid molecules can readily be identified as being able to hybridize under stringent conditions, to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 or a fragment of the sequence. It is understood that stringent hybridization does not indicate substantial homology where it is due to general homology, such as poly A sequences, or sequences common to all or most proteins, all GPCRs, or all family I GPCRs.

[0220] As used herein, the term “hybridizes under stringent conditions” is intended to describe conditions for hybridization and washing under which nucleotide sequences encoding a receptor at least 55% homologous to each other typically remain hybridized to each other. The conditions can be such that sequences at least about 65%, at least about 70%, or at least about 75% or more homologous to each other typically remain hybridized to each other. Such stringent conditions are known to those skilled in the art and can be found in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, N.Y. (1989), 6.3.1-6.3.6. One example of stringent hybridization conditions are hybridization in 6× sodium chloride/sodium citrate (SSC) at about 45° C., followed by one or more washes in 0.2×SSC, 0.1% SDS at 50-65° C. In one embodiment, an isolated receptor nucleic acid molecule that hybridizes under stringent conditions to the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 2 corresponds to a naturally-occurring nucleic acid molecule. As used herein, a “naturally-occurring” nucleic acid molecule refers to an RNA or DNA molecule having a nucleotide sequence that occurs in nature (e.g., encodes a natural protein).

[0221] Furthermore, the invention provides polynucleotides that comprise a fragment of the full-length receptor polynucleotides. The fragment can be single or double stranded and can comprise DNA or RNA. The fragment can be derived from either the coding or the non-coding sequence.

[0222] In one embodiment, an isolated receptor nucleic acid is at least 36 nucleotides in length and hybridizes under stringent conditions to the nucleic acid molecule comprising the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO: 2. In other embodiments, the nucleic acid is at least 40, 50, 100, 250 or 500 nucleotides in length.

[0223] However, it is understood that a receptor fragment includes any nucleic acid sequence that does not include the entire gene.

[0224] Receptor nucleic acid fragments include nucleic acid molecules encoding a polypeptide comprising the extracellular domain including amino acid residues from 1 to about 42, a polypeptide comprising the transmembrane domain (amino acid residues from about 43 to about 318), a polypeptide comprising the intracellular domain (amino acid residues from about 318 to about 359), and a polypeptide encoding the G-protein receptor signature (DRY or surrounding amino acid residues from about 127 to about 143). Where the location of the domains have been predicted by computer analysis, one of ordinary skill would appreciate that the amino acid residues constituting these domains can vary depending on the criteria used to define the domains.

[0225] The invention also provides receptor nucleic acid fragments that encode epitope bearing regions of the receptor proteins described herein.

[0226] The isolated receptor polynucleotide sequences, and especially fragments, are useful as DNA probes and primers.

[0227] For example, the coding region of a receptor gene can be isolated using the known nucleotide sequence to synthesize an oligonucleotide probe. A labeled probe can then be used to screen a cDNA library, genomic DNA library, or mRNA to isolate nucleic acid corresponding to the coding region. Further, primers can be used in PCR reactions to clone specific regions of receptor genes.

[0228] A probe/primer typically comprises substantially purified oligonucleotide. The oligonucleotide typically comprises a region of nucleotide sequence that hybridizes under stringent conditions to at least about 12, typically about 25, more typically about 40, 50 or 75 consecutive nucleotides of SEQ ID NO: 2 sense or anti-sense strand or other receptor polynucleotides. A probe further comprises a label, e.g., radioisotope, fluorescent compound, enzyme, or enzyme co-factor.

[0229] Polynucleotide Uses

[0230] The receptor polynucleotides are useful as a hybridization probe for cDNA and genomic DNA to isolate a full-length cDNA and genomic clones encoding the polypeptide described in SEQ ID NO: 1 and to isolate cDNA and genomic clones that correspond to variants producing the same polypeptide shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 or the other variants described herein. Variants can be isolated from the same tissue and organism from which the polypeptide shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 was isolated, different tissues from the same organism, or from different organisms. This method is useful for isolating genes and cDNA that are developmentally controlled and therefore may be expressed in the same tissue at different points in the development of an organism.

[0231] The probe can correspond to any sequence along the entire length of the gene encoding the receptor. Accordingly, it could be derived from 5′ noncoding regions, the coding region, and 3′ noncoding regions.

[0232] The nucleic acid probe can be, for example, the full-length cDNA of SEQ ID NO: 1, or a fragment thereof, such as an oligonucleotide of at least 12, 15, 30, 50, 100, 250 or 500 nucleotides in length and sufficient to specifically hybridize under stringent conditions to mRNA or DNA.

[0233] Fragments of the polynucleotides described herein are also useful to synthesize larger fragments or full-length polynucleotides described herein. For example, a fragment can be hybridized to any portion of an mRNA and a larger or full-length cDNA can be produced.

[0234] The fragments are also useful to synthesize antisense molecules of desired length and sequence.

[0235] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful as primers for PCR to amplify any given region of a receptor polynucleotide.

[0236] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for constructing recombinant vectors. Such vectors include expression vectors that express a portion of, or all of, the receptor polypeptides. Vectors also include insertion vectors, used to integrate into another polynucleotide sequence, such as into the cellular genome, to alter in situ expression of receptor genes and gene products. For example, an endogenous receptor coding sequence can be replaced via homologous recombination with all or part of the coding region containing one or more specifically introduced mutations.

[0237] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful as probes for determining the chromosomal positions of the receptor polynucleotides by means of in situ hybridization methods.

[0238] The receptor polynucleotide probes are also useful to determine patterns of the presence of the gene encoding the receptors and their variants with respect to tissue distribution, for example whether gene duplication has occurred and whether the duplication occurs in all or only a subset of tissues. The genes can be naturally occurring or can have been introduced into a cell, tissue, or organism exogenously. The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for designing ribozymes corresponding to all, or a part, of the mRNA produced from genes encoding the polynucleotides described herein.

[0239] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for constructing host cells expressing a part, or all, of the receptor polynucleotides and polypeptides.

[0240] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for constructing transgenic animals expressing all, or a part, of the receptor polynucleotides and polypeptides.

[0241] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for making vectors that express part, or all, of the receptor polypeptides.

[0242] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful as hybridization probes for determining the level of receptor nucleic acid expression. Accordingly, the probes can be used to detect the presence of, or to determine levels of, receptor nucleic acid in cells, tissues, and in organisms. The nucleic acid whose level is determined can be DNA or RNA. Accordingly, probes corresponding to the polypeptides described herein can be used to assess gene copy number in a given cell, tissue, or organism. This is particularly relevant in cases in which there has been an amplification of the receptor genes.

[0243] Alternatively, the probe can be used in an in situ hybridization context to assess the position of extra copies of the receptor genes, as on extrachromosomal elements or as integrated into chromosomes in which the receptor gene is not normally found, for example as a homogenously staining region.

[0244] These uses are relevant for diagnosis of disorders involving an increase or decrease in receptor expression relative to normal results.

[0245] In vitro techniques for detection of mRNA include Northern hybridizations and in situ hybridizations. In vitro techniques for detecting DNA includes Southern hybridizations and in situ hybridization.

[0246] Probes can be used as a part of a diagnostic test kit for identifying cells or tissues that express a receptor protein, such as by measuring a level of a receptor-encoding nucleic acid in a sample of cells from a subject e.g., mRNA or genomic DNA, or determining if a receptor gene has been mutated.

[0247] Nucleic acid expression assays are useful for drug screening to identify compounds that modulate receptor nucleic acid expression.

[0248] The invention thus provides a method for identifying a compound that can be used to treat a disorder associated with nucleic acid expression of the receptor gene, for example, those disclosed herein. The method typically includes assaying the ability of the compound to modulate the expression of the receptor nucleic acid and thus identifying a compound that can be used to treat a disorder characterized by undesired receptor nucleic acid expression.

[0249] The assays can be performed in cell-based and cell-free systems. Cell-based assays include cells naturally expressing the receptor nucleic acid, such as those disclosed herein, or recombinant cells genetically engineered to express specific nucleic acid sequences.

[0250] Alternatively, candidate compounds can be assayed in vivo in patients or in transgenic animals.

[0251] The assay for receptor nucleic acid expression can involve direct assay of nucleic acid levels, such as mRNA levels, or on collateral compounds involved in the signal pathway (such as cyclic AMP or phosphatidylinositol turnover). Further, the expression of genes that are up- or down-regulated in response to the receptor protein signal pathway can also be assayed. In this embodiment the regulatory regions of these genes can be operably linked to a reporter gene such as luciferase. Thus, modulators of receptor gene expression can be identified in a method wherein a cell is contacted with a candidate compound and the expression of mRNA determined. The level of expression of receptor mRNA in the presence of the candidate compound is compared to the level of expression of receptor mRNA in the absence of the candidate compound. The candidate compound can then be identified as a modulator of nucleic acid expression based on this comparison and be used, for example to treat a disorder characterized by aberrant nucleic acid expression. When expression of mRNA is statistically significantly greater in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as a stimulator of nucleic acid expression. When nucleic acid expression is statistically significantly less in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as an inhibitor of nucleic acid expression.

[0252] Accordingly, the invention provides methods of treatment, with the nucleic acid as a target, using a compound identified through drug screening as a gene modulator to modulate receptor nucleic acid expression, such as in the disorders disclosed herein. Modulation includes both up-regulation (i.e. activation or agonization) or down-regulation (suppression or antagonization) or nucleic acid expression.

[0253] Alternatively, a modulator for receptor nucleic acid expression can be a small molecule or drug identified using the screening assays described herein as long as the drug or small molecule inhibits the receptor nucleic acid expression.

[0254] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for monitoring the effectiveness of modulating compounds on the expression or activity of the receptor gene in clinical trials or in a treatment regimen. Thus, the gene expression pattern can serve as a barometer for the continuing effectiveness of treatment with the compound, particularly with compounds to which a patient can develop resistance. The gene expression pattern can also serve as a marker indicative of a physiological response of the affected cells to the compound. Accordingly, such monitoring would allow either increased administration of the compound or the administration of alternative compounds to which the patient has not become resistant. Similarly, if the level of nucleic acid expression falls below a desirable level, administration of the compound could be commensurately decreased.

[0255] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful in diagnostic assays for qualitative changes in receptor nucleic acid, and particularly in qualitative changes that lead to pathology, such as in the disorders disclosed herein. The polynucleotides can be used to detect mutations in receptor genes and gene expression products such as mRNA. The polynucleotides can be used as hybridization probes to detect naturally occurring genetic mutations in the receptor gene and thereby determining whether a subject with the mutation is at risk for a disorder caused by the mutation. Mutations include deletion, addition, or substitution of one or more nucleotides in the gene, chromosomal rearrangement such as inversion or transposition, modification of genomic DNA such as aberrant methylation patterns or changes in gene copy number such as amplification. Detection of a mutated form of the receptor gene associated with a dysfunction provides a diagnostic tool for an active disease or susceptibility to disease when the disease results from overexpression, underexpression, or altered expression of a receptor protein.

[0256] Individuals carrying mutations in the receptor gene can be detected at the nucleic acid level by a variety of techniques. Genomic DNA can be analysed directly or can be amplified by using PCR prior to analysis. RNA or cDNA can be used in the same way.

[0257] In certain embodiments, detection of the mutation involves the use of a probe/primer in a polymerase chain reaction (PCR) (see, e.g. U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,683,195 and 4,683,202), such as anchor PCR or RACE PCR, or, alternatively, in a ligation chain reaction (LCR) (see, e.g., Landegran et al., Science 241:1077-1080 (1988); and Nakazawa et al., PNAS 91:360-364 (1994)), the latter of which can be particularly useful for detecting point mutations in the gene (see Abravaya et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 23:675-682 (1995)). This method can include the steps of collecting a sample of cells from a patient, isolating nucleic acid (e.g., genomic, mRNA or both) from the cells of the sample, contacting the nucleic acid sample with one or more primers which specifically hybridize to a gene under conditions such that hybridization and amplification of the gene (if present) occurs, and detecting the presence or absence of an amplification product, or detecting the size of the amplification product and comparing the length to a control sample. Deletions and insertions can be detected by a change in size of the amplified product compared to the normal genotype. Point mutations can be identified by hybridizing amplified DNA to normal RNA or antisense DNA sequences.

[0258] Alternatively, mutations in a receptor gene can be directly identified, for example, by alterations in restriction enzyme digestion patterns determined by gel electrophoresis.

[0259] Further, sequence-specific ribozymes (U.S. Pat. No. 5,498,531) can be used to score for the presence of specific mutations by development or loss of a ribozyme cleavage site.

[0260] Perfectly matched sequences can be distinguished from mismatched sequences by nuclease cleavage digestion assays or by differences in melting temperature.

[0261] Sequence changes at specific locations can also be assessed by nuclease protection assays such as RNase and S1 protection or the chemical cleavage method.

[0262] Furthermore, sequence differences between a mutant receptor gene and a wild-type gene can be determined by direct DNA sequencing. A variety of automated sequencing procedures can be utilized when performing the diagnostic assays ((1995) Biotechniques 19:448), including sequencing by mass spectrometry (see, e.g., PCT International Publication No. WO 94/16101; Cohen et al., Adv. Chromatogr. 36:127-162 (1996); and Griffin et al., Appl. Biochem. Biotechnol. 38:147-159 (1993)).

[0263] Other methods for detecting mutations in the gene include methods in which protection from cleavage agents is used to detect mismatched bases in RNA/RNA or RNA/DNA duplexes (Myers et al., Science 230:1242 (1985)); Cotton et al., PNAS 85:4397 (1988); Saleeba et al., Meth. Enzymol. 217:286-295 (1992)), electrophoretic mobility of mutant and wild type nucleic acid is compared (Orita et al., PNAS 86:2766 (1989); Cotton et al., Mutat. Res. 285:125-144 (1993); and Hayashi et al., Genet. Anal. Tech. Appl. 9:73-79 (1992)), and movement of mutant or wild-type fragments in polyacrylamide gels containing a gradient of denaturant is assayed using denaturing gradient gel electrophoresis (Myers et al., Nature 313:495 (1985)). Examples of other techniques for detecting point mutations include, selective oligonucleotide hybridization, selective amplification, and selective primer extension.

[0264] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for testing an individual for a genotype that while not necessarily causing the disease, nevertheless affects the treatment modality. Thus, the polynucleotides can be used to study the relationship between an individual's genotype and the individual's response to a compound used for treatment (pharmacogenomic relationship). In the present case, for example, a mutation in the receptor gene that results in altered affinity for ligand could result in an excessive or decreased drug effect with standard concentrations of ligand that activates the receptor. Accordingly, the receptor polynucleotides described herein can be used to assess the mutation content of the receptor gene in an individual in order to select an appropriate compound or dosage regimen for treatment.

[0265] Thus polynucleotides displaying genetic variations that affect treatment provide a diagnostic target that can be used to tailor treatment in an individual. Accordingly, the production of recombinant cells and animals containing these polymorphisms allow effective clinical design of treatment compounds and dosage regimens.

[0266] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for chromosome identification when the sequence is identified with an individual chromosome and to a particular location on the chromosome. First, the DNA sequence is matched to the chromosome by in situ or other chromosome-specific hybridization. Sequences can also be correlated to specific chromosomes by preparing PCR primers that can be used for PCR screening of somatic cell hybrids containing individual chromosomes from the desired species. Only hybrids containing the chromosome containing the gene homologous to the primer will yield an amplified fragment. Sublocalization can be achieved using chromosomal fragments. Other strategies include prescreening with labeled flow-sorted chromosomes and preselection by hybridization to chromosome-specific libraries. Further mapping strategies include fluorescence in situ hybridization which allows hybridization with probes shorter than those traditionally used. Reagents for chromosome mapping can be used individually to mark a single chromosome or a single site on the chromosome, or panels of reagents can be used for marking multiple sites and/or multiple chromosomes. Reagents corresponding to noncoding regions of the genes actually are preferred for mapping purposes. Coding sequences are more likely to be conserved within gene families, thus increasing the chance of cross hybridizations during chromosomal mapping.

[0267] The receptor polynucleotides can also be used to identify individuals from small biological samples. This can be done for example using restriction fragment-length polymorphism (RFLP) to identify an individual. Thus, the polynucleotides described herein are useful as DNA markers for RFLP (See U.S. Pat. No. 5,272,057).

[0268] Furthermore, the receptor sequence can be used to provide an alternative technique which determines the actual DNA sequence of selected fragments in the genome of an individual. Thus, the receptor sequences described herein can be used to prepare two PCR primers from the 5′ and 3′ ends of the sequences. These primers can then be used to amplify DNA from an individual for subsequent sequencing.

[0269] Panels of corresponding DNA sequences from individuals prepared in this manner can provide unique individual identifications, as each individual will have a unique set of such DNA sequences. It is estimated that allelic variation in humans occurs with a frequency of about once per each 500 bases. Allelic variation occurs to some degree in the coding regions of these sequences, and to a greater degree in the noncoding regions. The receptor sequences can be used to obtain such identification sequences from individuals and from tissue. The sequences represent unique fragments of the human genome. Each of the sequences described herein can, to some degree, be used as a standard against which DNA from an individual can be compared for identification purposes.

[0270] If a panel of reagents from the sequences is used to generate a unique identification database for an individual, those same reagents can later be used to identify tissue from that individual. Using the unique identification database, positive identification of the individual, living or dead, can be made from extremely small tissue samples.

[0271] The receptor polynucleotides can also be used in forensic identification procedures. PCR technology can be used to amplify DNA sequences taken from very small biological samples, such as a single hair follicle, body fluids (eg., blood, saliva, or semen). The amplified sequence can then be compared to a standard allowing identification of the origin of the sample.

[0272] The receptor polynucleotides can thus be used to provide polynucleotide reagents, e.g., PCR primers, targeted to specific loci in the human genome, which can enhance the reliability of DNA-based forensic identifications by, for example, providing another “identification marker” (i.e., another DNA sequence that is unique to a particular individual). As described above, actual base sequence information can be used for identification as an accurate alternative to patterns formed by restriction enzyme generated fragments. Sequences targeted to the noncoding region are particularly useful since greater polymorphism occurs in the noncoding regions, making it easier to differentiate individuals using this technique. Fragments are at least 12 bases.

[0273] The receptor polynucleotides can further be used to provide polynucleotide reagents, e.g., labeled or labelable probes which can be used in, for example, an in situ hybridization technique, to identify a specific tissue. This is useful in cases in which a forensic pathologist is presented with a tissue of unknown origin. Panels of receptor probes can be used to identify tissue by species and/or by organ type. In a similar fashion, these primers and probes can be used to screen tissue culture for contamination (i.e. screen for the presence of a mixture of different types of cells in a culture). In the same manner, the polynucleotides can also be used to screen tissue samples to determine the presence of tumor cells. Thus, assays can be developed to determine the presence or propensity of an individual having cancer, particularly where high expression of the 2871 gene is indicative of tumor cells.

[0274] Alternatively, the receptor polynucleotides can be used directly to block transcription or translation of receptor gene expression by means of antisense or ribozyme constructs. Thus, in a disorder characterized by abnormally high or undesirable receptor gene expression, nucleic acids can be directly used for treatment.

[0275] The receptor polynucleotides are thus useful as antisense constructs to control receptor gene expression in cells, tissues, and organisms. A DNA antisense polynucleotide is designed to be complementary to a region of the gene involved in transcription, preventing transcription and hence production of receptor protein. An antisense RNA or DNA polynucleotide would hybridize to the mRNA and thus block translation of mRNA into receptor protein.

[0276] Examples of antisense molecules useful to inhibit nucleic acid expression include antisense molecules complementary to a fragment of the 5′ untranslated region of SEQ ID NO: 2 which also includes the start codon and antisense molecules which are complementary to a fragment of the 3′ untranslated region of SEQ ID NO: 2.

[0277] Alternatively, a class of antisense molecules can be used to inactivate mRNA in order to decrease expression of receptor nucleic acid. Accordingly, these molecules can treat a disorder characterized by abnormal or undesired receptor nucleic acid expression. This technique involves cleavage by means of ribozymes containing nucleotide sequences complementary to one or more regions in the mRNA that attenuate the ability of the mRNA to be translated. Possible regions include coding regions and particularly coding regions corresponding to the catalytic and other functional activities of the receptor protein.

[0278] The receptor polynucleotides also provide vectors for gene therapy in patients containing cells that are aberrant in receptor gene expression. Thus, recombinant cells, which include the patient's cells that have been engineered ex vivo and returned to the patient, are introduced into an individual where the cells produce the desired receptor protein to treat the individual.

[0279] The invention also encompasses kits for detecting the presence of a receptor nucleic acid in a biological sample. For example, the kit can comprise reagents such as a labeled or labelable nucleic acid or agent capable of detecting receptor nucleic acid in a biological sample; means for determining the amount of receptor nucleic acid in the sample; and means for comparing the amount of receptor nucleic acid in the sample with a standard. The compound or agent can be packaged in a suitable container. The kit can further comprise instructions for using the kit to detect receptor mRNA or DNA.

[0280] Vectors/Host Cells

[0281] The invention also provides vectors containing the receptor polynucleotides. The term “vector” refers to a vehicle, preferably a nucleic acid molecule, that can transport the receptor polynucleotides. When the vector is a nucleic acid molecule, the receptor polynucleotides are covalently linked to the vector nucleic acid. With this aspect of the invention, the vector includes a plasmid, single or double stranded phage, a single or double stranded RNA or DNA viral vector, or artificial chromosome, such as a BAC, PAC, YAC, OR MAC.

[0282] A vector can be maintained in the host cell as an extrachromosomal element where it replicates and produces additional copies of the receptor polynucleotides. Alternatively, the vector may integrate into the host cell genome and produce additional copies of the receptor polynucleotides when the host cell replicates.

[0283] The invention provides vectors for the maintenance (cloning vectors) or vectors for expression (expression vectors) of the receptor polynucleotides. The vectors can function in procaryotic or eukaryotic cells or in both (shuttle vectors).

[0284] Expression vectors contain cis-acting regulatory regions that are operably linked in the vector to the receptor polynucleotides such that transcription of the polynucleotides is allowed in a host cell. The polynucleotides can be introduced into the host cell with a separate polynucleotide capable of affecting transcription. Thus, the second polynucleotide may provide a trans-acting factor interacting with the cis-regulatory control region to allow transcription of the receptor polynucleotides from the vector.

[0285] Alternatively, a trans-acting factor may be supplied by the host cell. Finally, a trans-acting factor can be produced from the vector itself.

[0286] It is understood, however, that in some embodiments, transcription and/or translation of the receptor polynucleotides can occur in a cell-free system.

[0287] The regulatory sequence to which the polynucleotides described herein can be operably linked include promoters for directing mRNA transcription. These include, but are not limited to, the left promoter from bacteriophage λ, the lac, TRP, and TAC promoters from E. coli, the early and late promoters from SV40, the CMV immediate early promoter, the adenovirus early and late promoters, and retrovirus long-terminal repeats.

[0288] In addition to control regions that promote transcription, expression vectors may also include regions that modulate transcription, such as repressor binding sites and enhancers. Examples include the SV40 enhancer, the cytomegalovirus immediate early enhancer, polyoma enhancer, adenovirus enhancers, and retrovirus LTR enhancers.

[0289] In addition to containing sites for transcription initiation and control, expression vectors can also contain sequences necessary for transcription termination and, in the transcribed region a ribosome binding site for translation. Other regulatory control elements for expression include initiation and termination codons as well as polyadenylation signals. The person of ordinary skill in the art would be aware of the numerous regulatory sequences that are useful in expression vectors. Such regulatory sequences are described, for example, in Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd. ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., (1989).

[0290] A variety of expression vectors can be used to express a receptor polynucleotide. Such vectors include chromosomal, episomal, and virus-derived vectors, for example vectors derived from bacterial plasmids, from bacteriophage, from yeast episomes, from yeast chromosomal elements, including yeast artificial chromosomes, from viruses such as baculoviruses, papovaviruses such as SV40, Vaccinia viruses, adenoviruses, poxviruses, pseudorabies viruses, and retroviruses. Vectors may also be derived from combinations of these sources such as those derived from plasmid and bacteriophage genetic elements, eg. cosmids and phagemids. Appropriate cloning and expression vectors for prokaryotic and eukaryotic hosts are described in Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd. ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., (1989).

[0291] The regulatory sequence may provide constitutive expression in one or more host cells (i.e., tissue specific) or may provide for inducible expression in one or more cell types such as by temperature, nutrient additive, or exogenous factor such as a hormone or other ligand. A variety of vectors providing for constitutive and inducible expression in prokaryotic and eukaryotic hosts are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art.

[0292] The receptor polynucleotides can be inserted into the vector nucleic acid by well-known methodology. Generally, the DNA sequence that will ultimately be expressed is joined to an expression vector by cleaving the DNA sequence and the expression vector with one or more restriction enzymes and then ligating the fragments together. Procedures for restriction enzyme digestion and ligation are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art.

[0293] The vector containing the appropriate polynucleotide can be introduced into an appropriate host cell for propagation or expression using well-known techniques. Bacterial cells include, but are not limited to, E. coli, Streptomyces, and Salmonella typhimurium. Eukaryotic cells include, but are not limited to, yeast, insect cells such as Drosophila, animal cells such as COS and CHO cells, and plant cells.

[0294] As described herein, it may be desirable to express the polypeptide as a fusion protein. Accordingly, the invention provides fusion vectors that allow for the production of the receptor polypeptides. Fusion vectors can increase the expression of a recombinant protein, increase the solubility of the recombinant protein, and aid in the purification of the protein by acting for example as a ligand for affinity purification. A proteolytic cleavage site may be introduced at the junction of the fusion moiety so that the desired polypeptide can ultimately be separated from the fusion moiety. Proteolytic enzymes include, but are not limited to, factor Xa, thrombin, and enterokinase. Typical fusion expression vectors include pGEX (Smith et al. (1988) Gene 67:31-40), pMAL (New England Biolabs, Beverly, Mass.) and pRIT5 (Pharmacia, Piscataway, N.J.) which fuse glutathione S-transferase (GST), maltose E binding protein, or protein A, respectively, to the target recombinant protein. Examples of suitable inducible non-fusion E. coli expression vectors include pTrc (Amann et al., Gene 69:301-315 (1988)) and pET 11d (Studier et al., Gene Expression Technology: Methods in Enzymology 185:60-89 (1990)).

[0295] Recombinant protein expression can be maximized in a host bacteria by providing a genetic background wherein the host cell has an impaired capacity to proteolytically cleave the recombinant protein. (Gottesman, S., Gene Expression Technology: Methods in Enzymology 185, Academic Press, San Diego, Calif. (1990) 119-128). Alternatively, the sequence of the polynucleotide of interest can be altered to provide preferential codon usage for a specific host cell, for example E. coli. (Wada et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 20:2111-2118 (1992)).

[0296] The receptor polynucleotides can also be expressed by expression vectors that are operative in yeast. Examples of vectors for expression in yeast e.g., S. cerevisiae include pYepSec1 (Baldari, et al., EMBO J 6:229-234 (1987)), pMFa (Kuijan et al., Cell 30:933-943(1982)), pJRY88 (Schultz et al., Gene 54:113-123 (1987)), and pYES2 (Invitrogen Corporation, San Diego, Calif.).

[0297] The receptor polynucleotides can also be expressed in insect cells using, for example, baculovirus expression vectors. Baculovirus vectors available for expression of proteins in cultured insect cells (e.g., Sf9 cells) include the pAc series (Smith et al., Mol. Cell Biol. 3:2156-2165 (1983)) and the pVL series (Lucklow et al., Virology 170:31-39 (1989)).

[0298] In certain embodiments of the invention, the polynucleotides described herein are expressed in mammalian cells using mammalian expression vectors. Examples of mammalian expression vectors include pCDM8 (Seed, B. Nature 329:840(1987)) and pMT2PC (Kaufman et al., EMBO J. 6:187-195 (1987)).

[0299] The expression vectors listed herein are provided by way of example only of the well-known vectors available to those of ordinary skill in the art that would be useful to express the receptor polynucleotides. The person of ordinary skill in the art would be aware of other vectors suitable for maintenance propagation or expression of the polynucleotides described herein. These are found for example in Sambrook, J., Fritsh, E. F., and Maniatis, T. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd, ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1989.

[0300] The invention also encompasses vectors in which the nucleic acid sequences described herein are cloned into the vector in reverse orientation, but operably linked to a regulatory sequence that permits transcription of antisense RNA. Thus, an antisense transcript can be produced to all, or to a portion, of the polynucleotide sequences described herein, including both coding and non-coding regions. Expression of this antisense RNA is subject to each of the parameters described above in relation to expression of the sense RNA (regulatory sequences, constitutive or inducible expression, tissue-specific expression).

[0301] The invention also relates to recombinant host cells containing the vectors described herein. Host cells therefore include prokaryotic cells, lower eukaryotic cells such as yeast, other eukaryotic cells such as insect cells, and higher eukaryotic cells such as mammalian cells.

[0302] The recombinant host cells are prepared by introducing the vector constructs described herein into the cells by techniques readily available to the person of ordinary skill in the art. These include, but are not limited to, calcium phosphate transfection, DEAE-dextran-mediated transfection, cationic lipid-mediated transfection, electroporation, transduction, infection, lipofection, and other techniques such as those found in Sambrook, et al. (Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd, ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1989).

[0303] Host cells can contain more than one vector. Thus, different nucleotide sequences can be introduced on different vectors of the same cell. Similarly, the receptor polynucleotides can be introduced either alone or with other polynucleotides that are not related to the receptor polynucleotides such as those providing trans-acting factors for expression vectors. When more than one vector is introduced into a cell, the vectors can be introduced independently, co-introduced or joined to the receptor polynucleotide vector.

[0304] In the case of bacteriophage and viral vectors, these can be introduced into cells as packaged or encapsulated virus by standard procedures for infection and transduction. Viral vectors can be replication-competent or replication-defective. In the case in which viral replication is defective, replication will occur in host cells providing functions that complement the defects.

[0305] Vectors generally include selectable markers that enable the selection of the subpopulation of cells that contain the recombinant vector constructs. The marker can be contained in the same vector that contains the polynucleotides described herein or may be on a separate vector. Markers include tetracycline or ampicillin-resistance genes for prokaryotic host cells and dihydrofolate reductase or neomycin resistance for eukaryotic host cells. However, any marker that provides selection for a phenotypic trait will be effective.

[0306] While the mature proteins can be produced in bacteria, yeast, mammalian cells, and other cells under the control of the appropriate regulatory sequences, cell-free transcription and translation systems can also be used to produce these proteins using RNA derived from the DNA constructs described herein.

[0307] Where secretion of the polypeptide is desired, appropriate secretion signals are incorporated into the vector. The signal sequence can be endogenous to the receptor polypeptides or heterologous to these polypeptides.

[0308] Where the polypeptide is not secreted into the medium, the protein can be isolated from the host cell by standard disruption procedures, including freeze thaw, sonication, mechanical disruption, use of lysing agents and the like. The polypeptide can then be recovered and purified by well-known purification methods including ammonium sulfate precipitation, acid extraction, anion or cationic exchange chromatography, phosphocellulose chromatography, hydrophobic-interaction chromatography, affinity chromatography, hydroxylapatite chromatography, lectin chromatography, or high performance liquid chromatography.

[0309] It is also understood that depending upon the host cell in recombinant production of the polypeptides described herein, the polypeptides can have various glycosylation patterns, depending upon the cell, or maybe non-glycosylated as when produced in bacteria. In addition, the polypeptides may include an initial modified methionine in some cases as a result of a host-mediated process.

[0310] Uses of Vectors and Host Cells

[0311] The host cells expressing the polypeptides described herein, and particularly recombinant host cells, have a variety of uses. First, the cells are useful for producing receptor proteins or polypeptides that can be further purified to produce desired amounts of receptor protein or fragments. Thus, host cells containing expression vectors are useful for polypeptide production.

[0312] Host cells are also useful for conducting cell-based assays involving the receptor or receptor fragments. Thus, a recombinant host cell expressing a native receptor is useful to assay for compounds that stimulate or inhibit receptor function. This includes ligand binding, gene expression at the level of transcription or translation, G-protein interaction, and components of the signal transduction pathway.

[0313] Host cells are also useful for identifying receptor mutants in which these functions are affected. If the mutants naturally occur and give rise to a pathology, host cells containing the mutations are useful to assay compounds that have a desired effect on the mutant receptor (for example, stimulating or inhibiting function) which may not be indicated by their effect on the native receptor.

[0314] Recombinant host cells are also useful for expressing the chimeric polypeptides described herein to assess compounds that activate or suppress activation by means of a heterologous extracellular domain. Alternatively, a heterologous transmembrane domain can be used to assess the effect of a desired extracellular domain on any given host cell. In this embodiment, a transmembrane domain compatible with the specific host cell is used to make the chimeric vector. Alternatively, a heterologous intracellular, e.g., signal transduction, domain can be introduced into the host cell.

[0315] Further, mutant receptors can be designed in which one or more of the various functions is engineered to be increased or decreased (i.e., ligand binding or G-protein binding) and used to augment or replace receptor proteins in an individual. Thus, host cells can provide a therapeutic benefit by replacing an aberrant receptor or providing an aberrant receptor that provides a therapeutic result. In one embodiment, the cells provide receptors that are abnormally active.

[0316] In another embodiment, the cells provide receptors that are abnormally inactive. These receptors can compete with endogenous receptors in the individual. In another embodiment, cells expressing receptors that cannot be activated, are introduced into an individual in order to compete with endogenous receptors for ligand. For example, in the case in which excessive ligand is part of a treatment modality, it may be necessary to inactivate this ligand at a specific point in treatment. Providing cells that compete for the ligand, but which cannot be affected by receptor activation would be beneficial.

[0317] Homologously recombinant host cells can also be produced that allow the in situ alteration of endogenous receptor polynucleotide sequences in a host cell genome. This technology is more fully described in WO 93/09222, WO 91/12650 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,641,670. Briefly, specific polynucleotide sequences corresponding to the receptor polynucleotides or sequences proximal or distal to a receptor gene are allowed to integrate into a host cell genome by homologous recombination where expression of the gene can be affected. In one embodiment, regulatory sequences are introduced that either increase or decrease expression of an endogenous sequence. Accordingly, a receptor protein can be produced in a cell not normally producing it, or increased expression of receptor protein can result in a cell normally producing the protein at a specific level. Alternatively, the entire gene can be deleted. Still further, specific mutations can be introduced into any desired region of the gene to produce mutant receptor proteins. Such mutations could be introduced, for example, into the specific functional regions such as the ligand-binding site or the G-protein binding site.

[0318] In one embodiment, the host cell can be a fertilized oocyte or embryonic stem cell that can be used to produce a transgenic animal containing the altered receptor gene. Alternatively, the host cell can be a stem cell or other early tissue precursor that gives rise to a specific subset of cells and can be used to produce transgenic tissues in an animal. See also Thomas et al., Cell 51:503 (1987) for a description of homologous recombination vectors. The vector is introduced into an embryonic stem cell line (e.g., by electroporation) and cells in which the introduced gene has homologously recombined with the endogenous receptor gene is selected (see e.g., Li, E. et al., Cell 69:915 (1992)). The selected cells are then injected into a blastocyst of an animal (e.g., a mouse) to form aggregation chimeras (see e.g., Bradley, A. in Teratocarcinomas and Embryonic Stem Cells: A Practical Approach, E. J. Robertson, ed. (IRL, Oxford, 1987) pp. 113-152). A chimeric embryo can then be implanted into a suitable pseudopregnant female foster animal and the embryo brought to term. Progeny harboring the homologously recombined DNA in their germ cells can be used to breed animals in which all cells of the animal contain the homologously recombined DNA by germline transmission of the transgene. Methods for constructing homologous recombination vectors and homologous recombinant animals are described further in Bradley, A. (1991) Current Opinions in Biotechnology 2:823-829 and in PCT International Publication Nos. WO 90/11354; WO 91/01140; and WO 93/04169.

[0319] The genetically engineered host cells can be used to produce non-human transgenic animals. A transgenic animal is preferably a mammal, for example a rodent, such as a rat or mouse, in which one or more of the cells of the animal include a transgene. A transgene is exogenous DNA which is integrated into the genome of a cell from which a transgenic animal develops and which remains in the genome of the mature animal in one or more cell types or tissues of the transgenic animal. These animals are useful for studying the function of a receptor protein and identifying and evaluating modulators of receptor protein activity.

[0320] Other examples of transgenic animals include non-human primates, sheep, dogs, cows, goats, chickens, and amphibians.

[0321] In one embodiment, a host cell is a fertilized oocyte or an embryonic stem cell into which receptor polynucleotide sequences have been introduced.

[0322] A transgenic animal can be produced by introducing nucleic acid into the male pronuclei of a fertilized oocyte, e.g., by microinjection, retroviral infection, and allowing the oocyte to develop in a pseudopregnant female foster animal. Any of the receptor nucleotide sequences can be introduced as a transgene into the genome of a non-human animal, such as a mouse.

[0323] Any of the regulatory or other sequences useful in expression vectors can form part of the transgenic sequence. This includes intronic sequences and polyadenylation signals, if not already included. A tissue-specific regulatory sequence(s) can be operably linked to the transgene to direct expression of the receptor protein to particular cells.

[0324] Methods for generating transgenic animals via embryo manipulation and microinjection, particularly animals such as mice, have become conventional in the art and are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,736,866 and 4,870,009, both by Leder et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,873,191 by Wagner et al. and in Hogan, B., Manipulating the Mouse Embryo, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1986). Similar methods are used for production of other transgenic animals. A transgenic founder animal can be identified based upon the presence of the transgene in its genome and/or expression of transgenic mRNA in tissues or cells of the animals. A transgenic founder animal can then be used to breed additional animals carrying the transgene. Moreover, transgenic animals carrying a transgene can further be bred to other transgenic animals carrying other transgenes. A transgenic animal also includes animals in which the entire animal or tissues in the animal have been produced using the homologously recombinant host cells described herein.

[0325] In another embodiment, transgenic non-human animals can be produced which contain selected systems which allow for regulated expression of the transgene. One example of such a system is the cre/loxP recombinase system of bacteriophage P1. For a description of the cre/loxP recombinase system, see, e.g., Lakso et al. PNAS 89:6232-6236 (1992). Another example of a recombinase system is the FLP recombinase system of S. cerevisiae (O'Gorman et al. Science 251:1351-1355 (1991). If a cre/loxP recombinase system is used to regulate expression of the transgene, animals containing transgenes encoding both the Cre recombinase and a selected protein is required. Such animals can be provided through the construction of “double” transgenic animals, e.g., by mating two transgenic animals, one containing a transgene encoding a selected protein and the other containing a transgene encoding a recombinase.

[0326] Clones of the non-human transgenic animals described herein can also be produced according to the methods described in Wilmut, I. et al. Nature 385:810-813 (1997) and PCT International Publication Nos. WO 97/07668 and WO 97/07669. In brief, a cell, e.g., a somatic cell, from the transgenic animal can be isolated and induced to exit the growth cycle and enter Go phase. The quiescent cell can then be fused, e.g., through the use of electrical pulses, to an enucleated oocyte from an animal of the same species from which the quiescent cell is isolated. The reconstructed oocyte is then cultured such that it develops to morula or blastocyst and then transferred to pseudopregnant female foster animal. The offspring borne of this female foster animal will be a clone of the animal from which the cell, e.g., the somatic cell, is isolated.

[0327] Transgenic animals containing recombinant cells that express the polypeptides described herein are useful to conduct the assays described herein in an in vivo context. Accordingly, the various physiological factors that are present in vivo and that could effect ligand binding, receptor activation, and signal transduction, may not be evident from in vitro cell-free or cell-based assays. Accordingly, it is useful to provide non-human transgenic animals to assay in vivo receptor function, including ligand interaction, the effect of specific mutant receptors on receptor function and ligand interaction, and the effect of chimeric receptors. It is also possible to assess the effect of null mutations, that is mutations that substantially or completely eliminate one or more receptor functions.

[0328] Pharmaceutical Compositions

[0329] The receptor nucleic acid molecules, protein (particularly fragments such as the extracellular domain), modulators of the protein, and antibodies (also referred to herein as “active compounds”) can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration to a subject, e.g., a human. Such compositions typically comprise the nucleic acid molecule, protein, modulator, or antibody and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.

[0330] As used herein the language “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” is intended to include any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, such media can be used in the compositions of the invention. Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions. A pharmaceutical composition of the invention is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration. Examples of routes of administration include parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, oral (e.g., inhalation), transdermal (topical), transmucosal, and rectal administration. Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, or subcutaneous application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. PH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide. The parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.

[0331] Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions (where water soluble) or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersion. For intravenous administration, suitable carriers include physiological saline, bacteriostatic water, Cremophor EL™ (BASF, Parsippany, N.J.) or phosphate buffered saline (PBS). In all cases, the composition must be sterile and should be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyetheylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof. The proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. Prevention of the action of microorganisms can be achieved by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, ascorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for example, sugars, polyalcohols such as manitol, sorbitol, sodium chloride in the composition. Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent which delays absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.

[0332] Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the active compound (e.g., a receptor protein or anti-receptor antibody) in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization. Generally, dispersions are prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle which contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying which yields a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.

[0333] Oral compositions generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They can be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets. For oral administration, the agent can be contained in enteric forms to survive the stomach or further coated or mixed to be released in a particular region of the GI tract by known methods. For the purpose of oral therapeutic administration, the active compound can be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, or capsules. Oral compositions can also be prepared using a fluid carrier for use as a mouthwash, wherein the compound in the fluid carrier is applied orally and swished and expectorated or swallowed. Pharmaceutically compatible binding agents, and/or adjuvant materials can be included as part of the composition. The tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.

[0334] For administration by inhalation, the compounds are delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from pressured container or dispenser which contains a suitable propellant, e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer.

[0335] Systemic administration can also be by transmucosal or transdermal means. For transmucosal or transdermal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art, and include, for example, for transmucosal administration, detergents, bile salts, and fusidic acid derivatives. Transmucosal administration can be accomplished through the use of nasal sprays or suppositories. For transdermal administration, the active compounds are formulated into ointments, salves, gels, or creams as generally known in the art.

[0336] The compounds can also be prepared in the form of suppositories (e.g., with conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter and other glycerides) or retention enemas for rectal delivery.

[0337] In one embodiment, the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems. Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Corporation and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,522,811.

[0338] It is especially advantageous to formulate oral or parenteral compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unit form as used herein refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subject to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. The specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on the unique characteristics of the active compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an active compound for the treatment of individuals.

[0339] The nucleic acid molecules of the invention can be inserted into vectors and used as gene therapy vectors. Gene therapy vectors can be delivered to a subject by, for example, intravenous injection, local administration (U.S. Pat. No. 5,328,470) or by stereotactic injection (see e.g., Chen et al., PNAS 91:3054-3057 (1994)). The pharmaceutical preparation of the gene therapy vector can include the gene therapy vector in an acceptable diluent, or can comprise a slow release matrix in which the gene delivery vehicle is imbedded. Alternatively, where the complete gene delivery vector can be produced intact from recombinant cells, e.g. retroviral vectors, the pharmaceutical preparation can include one or more cells which produce the gene delivery system.

[0340] The pharmaceutical compositions can be included in a container, pack, or dispenser together with instructions for administration.

[0341] The pharmaceutical compositions are useful in the treatment of a 2871-responsive disorder. “Treatment” is herein defined as the application or administration of a therapeutic agent to a patient, or application or administration of a therapeutic agent to an isolated tissue or cell line from a patient, who has a disease, a symptom of disease or a predisposition toward a disease, with the purpose to cure, heal, alleviate, relieve, alter, remedy, ameliorate, improve or affect the disease, the symptoms of disease or the predisposition toward disease. A “therapeutic agent” includes, but it not limited to, small molecules, peptides, antibodies, ribozymes and antisense oligonucleotides.

[0342] This invention may be embodied in many different forms and should not be construed as limited to the embodiments set forth herein; rather, these embodiments are provided so that this disclosure will fully convey the invention to those skilled in the art. Many modifications and other embodiments of the invention will come to mind in one skilled in the art to which this invention pertains having the benefit of the teachings presented in the foregoing description. Although specific terms are employed, they are used as in the art unless otherwise indicated.

EXAMPLE

[0343] Gene Expression Study by TaqMan Quantitative Polymerase Chain Reaction

[0344] Total RNA from various tissues was extracted using a single step method according to the manufacturer instructions (RNA STAT-60 TelTest, Inc). Each RNA preparation was treated with DNase I (Ambion) at 37° C. for 1 hour. After phenol extraction the sample was subjected to reverse transcription using the Superscript kit according to the manufacturer instructions (GibcoBRL). A negative control sample which contains RNA but without reverse transcriptase was carried out simultaneously. Mock reverse transcribed samples generated in the absence of reverse transcriptase were run for each RNA/cDNA sample to make sure the DNase I treatment was complete. The integrity of the RNA samples following DNase I treatment was checked by agarose gel electrophoresis and ethidium bromide staining. Samples are determined to have complete DNase I treatment if at least 38 amplification cycles are required to reach threshold levels of flourescence using the internal reference amplicon β-2 microglobulin.

[0345] Probes are designed by PrimerExpress software from PE Biosystems using consensus sequence. The primer and probe sequences for RNA expression analysis of gene 2871 is as following:

2TaqMan Probe/Primer DataForward PrimerATCGTGTTCCTTGGGCTGATTm = 58% GC = 50Start = 713Length = 20Reverse PrimerTCCGAGAGTCCCCAAATGGTm = 59% GC = 58Start = 782Length = 19TaqMan ProbeAGCATTGATCGCTATCTGAAGGTGGTCAATm = 68% GC = 45Start = 734Length = 29

[0346] The target probe gene 2871 is labeled using 6-carboxyfluorescein (FAM). The internal reference amplicon for β2-microglobulin is labeled using VIC. In this way, levels of the target gene and internal reference gene can be measured in the same tube by multiplex PCR. Forward and reverse primers and the probes for both the internal reference gene and target gene are added to the TaqMan Universal PCR Master Mix (PE Applied Biosystems). Although final concentrations of primer and probe may vary they are internally consistent within a given experiment. A typical experiment contains forward and reverse primers plus 100 nM probe for β-2 microglobulin and 600 nM forward and reverse primers plus 200 nM probe for the target gene. TaqMan matrix experiments are carried out on ABI PRPSM 7700 Sequence Detection System (PE Applied Biosystems). The thermal cycler condition is as follows: hold 2 min at 50° C. and 10 min at 95° C., followed by two step PCR for 40 cycles, melt at 95° C. for 15 sec and anneal/extend at 60° C. 1 min.

[0347] RNA from a variety of tissues and cell types were purified and converted to cDNA using reverse transcriptase. The cells and tissues used to analyse 2871 include the following: Various organs, including lymph node, spleen, thymus, heart, brain, liver, fetal liver, and fibrotic liver; in vitro differentiated helper T cell populations that were stimulated with antibodies to the CD3 subunit of the T cell receptor (_CD3 stimulation) for 0 or 24 hours; resting and_CD3 stimulated ex vivo purified CD3 T cells from peripheral blood; other cells purified from peripheral blood, including granulocytes, CD4 and CD8 positive cells, B cells purified with anti-CD19 antibodies and stimulated with LPS for 24 hours, peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC), resting or stimulated with phytohemagglutinin. Other cells analysed in this experiment include CD34 positive and negative (CD34+ and CD34−) cells or leukocytes purified from the peripheral blood (mPB) or bone marrow (mBM) of patients treated with G-CSF. CD34+ and CD34− cells were also purified from normal adult bone marrow (ABM) or cord blood (CB). Megakaryocytes the peripheral blood (mPB) or bone marrow (mBM) of patients treated with G-CSF were also examined. Erythroblasts from normal bone marrow were also examined. Transformed cell lines include erythroleukemia cells K562 and the acute promyelocytic leukemia cell line HL60 and Hep3B hepatocellular liver carcinoma cells cultured in normal or reduced oxygen tension.

[0348] A comparative Ct method is used for relative quantitation of gene expression. The threshold cycle or Ct value is the cycle at which a statistically significant increase in ΔRn is detected. A lower Ct value indicates a higher concentration of the mRNA for the gene corresponding to the target probe sequence. The Ct value for the target gene is normalized relative to the internal reference gene Ct value to generate a delta Ct value using the following formula: ΔCt=Cttarget−Ctreference. To generate values for relative expression, a cDNA sample with a relatively low expression level in the matrix is chosen as a calibrator sample. The ΔCt value for the calibrator tissue is then subtracted from the ΔCt for each according to the following formula: ΔΔCt=ΔCt-sample−ΔCt-calibrator. A value used for relative expression is calculated using the arithmetic formula given by 2−ΔΔCt. This value is then used to graph the relative expression of the target gene in the multiple tissues in the study.

[0349] Transcription Profiling for Genes that are p53 Regulated in NCI-H125 Cells

[0350] NCI-H125 is a lung adenosquamous carcinoma cell line that is null for expression of the p53 tumor suppressor gene. Reintroduction of p53 expression in these cells results in programmed cell death, even with trace amounts of the p53 protein. In order to identify possible oncogenes that are transcriptionally repressed by p53 we profiled H125 cells that were transiently infected with a retroviral construct expressing p53 and compared them to cells that were infected with the vector alone. Our focus was on genes with transcripts present in the vector control cells that were significantly reduced in cells expressing p53. One of the genes identified in this experiment was MID 2871, a putative G protein coupled receptor. 2871 was downregulated in H125 cells expressing p53, and showed increased expression in clinical lung tumor samples as compared to normal lung.

CHAPTER 2

14926 Receptor, A Novel G-Protein Coupled Receptor

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

[0351] G-Protein Coupled Receptors

[0352] G-protein coupled receptors (GPCRs) constitute a major class of proteins responsible for transducing a signal within a cell. GPCRs have three structural domains: an amino terminal extracellular domain, a transmembrane domain containing seven transmembrane segments, three extracellular loops, and three intracellular loops, and a carboxy terminal intracellular domain. Upon binding of a ligand to an extracellular portion of a GPCR, a signal is transduced within the cell that results in a change in a biological or physiological property of the cell. GPCRs, along with G-proteins and effectors (intracellular enzymes and channels modulated by G-proteins), are the components of a modular signaling system that connects the state of intracellular second messengers to extracellular inputs.

[0353] GPCR genes and gene-products are potential causative agents of disease (Spiegel et al., J. Clin. Invest. 92:1119-1125 (1993); McKusick et al., J. Med. Genet. 30:1-26 (1993)). Specific defects in the rhodopsin gene and the V2 vasopressin receptor gene have been shown to cause various forms of retinitis pigmentosum (Nathans et al., Annu. Rev. Genet. 26:403-424(1992)), and nephrogenic diabetes insipidus (Holtzman et al., Hum. Mol. Genet. 2:1201-1204 (1993)). These receptors are of critical importance to both the central nervous system and peripheral physiological processes. Evolutionary analyses suggest that the ancestor of these proteins originally developed in concert with complex body plans and nervous systems.

[0354] The GPCR protein superfamily can be divided into five families: Family I, receptors typified by rhodopsin and the β2-adrenergic receptor and currently represented by over 200 unique members (Dohlman et al., Annu. Rev. Biochem. 60:653-688 (1991)); Family II, the parathyroid hormone/calcitonin/secretin receptor family (Juppner et al., Science 254:1024-1026 (1991); Lin et al., Science 254:1022-1024 (1991)); Family III, the metabotropic glutamate receptor family (Nakanishi, Science 258 597:603 (1992)); Family IV, the cAMP receptor family, important in the chemotaxis and development of D. discoideum (Klein et al., Science 241:1467-1472 (1988)); and Family V, the fungal mating pheromone receptors such as STE2 (Kuran, Annu. Rev. Biochem. 61:1097-1129 (1992)).

[0355] There are also a small number of other proteins which present seven putative hydrophobic segments and appear to be unrelated to GPCRs; they have not been shown to couple to G-proteins. Drosophila expresses a photoreceptor-specific protein, bride of sevenless (boss), a seven-transmembrane-segment protein which has been extensively studied and does not show evidence of being a GPCR (Hart et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5047-5051 (1993)). The genefrizzled (fz) in Drosophila is also thought to be a protein with seven transmembrane segments. Like boss, fz has not been shown to couple to G-proteins (Vinson et al., Nature 338:263-264 (1989)).

[0356] G proteins represent a family of heterotrimeric proteins composed of α, β0 and γ subunits, that bind guanine nucleotides. These proteins are usually linked to cell surface receptors, e.g., receptors containing seven transmembrane segments. Following ligand binding to the GPCR, a conformational change is transmitted to the G protein, which causes the α-subunit to exchange a bound GDP molecule for a GTP molecule and to dissociate from the βγ-subunits. The GTP-bound form of the α-subunit typically functions as an effector-modulating moiety, leading to the production of second messengers, such as cAMP (e.g., by activation of adenyl cyclase), diacylglycerol or inositol phosphates. Greater than 20 different types of α-subunits are known in humans. These subunits associate with a smaller pool of β and γ subunits. Examples of mammalian G proteins include Gi, Go, Gq, Gs and Gt. G proteins are described extensively in Lodish et al., Molecular Cell Biology, (Scientific American Books Inc., New York, N.Y., 1995), the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. GPCRs, G proteins and G protein-linked effector and second messenger systems have been reviewed in The G-Protein Linked Receptor Fact Book, Watson et al., eds., Academic Press (1994).

[0357] GPCRs are a major target for drug action and development. Accordingly, it is valuable to the field of pharmaceutical development to identify and characterize previously unknown GPCRs. The present invention advances the state of the art by providing a previously unidentified human GPCR.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

[0358] It is an object of the invention to identify novel GPCRs.

[0359] It is a further object of the invention to provide novel GPCR polypeptides that are useful as reagents or targets in receptor assays applicable to treatment and diagnosis of GPCR-mediated disorders.

[0360] It is a further object of the invention to provide polynucleotides corresponding to the novel GPCR receptor polypeptides that are useful as targets and reagents in receptor assays applicable to treatment and diagnosis of GPCR-mediated disorders and useful for producing novel receptor polypeptides by recombinant methods.

[0361] A specific object of the invention is to identify compounds that act as agonists and antagonists and modulate the expression of the novel receptor.

[0362] A further specific object of the invention is to provide compounds that modulate expression of the receptor for treatment and diagnosis of GPCR-related disorders.

[0363] The invention is thus based on the identification of a novel GPCR, designated the 14926 receptor.

[0364] The invention provides isolated 14926 receptor polypeptides including a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 7.

[0365] The invention also provides isolated 14926 receptor nucleic acid molecules having the sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 8.

[0366] The invention also provides variant polypeptides having an amino acid sequence that is substantially homologous to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 7 or encoded by the deposited cDNA.

[0367] The invention also provides variant nucleic acid sequences that are substantially homologous to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 8.

[0368] The invention also provides fragments of the polypeptide shown in SEQ ID NO: 7 and nucleotide shown in SEQ ID NO: 8, as well as substantially homologous fragments of the polypeptide or nucleic acid.

[0369] The invention also provides vectors and host cells for expressing the receptor nucleic acid molecules and polypeptides and particularly recombinant vectors and host cells.

[0370] The invention also provides methods of making the vectors and host cells and methods for using them to produce the receptor nucleic acid molecules and polypeptides.

[0371] The invention also provides antibodies that selectively bind the receptor polypeptides and fragments.

[0372] The invention also provides methods of screening for compounds that modulate the activity of the receptor polypeptides. Modulation can be at the level of the polypeptide receptor or at the level of controlling the expression of nucleic acid (RNA or DNA) expressing the receptor polypeptide.

[0373] The invention also provides a process for modulating receptor polypeptide activity, especially using the screened compounds, including to treat conditions related to expression of the receptor polypeptides.

[0374] The invention also provides diagnostic assays for determining the presence of and level of the receptor polypeptides or nucleic acid molecules in a biological sample.

[0375] The invention also provides diagnostic assays for determining the presence of a mutation in the receptor polypeptides or nucleic acid molecules.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

[0376] The present inventions now will be described more fully hereinafter with reference to the accompanying drawings, in which some, but not all embodiments of the invention are shown. Indeed, these inventions may be embodied in many different forms and should not be construed as limited to the embodiments set forth herein; rather, these embodiments are provided so that this disclosure will satisfy applicable legal requirements. Like numbers refer to like elements throughout.

[0377] Many modifications and other embodiments of the inventions set forth herein will come to mind to one skilled in the art to which these inventions pertain having the benefit of the teachings presented in the foregoing descriptions and the associated drawings. Therefore, it is to be understood that the inventions are not to be limited to the specific embodiments disclosed and that modifications and other embodiments are intended to be included within the scope of the appended claims. Although specific terms are employed herein, they are used in a generic and descriptive sense only and not for purposes of limitation.

[0378] Receptor Function/Signal Pathway

[0379] The 14926 receptor protein is a GPCR that participates in signaling pathways. As used herein, a “signaling pathway” refers to the modulation (e.g., stimulation or inhibition) of a cellular function/activity upon the binding of a ligand to the GPCR (14926 protein). Examples of such functions include mobilization of intracellular molecules that participate in a signal transduction pathway, e.g., phosphatidylinositol 4,5-bisphosphate (PIP2), inositol 1,4,5-triphosphate (IP3) and adenylate cyclase; polarization of the plasma membrane; production or secretion of molecules; alteration in the structure of a cellular component; cell proliferation, e.g., synthesis of DNA; cell migration; cell differentiation; and cell survival. Since the 14926 receptor protein is expressed in brain cells participating in a 14926 receptor protein signaling pathway include, but are not limited to cells derived from these tissues.

[0380] The response mediated by the receptor protein depends on the type of cell. For example, in some cells, binding of a ligand to the receptor protein may stimulate an activity such as release of compounds, gating of a channel, cellular adhesion, migration, differentiation, etc., through phosphatidylinositol or cyclic AMP metabolism and turnover while in other cells, the binding of the ligand will produce a different result. Regardless of the cellular activity/response modulated by the receptor protein, it is universal that the protein is a GPCR and interacts with G proteins to produce one or more secondary signals, in a variety of intracellular signal transduction pathways, e.g., through phosphatidylinositol or cyclic AMP metabolism and turnover, in a cell.

[0381] As used herein, “phosphatidylinositol turnover and metabolism” refers to the molecules involved in the turnover and metabolism of phosphatidylinositol 4,5-bisphosphate (PIP2) as well as to the activities of these molecules. PIP2 is a phospholipid found in the cytosolic leaflet of the plasma membrane. Binding of ligand to the receptor activates, in some cells, the plasma-membrane enzyme phospholipase C that in turn can hydrolyze PIP2 to produce 1,2-diacylglycerol (DAG) and inositol 1,4,5-triphosphate (IP3). Once formed IP3 can diffuse to the endoplasmic reticulum surface where it can bind an IP3 receptor, e.g., a calcium channel protein containing an IP3 binding site. IP3 binding can induce opening of the channel, allowing calcium ions to be released into the cytoplasm. IP3 can also be phosphorylated by a specific kinase to form inositol 1,3,4,5-tetraphosphate (IP4), a molecule which can cause calcium entry into the cytoplasm from the extracellular medium. IP3 and IP4 can subsequently be hydrolyzed very rapidly to the inactive products inositol 1,4-biphosphate (IP2) and inositol 1,3,4-triphosphate, respectively. These inactive products can be recycled by the cell to synthesize PIP2. The other second messenger produced by the hydrolysis of PIP2, namely 1,2-diacylglycerol (DAG), remains in the cell membrane where it can serve to activate the enzyme protein kinase C. Protein kinase C is usually found soluble in the cytoplasm of the cell, but upon an increase in the intracellular calcium concentration, this enzyme can move to the plasma membrane where it can be activated by DAG. The activation of protein kinase C in different cells results in various cellular responses such as the phosphorylation of glycogen synthase, or the phosphorylation of various transcription factors, e.g., NF-kB. The language “phosphatidylinositol activity”, as used herein, refers to an activity of PIP2 or one of its metabolites.

[0382] Another signaling pathway in which the receptor may participate is the cAMP turnover pathway. As used herein, “cyclic AMP turnover and metabolism” refers to the molecules involved in the turnover and metabolism of cyclic AMP (cAMP) as well as to the activities of these molecules. Cyclic AMP is a second messenger produced in response to ligand-induced stimulation of certain G protein coupled receptors. In the cAMP signaling pathway, binding of a ligand to a GPCR can lead to the activation of the enzyme adenyl cyclase, which catalyzes the synthesis of cAMP. The newly synthesized cAMP can in turn activate a cAMP-dependent protein kinase. This activated kinase can phosphorylate a voltage-gated potassium channel protein, or an associated protein, and lead to the inability of the potassium channel to open during an action potential. The inability of the potassium channel to open results in a decrease in the outward flow of potassium, which normally repolarizes the membrane of a neuron, leading to prolonged membrane depolarization.

[0383] Polypeptides

[0384] The invention is based on the discovery of a novel G-coupled protein receptor. Specifically, an expressed sequence tag (EST) was selected based on homology to G-protein-coupled receptor sequences. This EST was used to design primers based on sequences that it contains and used to identify a cDNA from a human brain cDNA library. Positive clones were sequenced and the overlapping fragments were assembled. Analysis of the assembled sequence revealed that the cloned cDNA molecule encodes a G-protein coupled receptor.

[0385] The invention thus relates to a novel GPCR having the deduced amino acid sequence shown in FIGS. 11A-11B (SEQ ID NO: 7).

[0386] The deposit will be maintained under the terms of the Budapest Treaty on the International Recognition of the Deposit of Microorganisms. The deposit is provided as a convenience to those of skill in the art and is not an admission that a deposit is required under 35 U.S.C. § 112. The deposited sequence, as well as the polypeptide encoded by the sequence, is incorporated herein by reference and controls in the event of any conflict, such as a sequencing error, with description in this application.

[0387] The “14926 receptor polypeptide” or “14926 receptor protein” refers to the polypeptide in SEQ ID NO: 7 or encoded by the deposited cDNA. The term “receptor protein” or “receptor polypeptide”, however, further includes the numerous variants described herein, as well as fragments derived from the full length 14926 polypeptide and variants.

[0388] The present invention thus provides an isolated or purified 14926 receptor polypeptide and variants and fragments thereof.

[0389] The 14926 polypeptide is a 370 residue protein exhibiting three main structural domains. The amino terminal extracellular domain is identified to be within residues 1 to about 23 in SEQ ID NO: 7. The transmembrane domain is identified to be within residues from about 24 to about 341 in SEQ ID NO: 7. The carboxy terminal intracellular domain is identified to be within residues from about 342 to 370 in SEQ If) NO: 7. The transmembrane domain contains seven segments that span the membrane. The transmembrane segments are found from about amino acid 24 to about amino acid 46, from about amino acid 56 to about amino acid 78, from about amino acid 96 to about amino acid 117, from about amino acid 133 to about amino acid 154, from about amino acid 185 to about amino acid 209, from about amino acid 286 to about amino acid 307, and from about amino acid 318 to about amino acid 341. Within the region spanning the entire transmembrane domain are three intracellular and three extracellular loops. The three intracellular loops are found from about amino acid 47 to about amino acid 55, from about amino acid 118 to about amino acid 132, and from about amino acid 210 to about amino acid 285. The three extracellular loops are found at from about amino acid 79 to about amino acid 95, from about amino acid 155 to about amino acid 184, and from about amino acid 308 to about amino acid 317.

[0390] A glycosylation site is found at amino acids 3-6, which corresponds to the amino terminal extracellular domain. A second glycosylation site is found at amino acids 83-86, which corresponds to the first extracellular loop. A third glycosylation site is found at amino acids 182-185, which spans the second extracellular loop and fifth transmembrane segment. A fourth glycosylation site is found at amino acids 227-230, which corresponds to the third intracellular loop. A fifth glycosylation site occurs at amino acids 264-267, also in the third intracellular loop. A cyclic AMP or cyclic GMP-dependent protein kinase phosphorylation site is found at amino acids 131-134 and spans the second intracellular loop and fourth transmembrane segment, and at amino acids 281-284, corresponding to the third intracellular loop. A protein kinase C phosphorylation site is found at amino acids 80-82, corresponding to the first intracellular loop. A second protein kinase C phosphorylation site is found at amino acids 93-95, corresponding to the first extracellular loop. A third protein kinase C phosphorylation site is found at amino acids 130-132, corresponding to the second intracellular loop. A fourth protein kinase C phosphorylation site is found at amino acids 178-180, corresponding to the second extracellular loop. A fifth protein kinase C phosphorylation site is found at amino acids 266-268, corresponding to the third intracellular loop. A sixth protein kinase C phosphorylation site is found at amino acids 342-344, corresponding to the carboxy terminal intracellular domain. A casein kinase II phosphorylation site occurs at amino acids 342-345, corresponding to the carboxy terminal intracellular domain. N-myristoylation sites occur at amino acids 84-89 and 90-95, corresponding to the first extracellular loop; 101-106, corresponding to the third transmembrane segment; 237-242 and 258-263, corresponding to the third intracellular loop; and 318-323, corresponding to the seventh transmembrane segment. An amidation site is found at amino acids 266-269, corresponding to the third intracellular loop.

[0391] The transmembrane domain includes a GPCR signal transduction signature, TRY, at residues 118-120. The sequence includes an arginine at residue 119, an invariant amino acid in GPCRs.

[0392] Based on a GenBank search, homology was shown to serotonin receptors.

[0393] As used herein, a polypeptide is said to be “isolated” or “purified” when it is substantially free of cellular material when it is isolated from recombinant and non-recombinant cells, or free of chemical precursors or other chemicals when it is chemically synthesized. A polypeptide, however, can be joined to another polypeptide with which it is not normally associated in a cell and still be considered “isolated” or “purified.”

[0394] The receptor polypeptides can be purified to homogeneity. It is understood, however, that preparations in which the polypeptide is not purified to homogeneity are useful and considered to contain an isolated form of the polypeptide. The critical feature is that the preparation allows for the desired function of the polypeptide, even in the presence of considerable amounts of other components. Thus, the invention encompasses various degrees of purity.

[0395] In one embodiment, the language “substantially free of cellular material” includes preparations of the receptor polypeptide having less than about 30% (by dry weight) other proteins (i.e., contaminating protein), less than about 20% other proteins, less than about 10% other proteins, or less than about 5% other proteins. When the receptor polypeptide is recombinantly produced, it can also be substantially free of culture medium, i.e., culture medium represents less than about 20%, less than about 10%, or less than about 5% of the volume of the protein preparation.

[0396] The language “substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals” includes preparations of the receptor polypeptide in which it is separated from chemical precursors or other chemicals that are involved in its synthesis.

[0397] In one embodiment, the language “substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals” includes preparations of the polypeptide having less than about 30% (by dry weight) chemical precursors or other chemicals, less than about 20% chemical precursors or other chemicals, less than about 10% chemical precursors or other chemicals, or less than about 5% chemical precursors or other chemicals. In one embodiment, the receptor polypeptide comprises the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 7. However, the invention also encompasses sequence variants. Variants include a substantially homologous protein encoded by the same genetic locus in an organism, i.e., an allelic variant. The receptor maps to chromosome 7, in close proximity to marker Bda06f04. Variants also encompass proteins derived from other genetic loci in an organism, but having substantial homology to the 14926 receptor protein of SEQ ID NO: 7. Variants also include proteins substantially homologous to the 14926 receptor protein but derived from another organism, i.e., an ortholog. Variants also include proteins that are substantially homologous to the 14926 receptor protein that are produced by chemical synthesis. Variants also include proteins that are substantially homologous to the 14926 receptor protein that are produced by recombinant methods. It is understood, however, that variants exclude any amino acid sequences disclosed prior to the invention.

[0398] As used herein, two proteins (or a region of the proteins) are substantially homologous when the amino acid sequences are at least about 55-60%, 60-65%, 65-70%, typically at least about 70-75%, more typically at least about 80-85%, and most typically at least about 90-95% or more homologous. A substantially homologous amino acid sequence, according to the present invention, will be encoded by a nucleic acid sequence hybridizing to the nucleic acid sequence, or portion thereof, of the sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 8 under stringent conditions as more fully described below.

[0399] To determine the percent homology of two amino acid sequences, or of two nucleic acids, the sequences are aligned for optimal comparison purposes (e.g., gaps can be introduced in the sequence of one protein or nucleic acid for optimal alignment with the other protein or nucleic acid). The amino acid residues or nucleotides at corresponding amino acid positions or nucleotide positions are then compared. When a position in one sequence is occupied by the same amino acid residue or nucleotide as the corresponding position in the other sequence, then the molecules are homologous at that position. As used herein, amino acid or nucleic acid “homology” is equivalent to amino acid or nucleic acid “identity”. The percent homology between the two sequences is a function of the number of identical positions shared by the sequences (i.e., per cent homology equals the number of identical positions/total number of positions times 100).

[0400] The invention also encompasses polypeptides having a lower degree of identity but having sufficient similarity so as to perform one or more of the same functions performed by the 14926 polypeptide. Similarity is determined by conserved amino acid substitution. Such substitutions are those that substitute a given amino acid in a polypeptide by another amino acid of like characteristics. Conservative substitutions are likely to be phenotypically silent. Typically seen as conservative substitutions are the replacements, one for another, among the aliphatic amino acids Ala, Val, Leu, and Ile; interchange of the hydroxyl residues Ser and Thr, exchange of the acidic residues Asp and Glu, substitution between the amide residues Asn and Gln, exchange of the basic residues Lys and Arg and replacements among the aromatic residues Phe, Tyr. Guidance concerning which amino acid changes are likely to be phenotypically silent are found in Bowie et al., Science 247:1306-1310 (1990).

3TABLE 1Conservative Amino Acid Substitutions.AromaticPhenylalanineTryptophanTyrosineHydrophobicLeucineIsoleucineValinePolarGlutamineAsparagineBasicArginineLysineHistidineAcidicAspartic AcidGlutamic AcidSmallAlanineSerineThreonineMethionineGlycine

[0401] Both identity and similarity can be readily calculated (Computational Molecular Biology, Lesk, A. M., ed., Oxford University Press, New York, 1988; Biocomputing: Informatics and Genome Projects, Smith, D. W., ed., Academic Press, New York, 1993; Computer Analysis of Sequence Data, Part 1, Griffin, A. M., and Griffin, H. G., eds., Humana Press, New Jersey, 1994; Sequence Analysis in Molecular Biology, von Heinje, G., Academic Press, 1987; and Sequence Analysis Primer, Gribskov, M. and Devereux, J., eds., M Stockton Press, New York, 1991). Preferred computer program methods to determine identify and similarity between two sequences include, but are not limited to, GCG program package (Devereux, J., et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 12(1):387 (1984)), BLASTP, BLASTN, FASTA (Atschul, S. F. et al., J Molec. Biol. 215:403 (1990)).

[0402] A variant polypeptide can differ in amino acid sequence by one or more substitutions, deletions, insertions, inversions, fusions, and truncations or a combination of any of these.

[0403] Variant polypeptides can be fully functional or can lack function in one or more activities. Thus, in the present case, variations can affect the function, for example, of one or more of the regions corresponding to ligand binding, membrane association, G-protein binding and signal transduction.

[0404] Fully functional variants typically contain only conservative variation or variation in non-critical residues or in non-critical regions. Functional variants can also contain substitution of similar amino acids which result in no change or an insignificant change in function. Alternatively, such substitutions may positively or negatively affect function to some degree.

[0405] Non-functional variants typically contain one or more non-conservative amino acid substitutions, deletions, insertions, inversions, or truncation or a substitution, insertion, inversion, or deletion in a critical residue or critical region.

[0406] As indicated, variants can be naturally-occurring or can be made by recombinant means or chemical synthesis to provide useful and novel characteristics for the receptor polypeptide. This includes preventing immunogenicity from pharmaceutical formulations by preventing protein aggregation.

[0407] Useful variations further include alteration of ligand binding characteristics. For example, one embodiment involves a variation at the binding site that results in binding but not release, or slower release, of ligand. A further useful variation at the same sites can result in a higher affinity for ligand. Useful variations also include changes that provide for affinity for another ligand. Another useful variation includes one that allows binding but which prevents activation by the ligand. Another useful variation includes variation in the transmembrane G-protein-binding/signal transduction domain that provides for reduced or increased binding by the appropriate G-protein or for binding by a different G-protein than the one with which the receptor is normally associated. Another useful variation provides a fusion protein in which one or more domains or subregions is operationally fused to one or more domains or subregions from another G-protein coupled receptor.

[0408] Amino acids that are essential for function can be identified by methods known in the art, such as site-directed mutagenesis or alanine-scanning mutagenesis (Cunningham et al., Science 244:1081-1085 (1989)). The latter procedure introduces single alanine mutations at every residue in the molecule. The resulting mutant molecules are then tested for biological activity such as receptor binding or in vitro, or in vitro proliferative activity. Sites that are critical for ligand-receptor binding can also be determined by structural analysis such as crystallization, nuclear magnetic resonance or photoaffinity labeling (Smith et al., J Mol. Biol. 224:899-904 (1992); de Vos et al. Science 255:306-312 (1992)).

[0409] Substantial homology can be to the entire nucleic acid or amino acid sequence or to fragments of these sequences.

[0410] The invention thus also includes polypeptide fragments of the 14926 receptor protein. Fragments can be derived from the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 7. However, the invention also encompasses fragments of the variants of the 14926 receptor protein as described herein.

[0411] The fragments to which the invention pertains, however, are not to be construed as encompassing fragments that may be disclosed prior to the present invention.

[0412] Fragments can retain one or more of the biological activities of the protein, for example the ability to bind to a G-protein or ligand. Fragments can also be useful as an immunogen to generate receptor antibodies.

[0413] Biologically active fragments can comprise a domain or motif, e.g., an extracellular or intracellular domain or loop, one or more transmembrane segments, or parts thereof, G-protein binding site, or GPCR signature, glycosylation sites, cAMP and cGMP-dependent, protein kinase C, and casein kinase II phosphorylation sites, amidation and myristoylation sites. Such peptides can be, for example, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 50, 100 or more amino acids in length.

[0414] Possible fragments include, but are not limited to: 1) soluble peptides comprising the entire amino terminal extracellular domain from amino acid 1 to about amino acid 23 of SEQ ID NO: 7, or parts thereof; 2) peptides comprising the entire carboxy terminal intracellular domain from about amino acid 342 to amino acid 370 of SEQ ID NO: 7, or parts thereof; 3) peptides comprising the region spanning the entire transmembrane domain from about amino acid 24 to about amino acid 341, or parts thereof; 4) any of the specific transmembrane segments, or parts thereof, from about amino acid 24 to about amino acid 46, from about amino acid 56 to about amino acid 78, from about amino acid 96 to about amino acid 117, from about amino acid 133 to about amino acid 154, from about amino acid 185 to about amino acid 209, from about amino acid 286 to about amino acid 307, and from about amino acid 318 to about amino acid 341; 5) any of the three intracellular or three extracellular loops, or parts thereof, from about amino acid 79 to about amino acid 95, from about amino acid 155 to about amino acid 184, from about amino acid 308 to about amino acid 317, from about amino acid 47 to about amino acid 55, from about amino acid 118 to about amino acid 132, and from about amino acid 210 to about amino acid 285. Fragments further include combinations of the above fragments, such as an amino terminal domain combined with one or more transmembrane segments and the attendant extra or intracellular loops or one or more transmembrane segments, and the attendant intra or extracellular loops, plus the carboxy terminal domain. Thus, any of the above fragments can be combined. Other fragments include the mature protein from about amino acid 6 to 370. Other fragments contain the various functional sites described herein, such as phosphorylation sites, glycosylation sites, and myristoylation sites and a sequence containing the GPCR signature sequence. Fragments, for example, can extend in one or both directions from the functional site to encompass 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, or up to 100 amino acids. Further, fragments can include sub-fragments of the specific domains mentioned above, which sub-fragments retain the function of the domain from which they are derived. Fragments also include amino acid sequences greater than 135 amino acids. Fragments also include antigenic fragments and specifically those shown to have a high antigenic index in FIG. 13. Further specific fragments include a fragment from about 136 to about 169 and subfragments thereof greater than about 5 amino acids; a fragment including any of the sequences from about 1-120 but extending beyond about 120; a fragment including any of the sequences from about 1-135 but extending beyond about 135; from about 304-370 and subfragments thereof greater than about 7 amino acids; from about 320-370 and subfragments thereof greater than about 7 amino acids; from about 326-370 and subfragments thereof greater than about 7 amino acids; a fragment from around 350-370 and subfragments thereof greater than about 5 amino acids; a fragment containing sequences from around 170-304 but including sequences either extending beyond about 170 or 304 or both.

[0415] Accordingly, possible fragments include fragments defining a ligand-binding site, fragments defining a glycosylation site, fragments defining membrane association, fragments defining phosphorylation sites, fragments defining sites of interaction with G proteins and signal transduction, and fragments defining myristoylation sites. By this is intended a discrete fragment that provides the relevant function or allows the relevant function to be identified. In a preferred embodiment, the fragment contains the ligand-binding site.

[0416] The invention also provides fragments with immunogenic properties. These contain an epitope-bearing portion of the 14926 receptor protein and variants. These epitope-bearing peptides are useful to raise antibodies that bind specifically to a receptor polypeptide or region or fragment. These peptides can contain at least 7, 12, 14, or between at least about 15 to about 30 amino acids. Regions having a high antigenicity index are shown in FIG. 13.

[0417] Non-limiting examples of antigenic polypeptides that can be used to generate antibodies include peptides derived from the amino terminal extracellular domain or any of the intra or extracellular loops.

[0418] The epitope-bearing receptor and polypeptides may be produced by any conventional means (Houghten, R. A., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:5131-5135 (1985)). Simultaneous multiple peptide synthesis is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,631,211.

[0419] Fragments can be discrete (not fused to other amino acids or polypeptides) or can be within a larger polypeptide. Further, several fragments can be comprised within a single larger polypeptide. In one embodiment a fragment designed for expression in a host can have heterologous pre- and pro-polypeptide regions fused to the amino terminus of the receptor fragment and an additional region fused to the carboxyl terminus of the fragment.

[0420] The invention thus provides chimeric or fusion proteins. These comprise a receptor protein operatively linked to a heterologous protein having an amino acid sequence not substantially homologous to the receptor protein. “Operatively linked” indicates that the receptor protein and the heterologous protein are fused in-frame. The heterologous protein can be fused to the N-terminus or C-terminus of the receptor protein.

[0421] In one embodiment the fusion protein does not affect receptor function per se. For example, the fusion protein can be a GST-fusion protein in which the receptor sequences are fused to the C-terminus of the GST sequences. Other types of fusion proteins include, but are not limited to, enzymatic fusion proteins, for example beta-galactosidase fusions, yeast two-hybrid GAL fusions, poly-His fusions and Ig fusions. Such fusion proteins, particularly poly-His fusions, can facilitate the purification of recombinant receptor protein. In certain host cells (e.g., mammalian host cells), expression and/or secretion of a protein can be increased by using a heterologous signal sequence. Therefore, in another embodiment, the fusion protein contains a heterologous signal sequence at its N-terminus.

[0422] EP-A-O 464 533 discloses fusion proteins comprising various portions of immunoglobulin constant regions. The Fc is useful in therapy and diagnosis and thus results, for example, in improved pharmacokinetic properties (EP-A 0232 262). In drug discovery, for example, human proteins have been fused with Fc portions for the purpose of high-throughput screening assays to identify antagonists. Bennett et al. (J. Mol. Recog. 8:52-58 (1995)) and Johanson et al. (J. Biol. Chem. 270, 16:9459-9471 (1995)). Thus, this invention also encompasses soluble fusion proteins containing a receptor polypeptide and various portions of the constant regions of heavy or light chains of immunoglobulins of various subclass (IgG, IgM, IgA, IgE). Preferred as immunoglobulin is the constant part of the heavy chain of human IgG, particularly IgG1, where fusion takes place at the hinge region. For some uses it is desirable to remove the Fc after the fusion protein has been used for its intended purpose, for example when the fusion protein is to be used as antigen for immunizations. In a particular embodiment, the Fc part can be removed in a simple way by a cleavage sequence which is also incorporated and can be cleaved with factor Xa.

[0423] A chimeric or fusion protein can be produced by standard recombinant DNA techniques. For example, DNA fragments coding for the different protein sequences are ligated together in-frame in accordance with conventional techniques. In another embodiment, the fusion gene can be synthesized by conventional techniques including automated DNA synthesizers. Alternatively, PCR amplification of gene fragments can be carried out using anchor primers which give rise to complementary overhangs between two consecutive gene fragments which can subsequently be annealed and re-amplified to generate a chimeric gene sequence (see Ausubel et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, 1992). Moreover, many expression vectors are commercially available that already encode a fusion moiety (e.g., a GST protein). A receptor protein-encoding nucleic acid can be cloned into such an expression vector such that the fusion moiety is linked in-frame to the receptor protein.

[0424] Another form of fusion protein is one that directly affects receptor functions. Accordingly, a receptor polypeptide is encompassed by the present invention in which one or more of the receptor domains (or parts thereof) has been replaced by homologous domains (or parts thereof) from another G-protein coupled receptor or other type of receptor. Accordingly, various permutations are possible. The amino terminal extracellular domain, or subregion thereof, (for example, ligand-binding) can be replaced with the domain or subregion from another ligand-binding receptor protein. Alternatively, the entire transmembrane domain, or any of the seven segments or loops, or parts thereof, for example, G-protein-binding/signal transduction, can be replaced. Finally, the carboxy terminal intracellular domain or subregion can be replaced. Thus, chimeric receptors can be formed in which one or more of the native domains or subregions has been replaced.

[0425] The isolated receptor protein can be purified from cells that naturally express it, such as from brain, spleen, lung, kidney, skeletal muscle, fetal liver, adult liver, heart, and K562 (erythroblast/erythroleukemia), 293 (kidney), and Jurkat (T cell) cell lines, purified from cells that have been altered to express it (recombinant), or synthesized using known protein synthesis methods.

[0426] In one embodiment, the protein is produced by recombinant DNA techniques. For example, a nucleic acid molecule encoding the receptor polypeptide is cloned into an expression vector, the expression vector introduced into a host cell and the protein expressed in the host cell. The protein can then be isolated from the cells by an appropriate purification scheme using standard protein purification techniques.

[0427] Polypeptides often contain amino acids other than the 20 amino acids commonly referred to as the 20 naturally-occurring amino acids. Further, many amino acids, including the terminal amino acids, may be modified by natural processes, such as processing and other post-translational modifications, or by chemical modification techniques well known in the art. Common modifications that occur naturally in polypeptides are described in basic texts, detailed monographs, and the research literature, and they are well known to those of skill in the art. Accordingly, the polypeptides also encompass derivatives or analogs in which a substituted amino acid residue is not one encoded by the genetic code, in which a substituent group is included, in which the mature polypeptide is fused with another compound, such as a compound to increase the half-life of the polypeptide (for example, polyethylene glycol), or in which the additional amino acids are fused to the mature polypeptide, such as a leader or secretory sequence or a sequence for purification of the mature polypeptide or a pro-protein sequence.

[0428] Known modifications include, but are not limited to, acetylation, acylation, ADP-ribosylation, amidation, covalent attachment of flavin, covalent attachment of a heme moiety, covalent attachment of a nucleotide or nucleotide derivative, covalent attachment of a lipid or lipid derivative, covalent attachment of phosphotidylinositol, cross-linking, cyclization, disulfide bond formation, demethylation, formation of covalent crosslinks, formation of cystine, formation of pyroglutamate, formylation, gamma carboxylation, glycosylation, GPI anchor formation, hydroxylation, iodination, methylation, myristoylation, oxidation, proteolytic processing, phosphorylation, prenylation, racemization, selenoylation, sulfation, transfer-RNA mediated addition of amino acids to proteins such as arginylation, and ubiquitination.

[0429] Such modifications are well-known to those of skill in the art and have been described in great detail in the scientific literature. Several particularly common modifications, glycosylation, lipid attachment, sulfation, gamma-carboxylation of glutamic acid residues, hydroxylation and ADP-ribosylation, for instance, are described in most basic texts, such as Proteins—Structure and Molecular Properties, 2nd Ed., T. E. Creighton, W. H. Freeman and Company, New York (1993). Many detailed reviews are available on this subject, such as by Wold, F., Posttranslational Covalent Modification of Proteins, B. C. Johnson, Ed., Academic Press, New York 1-12 (1983); Seifter et al. (Meth. Enzymol 182: 626-646 (1990)) and Rattan et al. (Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 663:48-62 (1992)).

[0430] As is also well known, polypeptides are not always entirely linear. For instance, polypeptides may be branched as a result of ubiquitination, and they may be circular, with or without branching, generally as a result of post-translation events, including natural processing event and events brought about by human manipulation which do not occur naturally. Circular, branched and branched circular polypeptides may be synthesized by non-translational natural processes and by synthetic methods.

[0431] Modifications can occur anywhere in a polypeptide, including the peptide backbone, the amino acid side-chains and the amino or carboxyl termini. Blockage of the amino or carboxyl group in a polypeptide, or both, by a covalent modification, is common in naturally-occurring and synthetic polypeptides. For instance, the amino terminal residue of polypeptides made in E. coli, prior to proteolytic processing, almost invariably will be N-formylmethionine.

[0432] The modifications can be a function of how the protein is made. For recombinant polypeptides, for example, the modifications will be determined by the host cell posttranslational modification capacity and the modification signals in the polypeptide amino acid sequence. Accordingly, when glycosylation is desired, a polypeptide should be expressed in a glycosylating host, generally a eukaryotic cell. Insect cells often carry out the same posttranslational glycosylations as mammalian cells and, for this reason, insect cell expression systems have been developed to efficiently express mammalian proteins having native patterns of glycosylation. Similar considerations apply to other modifications.

[0433] The same type of modification may be present in the same or varying degree at several sites in a given polypeptide. Also, a given polypeptide may contain more than one type of modification.

[0434] Polypeptide Uses

[0435] The receptor polypeptides are useful for producing antibodies specific for the 14926 receptor protein, regions, or fragments. Regions having a high antigenicity index score are shown in FIG. 13.

[0436] The receptor polypeptides (including those variants and fragments which may have been disclosed prior to the present invention) are useful for biological assays related to GPCRs. Such assays involve any of the known GPCR functions or activities or properties useful for diagnosis and treatment of GPCR-related conditions.

[0437] The receptor polypeptides are useful in drug screening assays, in cell-based or cell-free systems. Cell-based systems can be native, i.e., cells that normally express the receptor protein, as a biopsy or expanded in cell culture. In one embodiment, however, cell-based assays involve recombinant host cells expressing the receptor protein.

[0438] The receptor polypeptides can be used to identify compounds that modulate receptor activity. Both 14926 protein and appropriate variants and fragments can be used in high-throughput screens to assay candidate compounds for the ability to bind to the receptor. These compounds can be further screened against a functional receptor to determine the effect of the compound on the receptor activity. Compounds can be identified that activate (agonist) or inactivate (antagonist) the receptor to a desired degree.

[0439] The receptor polypeptides can be used to screen a compound for the ability to stimulate or inhibit interaction between the receptor protein and a target molecule that normally interacts with the receptor protein. The target can be ligand or a component of the signal pathway with which the receptor protein normally interacts (for example, a G-protein or other interactor involved in cAMP or phosphatidylinositol turnover and/or adenylate cyclase, or phospholipase C activation). The assay includes the steps of combining the receptor protein with a candidate compound under conditions that allow the receptor protein or fragment to interact with the target molecule, and to detect the formation of a complex between the protein and the target or to detect the biochemical consequence of the interaction with the receptor protein and the target, such as any of the associated effects of signal transduction such as G-protein phosphorylation, cyclic AMP or phosphatidylinositol turnover, and adenylate cyclase or phospholipase C activation.

[0440] Candidate compounds include, for example, 1) peptides such as soluble peptides, including Ig-tailed fusion peptides and members of random peptide libraries (see, e.g., Lam et al., Nature 354:82-84 (1991); Houghten et al., Nature 354:84-86 (1991)) and combinatorial chemistry-derived molecular libraries made of D- and/or L-configuration amino acids; 2) phosphopeptides (e.g., members of random and partially degenerate, directed phosphopeptide libraries, see, e.g., Songyang et al., Cell 72:767-778 (1993)); 3) antibodies (e.g., polyclonal, monoclonal, humanized, anti-idiotypic, chimeric, and single chain antibodies as well as Fab, F(ab′)2, Fab expression library fragments, and epitope-binding fragments of antibodies); and 4) small organic and inorganic molecules (e.g., molecules obtained from combinatorial and natural product libraries).

[0441] One candidate compound is a soluble full-length receptor or fragment that competes for ligand binding. Other candidate compounds include mutant receptors or appropriate fragments containing mutations that affect receptor function and thus compete for ligand. Accordingly, a fragment that competes for ligand, for example with a higher affinity, or a fragment that binds ligand but does not allow release, is encompassed by the invention.

[0442] The invention provides other end points to identify compounds that modulate (stimulate or inhibit) receptor activity. The assays typically involve an assay of events in the signal transduction pathway that indicate receptor activity. Thus, the expression of genes that are up- or down-regulated in response to the receptor protein dependent signal cascade can be assayed. In one embodiment, the regulatory region of such genes can be operably linked to a marker that is easily detectable, such as luciferase. Alternatively, phosphorylation of the receptor protein, or a receptor protein target, could also be measured.

[0443] Binding and/or activating compounds can also be screened by using chimeric receptor proteins in which the amino terminal extracellular domain, or parts thereof, the entire transmembrane domain or subregions, such as any of the seven transmembrane segments or any of the intracellular or extracellular loops and the carboxy terminal intracellular domain, or parts thereof, can be replaced by heterologous domains or subregions. For example, a G-protein-binding region can be used that interacts with a different G-protein then that which is recognized by the native receptor. Accordingly, a different set of signal transduction components is available as an end-point assay for activation. Alternatively, the entire transmembrane portion or subregions (such as transmembrane segments or intracellular or extracellular loops) can be replaced with the entire transmembrane portion or subregions specific to a host cell that is different from the host cell from which the amino terminal extracellular domain and/or the G-protein-binding region are derived. This allows for assays to be performed in other than the specific host cell from which the receptor is derived. Alternatively, the amino terminal extracellular domain (and/or other ligand-binding regions) could be replaced by a domain (and/or other binding region) binding a different ligand, thus, providing an assay for test compounds that interact with the heterologous amino terminal extracellular domain (or region) but still cause signal transduction. Finally, activation can be detected by a reporter gene containing an easily detectable coding region operably linked to a transcriptional regulatory sequence that is part of the native signal transduction pathway.

[0444] The receptor polypeptides are also useful in competition binding assays in methods designed to discover compounds that interact with the receptor. Thus, a compound is exposed to a receptor polypeptide under conditions that allow the compound to bind or to otherwise interact with the polypeptide. Soluble receptor polypeptide is also added to the mixture. If the test compound interacts with the soluble receptor polypeptide, it decreases the amount of complex formed or activity from the receptor target. This type of assay is particularly useful in cases in which compounds are sought that interact with specific regions of the receptor. Thus, the soluble polypeptide that competes with the target receptor region is designed to contain peptide sequences corresponding to the region of interest.

[0445] To perform cell free drug screening assays, it is desirable to immobilize either the receptor protein, or fragment, or its target molecule to facilitate separation of complexes from uncomplexed forms of one or both of the proteins, as well as to accommodate automation of the assay.

[0446] Techniques for immobilizing proteins on matrices can be used in the drug screening assays. In one embodiment, a fusion protein can be provided which adds a domain that allows the protein to be bound to a matrix. For example, glutathione-S-transferase/14926 fusion proteins can be adsorbed onto glutathione sepharose beads (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, Mo.) or glutathione derivatized microtitre plates, which are then combined with the cell lysates (e.g., 35S-labeled) and the candidate compound, and the mixture incubated under conditions conducive to complex formation (e.g., at physiological conditions for salt and pH). Following incubation, the beads are washed to remove any unbound label, and the matrix immobilized and radiolabel determined directly, or in the supernatant after the complexes are dissociated. Alternatively, the complexes can be dissociated from the matrix, separated by SDS-PAGE, and the level of receptor-binding protein found in the bead fraction quantitated from the gel using standard electrophoretic techniques. For example, either the polypeptide or its target molecule can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin using techniques well known in the art. Alternatively, antibodies reactive with the protein but which do not interfere with binding of the protein to its target molecule can be derivatized to the wells of the plate, and the protein trapped in the wells by antibody conjugation. Preparations of a receptor-binding protein and a candidate compound are incubated in the receptor protein-presenting wells and the amount of complex trapped in the well can be quantitated. Methods for detecting such complexes, in addition to those described above for the GST-immobilized complexes, include immunodetection of complexes using antibodies reactive with the receptor protein target molecule, or which are reactive with receptor protein and compete with the target molecule; as well as enzyme-linked assays which rely on detecting an enzymatic activity associated with the target molecule.

[0447] Modulators of receptor protein activity identified according to these drug screening assays can be used to treat a subject with a disorder mediated by the receptor pathway, by treating cells that express the 14926 protein, such as in brain, spleen, lung, skeletal muscle, kidney, liver, and heart.

[0448] Disorders involving the spleen include, but are not limited to, splenomegaly, including nonspecific acute splenitis, congestive spenomegaly, and spenic infarcts; neoplasms, congenital anomalies, and rupture. Disorders associated with splenomegaly include infections, such as nonspecific splenitis, infectious mononucleosis, tuberculosis, typhoid fever, brucellosis, cytomegalovirus, syphilis, malaria, histoplasmosis, toxoplasmosis, kala-azar, trypanosomiasis, schistosomiasis, leishmaniasis, and echinococcosis; congestive states related to partial hypertension, such as cirrhosis of the liver, portal or splenic vein thrombosis, and cardiac failure; lymphohematogenous disorders, such as Hodgkin disease, non-Hodgkin lymphomas/leukemia, multiple myeloma, myeloproliferative disorders, hemolytic anemias, and thrombocytopenic purpura; immunologic-inflammatory conditions, such as rheumatoid arthritis and systemic lupus erythematosus; storage diseases such as Gaucher disease, Niemann-Pick disease, and mucopolysaccharidoses; and other conditions, such as amyloidosis, primary neoplasms and cysts, and secondary neoplasms.

[0449] Disorders involving the lung include, but are not limited to, congenital anomalies; atelectasis; diseases of vascular origin, such as pulmonary congestion and edema, including hemodynamic pulmonary edema and edema caused by microvascular injury, adult respiratory distress syndrome (diffuse alveolar damage), pulmonary embolism, hemorrhage, and infarction, and pulmonary hypertension and vascular sclerosis; chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, such as emphysema, chronic bronchitis, bronchial asthma, and bronchiectasis; diffuse interstitial (infiltrative, restrictive) diseases, such as pneumoconioses, sarcoidosis, idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis, desquamative interstitial pneumonitis, hypersensitivity pneumonitis, pulmonary eosinophilia (pulmonary infiltration with eosinophilia), Bronchiolitis obliterans-organizing pneumonia, diffuse pulmonary hemorrhage syndromes, including Goodpasture syndrome, idiopathic pulmonary hemosiderosis and other hemorrhagic syndromes, pulmonary involvement in collagen vascular disorders, and pulmonary alveolar proteinosis; complications of therapies, such as drug-induced lung disease, radiation-induced lung disease, and lung transplantation; tumors, such as bronchogenic carcinoma, including paraneoplastic syndromes, bronchioloalveolar carcinoma, neuroendocrine tumors, such as bronchial carcinoid, miscellaneous tumors, and metastatic tumors; pathologies of the pleura, including inflammatory pleural effusions, noninflammatory pleural effusions, pneumothorax, and pleural tumors, including solitary fibrous tumors (pleural fibroma) and malignant mesothelioma.

[0450] Disorders involving the liver include, but are not limited to, hepatic injury; jaundice and cholestasis, such as bilirubin and bile formation; hepatic failure and cirrhosis, such as cirrhosis, portal hypertension, including ascites, portosystemic shunts, and splenomegaly; infectious disorders, such as viral hepatitis, including hepatitis A-E infection and infection by other hepatitis viruses, clinicopathologic syndromes, such as the carrier state, asymptomatic infection, acute viral hepatitis, chronic viral hepatitis, and fulminant hepatitis; autoimmune hepatitis; drug- and toxin-induced liver disease, such as alcoholic liver disease; inborn errors of metabolism and pediatric liver disease, such as hemochromatosis, Wilson disease, a1-antitrypsin deficiency, and neonatal hepatitis; intrahepatic biliary tract disease, such as secondary biliary cirrhosis, primary biliary cirrhosis, primary sclerosing cholangitis, and anomalies of the biliary tree; circulatory disorders, such as impaired blood flow into the liver, including hepatic artery compromise and portal vein obstruction and thrombosis, impaired blood flow through the liver, including passive congestion and centrilobular necrosis and peliosis hepatis, hepatic vein outflow obstruction, including hepatic vein thrombosis (Budd-Chiari syndrome) and veno-occlusive disease; hepatic disease associated with pregnancy, such as preeclampsia and eclampsia, acute fatty liver of pregnancy, and intrehepatic cholestasis of pregnancy; hepatic complications of organ or bone marrow transplantation, such as drug toxicity after bone marrow transplantation, graft-versus-host disease and liver rejection, and nonimmunologic damage to liver allografts; tumors and tumorous conditions, such as nodular hyperplasias, adenomas, and malignant tumors, including primary carcinoma of the liver and metastatic tumors.

[0451] Disorders involving the brain include, but are limited to, disorders involving neurons, and disorders involving glia, such as astrocytes, oligodendrocytes, ependymal cells, and microglia; cerebral edema, raised intracranial pressure and herniation, and hydrocephalus; malformations and developmental diseases, such as neural tube defects, forebrain anomalies, posterior fossa anomalies, and syringomyelia and hydromyelia; perinatal brain injury; cerebrovascular diseases, such as those related to hypoxia, ischemia, and infarction, including hypotension, hypoperfusion, and low-flow states—global cerebral ischemia and focal cerebral ischemia—infarction from obstruction of local blood supply, intracranial hemorrhage, including intracerebral (intraparenchymal) hemorrhage, subarachnoid hemorrhage and ruptured berry aneurysms, and vascular malformations, hypertensive cerebrovascular disease, including lacunar infarcts, slit hemorrhages, and hypertensive encephalopathy; infections, such as acute meningitis, including acute pyogenic (bacterial) meningitis and acute aseptic (viral) meningitis, acute focal suppurative infections, including brain abscess, subdural empyema, and extradural abscess, chronic bacterial meningoencephalitis, including tuberculosis and mycobacterioses, neurosyphilis, and neuroborreliosis (Lyme disease), viral meningoencephalitis, including arthropod-borue (Arbo) viral encephalitis, Herpes simplex virus Type 1, Herpes simplex virus Type 2, Varicalla-zoster virus (Herpes zoster), cytomegalovirus, poliomyelitis, rabies, and human immunodeficiency virus 1, including HIV-1 meningoencephalitis (subacute encephalitis), vacuolar myelopathy, AIDS-associated myopathy, peripheral neuropathy, and AIDS in children, progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy, subacute sclerosing panencephalitis, fungal meningoencephalitis, other infectious diseases of the nervous system; transmissible spongiform encephalopathies (prion diseases); demyelinating diseases, including multiple sclerosis, multiple sclerosis variants, acute disseminated encephalomyelitis and acute necrotizing hemorrhagic encephalomyelitis, and other diseases with demyelination; degenerative diseases, such as degenerative diseases affecting the cerebral cortex, including Alzheimer disease and Pick disease, degenerative diseases of basal ganglia and brain stem, including Parkinsonism, idiopathic Parkinson disease (paralysis agitans), progressive supranuclear palsy, corticobasal degenration, multiple system atrophy, including striatonigral degenration, Shy-Drager syndrome, and olivopontocerebellar atrophy, and Huntington disease; spinocerebellar degenerations, including spinocerebellar ataxias, including Friedreich ataxia, and ataxia-telanglectasia, degenerative diseases affecting motor neurons, including amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (motor neuron disease), bulbospinal atrophy (Kennedy syndrome), and spinal muscular atrophy; inborn errors of metabolism, such as leukodystrophies, including Krabbe disease, metachromatic leukodystrophy, adrenoleukodystrophy, Pelizaeus-Merzbacher disease, and Canavan disease, mitochondrial encephalomyopathies, including Leigh disease and other mitochondrial encephalomyopathies; toxic and acquired metabolic diseases, including vitamin deficiencies such as thiamine (vitamin B1) deficiency and vitamin B12 deficiency, neurologic sequelae of metabolic disturbances, including hypoglycemia, hyperglycemia, and hepatic encephatopathy, toxic disorders, including carbon monoxide, methanol, ethanol, and radiation, including combined methotrexate and radiation-induced injury; tumors, such as gliomas, including astrocytoma, including fibrillary (diffuse) astrocytoma and glioblastoma multiforme, pilocytic astrocytoma, pleomorphic xanthoastrocytoma, and brain stem glioma, oligodendroglioma, and ependymoma and related paraventricular mass lesions, neuronal tumors, poorly differentiated neoplasms, including medulloblastoma, other parenchymal tumors, including primary brain lymphoma, germ cell tumors, and pineal parenchymal tumors, meningiomas, metastatic tumors, paraneoplastic syndromes, peripheral nerve sheath tumors, including schwannoma, neurofibroma, and malignant peripheral nerve sheath tumor (malignant schwannoma), and neurocutaneous syndromes (phakomatoses), including neurofibromotosis, including Type 1 neurofibromatosis (NF1) and TYPE 2 neurofibromatosis (NF2), tuberous sclerosis, and Von Hippel-Lindau disease.

[0452] Disorders involving the heart, include but are not limited to, heart failure, including but not limited to, cardiac hypertrophy, left-sided heart failure, and right-sided heart failure; ischemic heart disease, including but not limited to angina pectoris, myocardial infarction, chronic ischemic heart disease, and sudden cardiac death; hypertensive heart disease, including but not limited to, systemic (left-sided) hypertensive heart disease and pulmonary (right-sided) hypertensive heart disease; valvular heart disease, including but not limited to, valvular degeneration caused by calcification, such as calcific aortic stenosis, calcification of a congenitally bicuspid aortic valve, and mitral annular calcification, and myxomatous degeneration of the mitral valve (mitral valve prolapse), rheumatic fever and rheumatic heart disease, infective endocarditis, and noninfected vegetations, such as nonbacterial thrombotic endocarditis and endocarditis of systemic lupus erythematosus (Libman-Sacks disease), carcinoid heart disease, and complications of artificial valves; myocardial disease, including but not limited to dilated cardiomyopathy, hypertrophic cardiomyopathy, restrictive cardiomyopathy, and myocarditis; pericardial disease, including but not limited to, pericardial effusion and hemopericardium and pericarditis, including acute pericarditis and healed pericarditis, and rheumatoid heart disease; neoplastic heart disease, including but not limited to, primary cardiac tumors, such as myxoma, lipoma, papillary fibroelastoma, rhabdomyoma, and sarcoma, and cardiac effects of noncardiac neoplasms; congenital heart disease, including but not limited to, left-to-right shunts—late cyanosis, such as atrial septal defect, ventricular septal defect, patent ductus arteriosus, and atrioventricular septal defect, right-to-left shunts—early cyanosis, such as tetralogy of fallot, transposition of great arteries, truncus arteriosus, tricuspid atresia, and total anomalous pulmonary venous connection, obstructive congenital anomalies, such as coarctation of aorta, pulmonary stenosis and atresia, and aortic stenosis and atresia, and disorders involving cardiac transplantation.

[0453] Disorders involving the kidney include, but are not limited to, congenital anomalies including, but not limited to, cystic diseases of the kidney, that include but are not limited to, cystic renal dysplasia, autosomal dominant (adult) polycystic kidney disease, autosomal recessive (childhood) polycystic kidney disease, and cystic diseases of renal medulla, which include, but are not limited to, medullary sponge kidney, and nephronophthisis-uremic medullary cystic disease complex, acquired (dialysis-associated) cystic disease, such as simple cysts; glomermlar diseases including pathologies of glomerular injury that include, but are not limited to, in situ immune complex deposition, that includes, but is not limited to, anti-GBM nephritis, Heymann nephritis, and antibodies against planted antigens, circulating immune complex nephritis, antibodies to glomerular cells, cell-mediated immunity in glomerulonephritis, activation of alternative complement pathway, epithelial cell injury, and pathologies involving mediators of glomerular injury including cellular and soluble mediators, acute glomerulonephritis, such as acute proliferative (poststreptococcal, postinfectious) glomerulonephritis, including but not limited to, poststreptococcal glomerulonephritis and nonstreptococcal acute glomerulonephritis, rapidly progressive (crescentic) glomerulonephritis, nephrotic syndrome, membranous glomerulonephritis (membranous nephropathy), minimal change disease (lipoid nephrosis), focal segmental glomerulosclerosis, membranoproliferative glomerulonephritis, IgA nephropathy (Berger disease), focal proliferative and necrotizing glomerulonephritis (focal glomerulonephritis), hereditary nephritis, including but not limited to, Alport syndrome and thin membrane disease (benign familial hematuria), chronic glomerulonephritis, glomerular lesions associated with systemic disease, including but not limited to, systemic lupus erythematosus, Henoch-Schonlein purpura, bacterial endocarditis, diabetic glomerulosclerosis, amyloidosis, fibrillary and immunotactoid glomerulonephritis, and other systemic disorders; diseases affecting tubules and interstitium, including acute tubular necrosis and tubulointerstitial nephritis, including but not limited to, pyelonephritis and urinary tract infection, acute pyelonephritis, chronic pyelonephritis and reflux nephropathy, and tubulointerstitial nephritis induced by drugs and toxins, including but not limited to, acute drug-induced interstitial nephritis, analgesic abuse nephropathy, nephropathy associated with nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs, and other tubulointerstitial diseases including, but not limited to, urate nephropathy, hypercalcemia and nephrocalcinosis, and multiple myeloma; diseases of blood vessels including benign nephrosclerosis, malignant hypertension and accelerated nephrosclerosis, renal artery stenosis, and thrombotic microangiopathies including, but not limited to, classic (childhood) hemolytic-uremic syndrome, adult hemolytic-uremic syndrome/thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura, idiopathic HUS/TTP, and other vascular disorders including, but not limited to, atherosclerotic ischemic renal disease, atheroembolic renal disease, sickle cell disease nephropathy, diffuse cortical necrosis, and renal infarcts; urinary tract obstruction (obstructive uropathy); urolithiasis (renal calculi, stones); and tumors of the kidney including, but not limited to, benign tumors, such as renal papillary adenoma, renal fibroma or hamartoma (renomedullary interstitial cell tumor), angiomyolipoma, and oncocytoma, and malignant tumors, including renal cell carcinoma (hyperuephroma, adenocarcinoma of kidney), which includes urothelial carcinomas of renal pelvis.

[0454] Disorders involving the skeletal muscle include tumors such as rhabdomyosarcoma.

[0455] These methods of treatment include the steps of administering the modulators of protein activity in a pharmaceutical composition as described herein, to a subject in need of such treatment.

[0456] Expression in specific cell lines suggest that the receptor is involved in cellular growth and proliferation as well as in inflammation. Accordingly, disorders that are specifically relevant include those related to dysfunctional growth and proliferation, such as hyperplasia, especially tumor growth, and to the treatment of inflammatory conditions. Preferred disorders include those involving the brain.

[0457] The receptor polypeptides also are useful to provide a target for diagnosing a disease or predisposition to disease mediated by the receptor protein, especially in the disorders and tissues discussed above, relevant to treatment. Accordingly, methods are provided for detecting the presence, or levels of, the receptor protein in a cell, tissue, or organism. The method involves contacting a biological sample with a compound capable of interacting with the receptor protein such that the interaction can be detected.

[0458] One agent for detecting receptor protein is an antibody capable of selectively binding to receptor protein. A biological sample includes tissues, cells and biological fluids isolated from a subject, as well as tissues, cells and fluids present within a subject.

[0459] The receptor protein also provides a target for diagnosing active disease, or predisposition to disease, in a patient having a variant receptor protein. Thus, receptor protein can be isolated from a biological sample, assayed for the presence of a genetic mutation that results in aberrant receptor protein. This includes amino acid substitution, deletion, insertion, rearrangement, (as the result of aberrant splicing events), and inappropriate post-translational modification. Analytic methods include altered electrophoretic mobility, altered tryptic peptide digest, altered receptor activity in cell-based or cell-free assay, alteration in ligand or antibody-binding pattern, altered isoelectric point, direct amino acid sequencing, and any other of the known assay techniques useful for detecting mutations in a protein.

[0460] In vitro techniques for detection of receptor protein include enzyme linked immunosorbent assays (ELISAs), Western blots, immunoprecipitations and immunofluorescence. Alternatively, the protein can be detected in vivo in a subject by introducing into the subject a labeled anti-receptor antibody. For example, the antibody can be labeled with a radioactive marker whose presence and location in a subject can be detected by standard imaging techniques. Particularly useful are methods which detect the allelic variant of a receptor protein expressed in a subject and methods which detect fragments of a receptor protein in a sample.

[0461] The receptor polypeptides are also useful in pharmacogenomic analysis. Pharmacogenomics deal with clinically significant hereditary variations in the response to drugs due to altered drug disposition and abnormal action in affected persons. See, e.g., Eichelbaum, M., Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Physiol. 23(10-11):983-985 (1996), and Linder, M. W., Clin. Chem. 43(2):254-266 (1997). The clinical outcomes of these variations result in severe toxicity of therapeutic drugs in certain individuals or therapeutic failure of drugs in certain individuals as a result of individual variation in metabolism. Thus, the genotype of the individual can determine the way a therapeutic compound acts on the body or the way the body metabolizes the compound. Further, the activity of drug metabolizing enzymes effects both the intensity and duration of drug action. Thus, the pharmacogenomics of the individual permit the selection of effective compounds and effective dosages of such compounds for prophylactic or therapeutic treatment based on the individual's genotype. The discovery of genetic polymorphisms in some drug metabolizing enzymes has explained why some patients do not obtain the expected drug effects, show an exaggerated drug effect, or experience serious toxicity from standard drug dosages. Polymorphisms can be expressed in the phenotype of the extensive metabolizer and the phenotype of the poor metabolizer. Accordingly, genetic polymorphism may lead to allelic protein variants of the receptor protein in which one or more of the receptor functions in one population is different from those in another population. The polypeptides thus allow a target to ascertain a genetic predisposition that can affect treatment modality. Thus, in a ligand-based treatment, polymorphism may give rise to amino terminal extracellular domains and/or other ligand-binding regions that are more or less active in ligand binding, and receptor activation. Accordingly, ligand dosage would necessarily be modified to maximize the therapeutic effect within a given population containing a polymorphism. As an alternative to genotyping, specific polymorphic polypeptides could be identified.

[0462] The receptor polypeptides are also useful for monitoring therapeutic effects during clinical trials and other treatment. Thus, the therapeutic effectiveness of an agent that is designed to increase or decrease gene expression, protein levels or receptor activity can be monitored over the course of treatment using the receptor polypeptides as an end-point target.

[0463] The receptor polypeptides are also useful for treating a receptor-associated disorder. Accordingly, methods for treatment include the use of soluble receptor or fragments of the receptor protein that compete for ligand binding. These receptors or fragments can have a higher affinity for the ligand so as to provide effective competition.

[0464] Antibodies

[0465] The invention also provides antibodies that selectively bind to the 14926 receptor protein and its variants and fragments. An antibody is considered to selectively bind, even if it also binds to other proteins that are not substantially homologous with the receptor protein. These other proteins share homology with a fragment or domain of the receptor protein. This conservation in specific regions gives rise to antibodies that bind to both proteins by virtue of the homologous sequence. In this case, it would be understood that antibody binding to the receptor protein is still selective.

[0466] To generate antibodies, an isolated receptor polypeptide is used as an immunogen to generate antibodies using standard techniques for polyclonal and monoclonal antibody preparation. Either the full-length protein or antigenic peptide fragment can be used. Regions having a high antigenicity index are shown in FIG. 13. Antibodies are preferably prepared from these regions or from discrete fragments in these regions. However, antibodies can be prepared from any region of the peptide as described herein. A preferred fragment produces an antibody that diminishes or completely prevents ligand-binding. Antibodies can be developed against the entire receptor or portions of the receptor, for example, the intracellular carboxy terminal domain, the amino terminal extracellular domain, the entire transmembrane domain or specific segments, any of the intra or extracellular loops, or any portions of the above. Antibodies may also be developed against specific functional sites, such as the site of ligand-binding, the site of G protein coupling, or sites that are phosphorylated, glycosylated, or myristoylated.

[0467] An antigenic fragment will typically comprise at least 7-12 contiguous amino acid residues. The antigenic peptide can comprise, however, at least 14 amino acid residues, at least 15 amino acid residues, at least 20 amino acid residues, or at least 30 amino acid residues. In one embodiment, fragments correspond to regions that are located on the surface of the protein, e.g., hydrophilic regions. These fragments are not to be construed, however, as encompassing any fragments which may be disclosed prior to the invention.

[0468] Antibodies can be polyclonal or monoclonal. An intact antibody, or a fragment thereof (e.g. Fab or F(ab′)2) can be used.

[0469] Detection can be facilitated by coupling (i.e., physically linking) the antibody to a detectable substance. Examples of detectable substances include various enzymes, prosthetic groups, fluorescent materials, luminescent materials, bioluminescent materials, and radioactive materials. Examples of suitable enzymes include horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, β-galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase; examples of suitable prosthetic group complexes include streptavidin/biotin and avidinibiotin; examples of suitable fluorescent materials include umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride or phycoerythrin; an example of a luminescent material includes luminol; examples of bioluminescent materials include luciferase, luciferin, and aequorin, and examples of suitable radioactive material include 125I, 131I, 35S or 3H.

[0470] An appropriate immunogenic preparation can be derived from native, recombinantly expressed, protein or chemically synthesized peptides.

[0471] Antibody Uses

[0472] The antibodies can be used to isolate a receptor protein by standard techniques, such as affinity chromatography or immunoprecipitation. The antibodies can facilitate the purification of the natural receptor protein from cells and recombinantly produced receptor protein expressed in host cells.

[0473] The antibodies are useful to detect the presence of receptor protein in cells or tissues to determine the pattern of expression of the receptor among various tissues in an organism and over the course of normal development.

[0474] The antibodies can be used to detect receptor protein in situ, in vitro, or in a cell lysate or supernatant in order to evaluate the abundance and pattern of expression.

[0475] The antibodies can be used to assess abnormal tissue distribution or abnormal expression during development.

[0476] Antibody detection of circulating fragments of the full-length receptor protein can be used to identify receptor turnover.

[0477] Further, the antibodies can be used to assess receptor expression in disease states such as in active stages of the disease or in an individual with a predisposition toward disease related to receptor function. When a disorder is caused by an inappropriate tissue distribution, developmental expression, or level of expression of the receptor protein, the antibody can be prepared against the normal receptor protein. If a disorder is characterized by a specific mutation in the receptor protein, antibodies specific for this mutant protein can be used to assay for the presence of the specific mutant receptor protein.

[0478] The antibodies can also be used to assess normal and aberrant subcellular localization of cells in the various tissues in an organism. Antibodies can be developed against the whole receptor or portions of the receptor, for example, portions of the amino terminal extracellular domain or extracellular loops.

[0479] The diagnostic uses can be applied, not only in genetic testing, but also in monitoring a treatment modality. Accordingly, where treatment is ultimately aimed at correcting receptor expression level or the presence of aberrant receptors and aberrant tissue distribution or developmental expression, antibodies directed against the receptor or relevant fragments can be used to monitor therapeutic efficacy.

[0480] Additionally, antibodies are useful in pharmacogenomic analysis. Thus, antibodies prepared against polymorphic receptor proteins can be used to identify individuals that require modified treatment modalities.

[0481] The antibodies are also useful as diagnostic tools as an immunological marker for aberrant receptor protein analyzed by electrophoretic mobility, isoelectric point, tryptic peptide digest, and other physical assays known to those in the art.

[0482] The antibodies are also useful for tissue typing. Thus, where a specific receptor protein has been correlated with expression in a specific tissue, antibodies that are specific for this receptor protein can be used to identify a tissue type.

[0483] The antibodies are also useful in forensic identification. Accordingly, where an individual has been correlated with a specific genetic polymorphism resulting in a specific polymorphic protein, an antibody specific for the polymorphic protein can be used as an aid in identification.

[0484] The antibodies are also useful for inhibiting receptor function, for example, blocking ligand binding.

[0485] These uses can also be applied in a therapeutic context in which treatment involves inhibiting receptor function. An antibody can be used, for example, to block ligand binding. Antibodies can be prepared against specific fragments containing sites required for function or against intact receptor associated with a cell.

[0486] The invention also encompasses kits for using antibodies to detect the presence of a receptor protein in a biological sample. The kit can comprise antibodies such as a labeled or labelable antibody and a compound or agent for detecting receptor protein in a biological sample; means for determining the amount of receptor protein in the sample; and means for comparing the amount of receptor protein in the sample with a standard. The compound or agent can be packaged in a suitable container. The kit can further comprise instructions for using the kit to detect receptor protein.

[0487] Polynucleotides

[0488] The nucleotide sequence in SEQ ID NO: 8 was obtained by sequencing the deposited human fall length cDNA. Accordingly, the sequence of the deposited clone is controlling as to any discrepancies between the two and any reference to the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 8 includes reference to the sequence of the deposited cDNA.

[0489] The specifically disclosed cDNA comprises the coding region and 5′ and 3′ untranslated sequences (SEQ ID NO: 8).

[0490] The human 14926 receptor cDNA is approximately 2818 nucleotides in length and encodes a fall length protein that is approximately 370 amino acid residues in length. The nucleic acid is expressed in brain. Structural analysis of the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 7 is provided in FIG. 13, a hydropathy plot. The figure shows the putative structure of the seven transmembrane segments, the amino terminal extracellular domain and the carboxy terminal intracellular domain.

[0491] As used herein, the term “transmembrane segment” refers to a structural amino acid motif which includes a hydrophobic helix that spans the plasma membrane. The entire transmembrane domain spans from about amino acid 24 to about amino acid 341. Seven segments span the membrane and there are three intracellular and three extracellular loops in this domain.

[0492] The invention provides isolated polynucleotides encoding a 14926 receptor protein. The term “14926 polynucleotide” or “14926 nucleic acid” refers to the sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 8 or in the deposited cDNA. The term “receptor polynucleotide” or “receptor nucleic acid” further includes variants and fragments of the 14926 polynucleotide.

[0493] An “isolated” receptor nucleic acid is one that is separated from other nucleic acid present in the natural source of the receptor nucleic acid. Preferably, an “isolated” nucleic acid is free of sequences which naturally flank the nucleic acid (i.e., sequences located at the 5′ and 3′ ends of the nucleic acid) in the genomic DNA of the organism from which the nucleic acid is derived. However, there can be some flanking nucleotide sequences, for example up to about 5KB. The important point is that the nucleic acid is isolated from flanking sequences such that it can be subjected to the specific manipulations described herein such as recombinant expression, preparation of probes and primers, and other uses specific to the receptor nucleic acid sequences.

[0494] Moreover, an “isolated” nucleic acid molecule, such as a cDNA molecule, can be substantially free of other cellular material, or culture medium when produced by recombinant techniques, or chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized. However, the nucleic acid molecule can be fused to other coding or regulatory sequences and still be considered isolated.

[0495] For example, recombinant DNA molecules contained in a vector are considered isolated. Further examples of isolated DNA molecules include recombinant DNA molecules maintained in heterologous host cells or purified (partially or substantially) DNA molecules in solution. Isolated RNA molecules include in vivo or in vitro RNA transcripts of the isolated DNA molecules of the present invention. Isolated nucleic acid molecules according to the present invention further include such molecules produced synthetically.

[0496] The receptor polynucleotides can encode the mature protein plus additional amino or carboxyl-terminal amino acids, or amino acids interior to the mature polypeptide (when the mature form has more than one polypeptide chain, for instance). Such sequences may play a role in processing of a protein from precursor to a mature form, facilitate protein trafficking, prolong or shorten protein half-life or facilitate manipulation of a protein for assay or production, among other things. As generally is the case in situ, the additional amino acids may be processed away from the mature protein by cellular enzymes.

[0497] The receptor polynucleotides include, but are not limited to, the sequence encoding the mature polypeptide alone, the sequence encoding the mature polypeptide and additional coding sequences, such as a leader or secretory sequence (e.g., a pre-pro or pro-protein sequence), the sequence encoding the mature polypeptide, with or without the additional coding sequences, plus additional non-coding sequences, for example introns and non-coding 5′ and 3′ sequences such as transcribed but non-translated sequences that play a role in transcription, mRNA processing (including splicing and polyadenylation signals), ribosome binding and stability of mRNA. In addition, the polynucleotide may be fused to a marker sequence encoding, for example, a peptide that facilitates purification.

[0498] Receptor polynucleotides can be in the form of RNA, such as mRNA, or in the form DNA, including cDNA and genomic DNA obtained by cloning or produced by chemical synthetic techniques or by a combination thereof. The nucleic acid, especially DNA, can be double-stranded or single-stranded. Single-stranded nucleic acid can be the coding strand (sense strand) or the non-coding strand (anti-sense strand).

[0499] One receptor nucleic acid comprises the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 8, corresponding to human brain cDNA.

[0500] In one embodiment, the receptor nucleic acid comprises only the coding region.

[0501] The invention further provides variant receptor polynucleotides, and fragments thereof, that differ from the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 8 due to degeneracy of the genetic code and thus encode the same protein as that encoded by the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 8.

[0502] The invention also provides receptor nucleic acid molecules encoding the variant polypeptides described herein. Such polynucleotides may be naturally occurring, such as allelic variants (same locus), homologs (different locus), and orthologs (different organism), or may be constructed by recombinant DNA methods or by chemical synthesis. Such non-naturally occurring variants may be made by mutagenesis techniques, including those applied to polynucleotides, cells, or organisms. Accordingly, as discussed above, the variants can contain nucleotide substitutions, deletions, inversions and insertions.

[0503] Variation can occur in either or both the coding and non-coding regions. The variations can produce both conservative and non-conservative amino acid substitutions.

[0504] Orthologs, homologs, and allelic variants can be identified using methods well known in the art. These variants comprise a nucleotide sequence encoding a receptor that is at least about 55-60%, 60-65%, 65-70%, typically at least about 70-75%, more typically at least about 80-85%, and most typically at least about 90-95% or more homologous to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 8 or a fragment of this sequence. Such nucleic acid molecules can readily be identified as being able to hybridize under stringent conditions, to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 8 or a fragment of the sequence. It is understood that stringent hybridization does not indicate substantial homology where it is due to general homology, such as poly A sequences, or sequences common to all or most proteins, all GPCRs, or all family I GPCRs. Moreover, it is understood that variants do not include any of the nucleic acid sequences that may have been disclosed prior to the invention.

[0505] As used herein, the term “hybridizes under stringent conditions” is intended to describe conditions for hybridization and washing under which nucleotide sequences encoding a receptor at least 55-60% homologous to each other typically remain hybridized to each other. The conditions can be such that sequences at least about 65%, at least about 70%, or at least about 75% or more homologous to each other typically remain hybridized to each other. Such stringent conditions are known to those skilled in the art and can be found in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, N.Y. (1989), 6.3.1-6.3.6. One example of stringent hybridization conditions are hybridization in 6×sodium chloride/sodium citrate (SSC) at about 45° C., followed by one or more washes in 0.2×SSC, 0.1% SDS at 50-65° C. In one embodiment, an isolated receptor nucleic acid molecule that hybridizes under stringent conditions to the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 8 corresponds to a naturally-occurring nucleic acid molecule. As used herein, a “naturally-occurring” nucleic acid molecule refers to an RNA or DNA molecule having a nucleotide sequence that occurs in nature (e.g., encodes a natural protein).

[0506] Furthermore, the invention provides polynucleotides that comprise a fragment of the full-length receptor polynucleotides. The fragment can be single or double stranded and can comprise DNA or RNA. The fragment can be derived from either the coding or the non-coding sequence.

[0507] In one embodiment, an isolated receptor nucleic acid is at least 404 nucleotides in length and hybridizes under stringent conditions to the nucleic acid molecule comprising the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO: 8. In another embodiment an isolated receptor nucleic acid encodes the entire coding region from amino acid 1 to amino acid 370. In another embodiment the isolated receptor nucleic acid encodes a sequence corresponding to the mature protein from about amino acid 6 to amino acid 370. Fragments further include nucleic acid sequences encoding a portion of the amino acid sequence described herein and further including flanking nucleotide sequences at the 3′ region. Other fragments include nucleotide sequences encoding the amino acid fragments described herein. Receptor nucleic acid fragments also include a fragment from nucleotide 1 to around nucleotide 43 and subfragments thereof; from about 1321 to about 1391 and subfragments thereof greater than 15 nucleotides; about 1391 to about 1526 and subfragments thereof; about 1527 to about 1565 and subfragments thereof greater than 14 nucleotides; about 1566 to about 1712 and subfragments thereof; and about 1800 to 2818 and subfragments thereof. In these embodiments, the nucleic acid can be at least 17, 20, 30, 40, 50, 100, 250, or 500 nucleotides in length or greater. Nucleic acid fragments, according to the present invention, are not to be construed as encompassing those fragments that may have been disclosed prior to the invention.

[0508] Receptor nucleic acid fragments further include sequences corresponding to the domains described herein, subregions also described, and specific functional sites. Receptor nucleic acid fragments include nucleic acid molecules encoding a polypeptide comprising the amino terminal extracellular domain including amino acid residues from 1 to about 23, a polypeptide comprising the region spanning the transmembrane domain (amino acid residues from about 24 to about 341), a polypeptide comprising the carboxy terminal intracellular domain (amino acid residues from about 342 to about 370), and a polypeptide encoding the G-protein receptor signature (118-120 or surrounding amino acid residues from about 109 to about 125), nucleic acid molecules encoding any of the seven transmembrane segments, extracellular or intracellular loops, glycosylation sites, cAMP or cGMP phosphorylation sites, protein kinase C phosphorylation sites and casein kinase II phosphorylation sites, myristoylation sites, and amidation site. Receptor nucleic acid fragments also include combinations of the domains, segments, loops, and other functional sites described above. Thus, for example, a receptor nucleic acid could include sequences corresponding to the amino terminal extracellular domain and one transmembrane fragment. A person of ordinary skill in the art would be aware of the many permutations that are possible. Where the location of the domains have been predicted by computer analysis, one of ordinary skill would appreciate that the amino acid residues constituting these domains can vary depending on the criteria used to define the domains.

[0509] In one embodiment, an isolated receptor nucleic acid is at least 404 nucleotides in length and hybridizes under stringent conditions to the nucleic acid molecule comprising the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO: 8. In other embodiments, the nucleic acid is at least 40, 50, 100, 250 or 500 nucleotides in length.

[0510] However, it is understood that a receptor fragment includes any nucleic acid sequence that does not include the entire gene.

[0511] The invention also provides receptor nucleic acid fragments that encode epitope bearing regions of the receptor proteins described herein.

[0512] The isolated receptor polynucleotide sequences, and especially fragments, are useful as DNA probes and primers.

[0513] For example, the coding region of a receptor gene can be isolated using the known nucleotide sequence to synthesize an oligonucleotide probe. A labeled probe can then be used to screen a cDNA library, genomic DNA library, or mRNA to isolate nucleic acid corresponding to the coding region. Further, primers can be used in PCR reactions to clone specific regions of receptor genes.

[0514] A probe/primer typically comprises substantially purified oligonucleotide. The oligonucleotide typically comprises a region of nucleotide sequence that hybridizes under stringent conditions to at least about 7-12, typically about 25, more typically about 40, 50 or 75 consecutive nucleotides of SEQ ID NO: 8 sense or anti-sense strand or other receptor polynucleotides. A probe further comprises a label, e.g., radioisotope, fluorescent compound, enzyme, or enzyme co-factor.

[0515] Polynucleotide Uses

[0516] The receptor polynucleotides are useful for probes, primers, and in biological assays. Where the polynucleotides are used to assess GPCR properties or functions, such as in the assays described herein, all or less than all of the entire cDNA can be useful. In this case, even fragments that may have been known prior to the invention are encompassed. Thus, for example, assays specifically directed to GPCR functions, such as assessing agonist or antagonist activity, encompass the use of known fragments. Further, diagnostic methods for assessing receptor function can also be practiced with any fragment, including those fragments that may have been known prior to the invention. Similarly, in methods involving treatment of receptor dysfunction, all fragments are encompassed including those which may have been known in the art.

[0517] The receptor polynucleotides are useful as a hybridization probe for cDNA and genomic DNA to isolate a full-length cDNA and genomic clones encoding the polypeptide described in SEQ ID NO: 7 and to isolate cDNA and genomic clones that correspond to variants producing the same polypeptide shown in SEQ ID NO: 7 or the other variants described herein. Variants can be isolated from the same tissue and organism from which the polypeptide shown in SEQ ID NO: 7 was isolated, different tissues from the same organism, or from different organisms. This method is useful for isolating genes and cDNA that are developmentally-controlled and therefore may be expressed in the same tissue or different tissues at different points in the development of an organism.

[0518] The probe can correspond to any sequence along the entire length of the gene encoding the receptor. Accordingly, it could be derived from 5′ noncoding regions, the coding region, and 3′ noncoding regions. However, as described herein, probes would not encompass fragments and sequences that may have been disclosed prior to the invention.

[0519] The nucleic acid probe can be, for example, the full-length cDNA of SEQ ID NO: 7, or a fragment thereof, such as an oligonucleotide of at least 7, 10, 12, 15, 30, 50, 100, 250 or 500 nucleotides in length and sufficient to specifically hybridize under stringent conditions to mRNA or DNA.

[0520] Fragments of the polynucleotides described herein are also useful to synthesize larger fragments or full-length polynucleotides described herein. For example, a fragment can be hybridized to any portion of an mRNA and a larger or full-length cDNA can be produced.

[0521] The fragments are also useful to synthesize antisense molecules of desired length and sequence.

[0522] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful as primers for PCR to amplify any given region of a receptor polynucleotide.

[0523] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for constructing recombinant vectors. Such vectors include expression vectors that express a portion of, or all of, the receptor polypeptides. Vectors also include insertion vectors, used to integrate into another polynucleotide sequence, such as into the cellular genome, to alter in situ expression of receptor genes and gene products. For example, an endogenous receptor coding sequence can be replaced via homologous recombination with all or part of the coding region containing one or more specifically introduced mutations.

[0524] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful as probes for determining the chromosomal positions of the receptor polynucleotides by means of in situ hybridization methods.

[0525] The receptor polynucleotide probes are also useful to determine patterns of the presence of the gene encoding the receptors and their variants with respect to tissue distribution, for example, whether gene duplication has occurred and whether the duplication occurs in all or only a subset of tissues. The genes can be naturally occurring or can have been introduced into a cell, tissue, or organism exogenously.

[0526] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for designing ribozymes corresponding to all, or a part, of the mRNA produced from genes encoding the polynucleotides described herein.

[0527] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for constructing host cells expressing a part, or all, of the receptor polynucleotides and polypeptides.

[0528] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for constructing transgenic animals expressing all, or a part, of the receptor polynucleotides and polypeptides.

[0529] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for making vectors that express part, or all, of the receptor polypeptides.

[0530] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful as hybridization probes for determining the level of receptor nucleic acid expression. Accordingly, the probes can be used to detect the presence of, or to determine levels of, receptor nucleic acid in cells, tissues, and in organisms. The nucleic acid whose level is determined can be DNA or RNA. Accordingly, probes corresponding to the polypeptides described herein can be used to assess gene copy number in a given cell, tissue, or organism. This is particularly relevant in cases in which there has been an amplification of the receptor genes.

[0531] Alternatively, the probe can be used in an in situ hybridization context to assess the position of extra copies of the receptor genes, as on extrachromosomal elements or as integrated into chromosomes in which the receptor gene is not normally found, for example as a homogeneously staining region.

[0532] These uses are relevant for diagnosis of disorders involving an increase or decrease in receptor expression relative to normal results.

[0533] In vitro techniques for detection of mRNA include Northern hybridizations and in situ hybridizations. In vitro techniques for detecting DNA includes Southern hybridizations and in situ hybridization.

[0534] Probes can be used as a part of a diagnostic test kit for identifying cells or tissues that express a receptor protein, such as by measuring a level of a receptor-encoding nucleic acid in a sample of cells from a subject e.g., mRNA or genomic DNA, or determining if a receptor gene has been mutated.

[0535] Nucleic acid expression assays are useful for drug screening to identify compounds that modulate receptor nucleic acid expression.

[0536] The invention thus provides a method for identifying a compound that can be used to treat a disorder associated with nucleic acid expression of the receptor gene. The method typically includes assaying the ability of the compound to modulate the expression of the receptor nucleic acid and thus identifying a compound that can be used to treat a disorder characterized by undesired receptor nucleic acid expression. The assays can be performed in cell-based and cell-free systems. Cell-based assays include cells naturally expressing the receptor nucleic acid or recombinant cells genetically engineered to express specific nucleic acid sequences.

[0537] Alternatively, candidate compounds can be assayed in vivo in patients or in transgenic animals.

[0538] The assay for receptor nucleic acid expression can involve direct assay of nucleic acid levels, such as mRNA levels, or on collateral compounds involved in the signal pathway (such as cyclic AMP or phosphatidylinositol turnover). Further, the expression of genes that are up- or down-regulated in response to the receptor protein signal pathway can also be assayed. In this embodiment the regulatory regions of these genes can be operably linked to a reporter gene such as luciferase.

[0539] Thus, modulators of receptor gene expression can be identified in a method wherein a cell is contacted with a candidate compound and the expression of mRNA determined. The level of expression of receptor mRNA in the presence of the candidate compound is compared to the level of expression of receptor mRNA in the absence of the candidate compound. The candidate compound can then be identified as a modulator of nucleic acid expression based on this comparison and be used, for example to treat a disorder characterized by aberrant nucleic acid expression. When expression of mRNA is statistically significantly greater in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as a stimulator of nucleic acid expression. When nucleic acid expression is statistically significantly less in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as an inhibitor of nucleic acid expression. Accordingly, the invention provides methods of treatment, with the nucleic acid as a target, using a compound identified through drug screening as a gene modulator to modulate receptor nucleic acid expression. Modulation includes both up-regulation (i.e. activation or agonization) or down-regulation (suppression or antagonization) or nucleic acid expression.

[0540] Alternatively, a modulator for receptor nucleic acid expression can be a small molecule or drug identified using the screening assays described herein as long as the drug or small molecule inhibits the receptor nucleic acid expression.

[0541] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for monitoring the effectiveness of modulating compounds on the expression or activity of the receptor gene in clinical trials or in a treatment regimen. Thus, the gene expression pattern can serve as a barometer for the continuing effectiveness of treatment with the compound, particularly with compounds to which a patient can develop resistance. The gene expression pattern can also serve as a marker indicative of a physiological response of the affected cells to the compound. Accordingly, such monitoring would allow either increased administration of the compound or the administration of alternative compounds to which the patient has not become resistant. Similarly, if the level of nucleic acid expression falls below a desirable level, administration of the compound could be commensurately decreased.

[0542] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful in diagnostic assays for qualitative changes in receptor nucleic acid, and particularly in qualitative changes that lead to pathology. The polynucleotides can be used to detect mutations in receptor genes and gene expression products such as mRNA. The polynucleotides can be used as hybridization probes to detect naturally-occurring genetic mutations in the receptor gene and thereby to determine whether a subject with the mutation is at risk for a disorder caused by the mutation. Mutations include deletion, addition, or substitution of one or more nucleotides in the gene, chromosomal rearrangement, such as inversion or transposition, modification of genomic DNA, such as aberrant methylation patterns or changes in gene copy number, such as amplification. Detection of a mutated form of the receptor gene associated with a dysfunction provides a diagnostic tool for an active disease or susceptibility to disease when the disease results from overexpression, underexpression, or altered expression of a receptor protein.

[0543] Individuals carrying mutations in the receptor gene can be detected at the nucleic acid level by a variety of techniques. Genomic DNA can be analyzed directly or can be amplified by using PCR prior to analysis. RNA or cDNA can be used in the same way.

[0544] In certain embodiments, detection of the mutation involves the use of a probe/primer in a polymerase chain reaction (PCR) (see, e.g. U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,683,195 and 4,683,202), such as anchor PCR or RACE PCR, or, alternatively, in a ligation chain reaction (LCR) (see, e.g., Landegran et al., Science 241:1077-1080 (1988); and Nakazawa et al., PNAS 91:360-364 (1994)), the latter of which can be particularly useful for detecting point mutations in the gene (see Abravaya et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 23:675-682 (1995)). This method can include the steps of collecting a sample of cells from a patient, isolating nucleic acid (e.g., genomic, mRNA or both) from the cells of the sample, contacting the nucleic acid sample with one or more primers which specifically hybridize to a gene under conditions such that hybridization and amplification of the gene (if present) occurs, and detecting the presence or absence of an amplification product, or detecting the size of the amplification product and comparing the length to a control sample. Deletions and insertions can be detected by a change in size of the amplified product compared to the normal genotype. Point mutations can be identified by hybridizing amplified DNA to normal RNA or antisense DNA sequences.

[0545] Alternatively, mutations in a receptor gene can be directly identified, for example, by alterations in restriction enzyme digestion patterns determined by gel electrophoresis.

[0546] Further, sequence-specific ribozymes (U.S. Pat. No. 5,498,531) can be used to score for the presence of specific mutations by development or loss of a ribozyme cleavage site.

[0547] Perfectly matched sequences can be distinguished from mismatched sequences by nuclease cleavage digestion assays or by differences in melting temperature.

[0548] Sequence changes at specific locations can also be assessed by nuclease protection assays such as RNase and S1 protection or the chemical cleavage method.

[0549] Furthermore, sequence differences between a mutant receptor gene and a wild-type gene can be determined by direct DNA sequencing. A variety of automated sequencing procedures can be utilized when performing the diagnostic assays ((1995) Biotechniques 19:448), including sequencing by mass spectrometry (see, e.g., PCT International Publication No. WO 94/16101; Cohen et al., Adv. Chromatogr. 36:127-162 (1996); and Griffin et al., Appl. Biochem. Biotechnol. 38:147-159 (1993)).

[0550] Other methods for detecting mutations in the gene include methods in which protection from cleavage agents is used to detect mismatched bases in RNA/RNA or RNA/DNA duplexes (Myers et al., Science 230:1242 (1985)); Cotton et al., PNAS 85:4397 (1988); Saleeba et al., Meth. Enzymol. 217:286-295 (1992)), electrophoretic mobility of mutant and wild type nucleic acid is compared (Orita et al., PNAS 86:2766 (1989); Cotton et al., Mutat. Res. 285:125-144 (1993); and Hayashi et al., Genet. Anal. Tech. Appl. 9:73-79 (1992)), and movement of mutant or wild-type fragments in polyacrylamide gels containing a gradient of denaturant is assayed using denaturing gradient gel electrophoresis (Myers et al., Nature 313:495 (1985)). Examples of other techniques for detecting point mutations include, selective oligonucleotide hybridization, selective amplification, and selective primer extension.

[0551] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for testing an individual for a genotype that while not necessarily causing the disease, nevertheless affects the treatment modality. Thus, the polynucleotides can be used to study the relationship between an individual's genotype and the individual's response to a compound used for treatment (pharmacogenomic relationship). In the present case, for example, a mutation in the receptor gene that results in altered affinity for ligand could result in an excessive or decreased drug effect with standard concentrations of ligand that activates the receptor. Accordingly, the receptor polynucleotides described herein can be used to assess the mutation content of the receptor gene in an individual in order to select an appropriate compound or dosage regimen for treatment.

[0552] Thus polynucleotides displaying genetic variations that affect treatment provide a diagnostic target that can be used to tailor treatment in an individual. Accordingly, the production of recombinant cells and animals containing these polymorphisms allow effective clinical design of treatment compounds and dosage regimens.

[0553] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for chromosome identification when the sequence is identified with an individual chromosome and to a particular location on the chromosome. First, the DNA sequence is matched to the chromosome by in situ or other chromosome-specific hybridization. Sequences can also be correlated to specific chromosomes by preparing PCR primers that can be used for PCR screening of somatic cell hybrids containing individual chromosomes from the desired species. Only hybrids containing the chromosome containing the gene homologous to the primer will yield an amplified fragment. Sublocalization can be achieved using chromosomal fragments. Other strategies include prescreening with labeled flow-sorted chromosomes and preselection by hybridization to chromosome-specific libraries. Further mapping strategies include fluorescence in situ hybridization which allows hybridization with probes shorter than those traditionally used. Reagents for chromosome mapping can be used individually to mark a single chromosome or a single site on the chromosome, or panels of reagents can be used for marking multiple sites and/or multiple chromosomes. Reagents corresponding to noncoding regions of the genes actually are preferred for mapping purposes. Coding sequences are more likely to be conserved within gene families, thus increasing the chance of cross hybridizations during chromosomal mapping.

[0554] The receptor polynucleotides can also be used to identify individuals from small biological samples. This can be done for example using restriction fragment-length polymorphism (RFLP) to identify an individual. Thus, the polynucleotides described herein are useful as DNA markers for RFLP (See U.S. Pat. No. 5,272,057).

[0555] Furthermore, the receptor sequence can be used to provide an alternative technique which determines the actual DNA sequence of selected fragments in the genome of an individual. Thus, the receptor sequences described herein can be used to prepare two PCR primers from the 5′ and 3′ ends of the sequences. These primers can then be used to amplify DNA from an individual for subsequent sequencing.

[0556] Panels of corresponding DNA sequences from individuals prepared in this manner can provide unique individual identifications, as each individual will have a unique set of such DNA sequences. It is estimated that allelic variation in humans occurs with a frequency of about once per each 500 bases. Allelic variation occurs to some degree in the coding regions of these sequences, and to a greater degree in the noncoding regions. The receptor sequences can be used to obtain such identification sequences from individuals and from tissue. The sequences represent unique fragments of the human genome. Each of the sequences described herein can, to some degree, be used as a standard against which DNA from an individual can be compared for identification purposes.

[0557] If a panel of reagents from the sequences is used to generate a unique identification database for an individual, those same reagents can later be used to identify tissue from that individual. Using the unique identification database, positive identification of the individual, living or dead, can be made from extremely small tissue samples.

[0558] The receptor polynucleotides can also be used in forensic identification procedures. PCR technology can be used to amplify DNA sequences taken from very small biological samples, such as a single hair follicle, body fluids (eg. blood, saliva, or semen). The amplified sequence can then be compared to a standard allowing identification of the origin of the sample.

[0559] The receptor polynucleotides can thus be used to provide polynucleotide reagents, e.g., PCR primers, targeted to specific loci in the human genome, which can enhance the reliability of DNA-based forensic identifications by, for example, providing another “identification marker” (i.e. another DNA sequence that is unique to a particular individual). As described above, actual base sequence information can be used for identification as an accurate alternative to patterns formed by restriction enzyme generated fragments. Sequences targeted to the noncoding region are particularly useful since greater polymorphism occurs in the noncoding regions, making it easier to differentiate individuals using this technique. Fragments are at least 7-12 bases.

[0560] The receptor polynucleotides can further be used to provide polynucleotide reagents, e.g., labeled or labelable probes which can be used in, for example, an in situ hybridization technique, to identify a specific tissue. This is useful in cases in which a forensic pathologist is presented with a tissue of unknown origin. Panels of receptor probes can be used to identify tissue by species and/or by organ type.

[0561] In a similar fashion, these primers and probes can be used to screen tissue culture for contamination (i.e. screen for the presence of a mixture of different types of cells in a culture).

[0562] Alternatively, the receptor polynucleotides can be used directly to block transcription or translation of receptor gene sequences by means of antisense or ribozyme constructs. Thus, in a disorder characterized by abnormally high or undesirable receptor gene expression, nucleic acids can be directly used for treatment. The receptor polynucleotides are thus useful as antisense constructs to control receptor gene expression in cells, tissues, and organisms. A DNA antisense polynucleotide is designed to be complementary to a region of the gene involved in transcription, preventing transcription and hence production of receptor protein. An antisense RNA or DNA polynucleotide would hybridize to the mRNA and thus block translation of mRNA into receptor protein.

[0563] Examples of antisense molecules useful to inhibit nucleic acid expression include antisense molecules complementary to a fragment of the 5′ untranslated region of SEQ ID NO: 8 which also includes the start codon and antisense molecules which are complementary to a fragment of the 3′ untranslated region of SEQ ID NO: 8.

[0564] Alternatively, a class of antisense molecules can be used to inactivate mRNA in order to decrease expression of receptor nucleic acid. Accordingly, these molecules can treat a disorder characterized by abnormal or undesired receptor nucleic acid expression. This technique involves cleavage by means of ribozymes containing nucleotide sequences complementary to one or more regions in the mRNA that attenuate the ability of the mRNA to be translated. Possible regions include coding regions and particularly coding regions corresponding to the catalytic and other functional activities of the receptor protein, such as ligand binding.

[0565] The receptor polynucleotides also provide vectors for gene therapy in patients containing cells that are aberrant in receptor gene expression. Thus, recombinant cells, which include the patient's cells that have been engineered ex vivo and returned to the patient, are introduced into an individual where the cells produce the desired receptor protein to treat the individual.

[0566] The invention also encompasses kits for detecting the presence of a receptor nucleic acid in a biological sample. For example, the kit can comprise reagents such as a labeled or labelable nucleic acid or agent capable of detecting receptor nucleic acid in a biological sample; means for determining the amount of receptor nucleic acid in the sample; and means for comparing the amount of receptor nucleic acid in the sample with a standard. The compound or agent can be packaged in a suitable container. The kit can further comprise instructions for using the kit to detect receptor mRNA or DNA.

[0567] Vectors/Host Cells

[0568] The invention also provides vectors containing the receptor polynucleotides. The term “vector” refers to a vehicle, preferably a nucleic acid molecule, that can transport the receptor polynucleotides. When the vector is a nucleic acid molecule, the receptor polynucleotides are covalently linked to the vector nucleic acid. With this aspect of the invention, the vector includes a plasmid, single or double stranded phage, a single or double stranded RNA or DNA viral vector, or artificial chromosome, such as a BAC, PAC, YAC, OR MAC.

[0569] A vector can be maintained in the host cell as an extrachromosomal element where it replicates and produces additional copies of the receptor polynucleotides. Alternatively, the vector may integrate into the host cell genome and produce additional copies of the receptor polynucleotides when the host cell replicates.

[0570] The invention provides vectors for the maintenance (cloning vectors) or vectors for expression (expression vectors) of the receptor polynucleotides. The vectors can function in procaryotic or eukaryotic cells or in both (shuttle vectors).

[0571] Expression vectors contain cis-acting regulatory regions that are operably linked in the vector to the receptor polynucleotides such that transcription of the polynucleotides is allowed in a host cell. The polynucleotides can be introduced into the host cell with a separate polynucleotide capable of affecting transcription. Thus, the second polynucleotide may provide a trans-acting factor interacting with the cis-regulatory control region to allow transcription of the receptor polynucleotides from the vector. Alternatively, a trans-acting factor may be supplied by the host cell. Finally, a transacting factor can be produced from the vector itself.

[0572] It is understood, however, that in some embodiments, transcription and/or translation of the receptor polynucleotides can occur in a cell-free system.

[0573] The regulatory sequence to which the polynucleotides described herein can be operably linked include promoters for directing mRNA transcription. These include, but are not limited to, the left promoter from bacteriophage λ, the lac, TRP, and TAC promoters from E. coli, the early and late promoters from SV40, the CMV immediate early promoter, the adenovirus early and late promoters, and retrovirus long-terminal repeats.

[0574] In addition to control regions that promote transcription, expression vectors may also include regions that modulate transcription, such as repressor binding sites and enhancers. Examples include the SV40 enhancer, the cytomegalovirus immediate early enhancer, polyoma enhancer, adenovirus enhancers, and retrovirus LTR enhancers.

[0575] In addition to containing sites for transcription initiation and control, expression vectors can also contain sequences necessary for transcription termination and, in the transcribed region a ribosome binding site for translation. Other regulatory control elements for expression include initiation and termination codons as well as polyadenylation signals. The person of ordinary skill in the art would be aware of the numerous regulatory sequences that are useful in expression vectors. Such regulatory sequences are described, for example, in Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd. ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., (1989).

[0576] A variety of expression vectors can be used to express a receptor polynucleotide. Such vectors include chromosomal, episomal, and virus-derived vectors, for example vectors derived from bacterial plasmids, from bacteriophage, from yeast episomes, from yeast chromosomal elements, including yeast artificial chromosomes, from viruses such as baculoviruses, papovaviruses such as SV40, Vaccinia viruses, adenoviruses, poxviruses, pseudorabies viruses, and retroviruses. Vectors may also be derived from combinations of these sources such as those derived from plasmid and bacteriophage genetic elements, eg. cosmids and phagemids. Appropriate cloning and expression vectors for prokaryotic and eukaryotic hosts are described in Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd. ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., (1989).

[0577] The regulatory sequence may provide constitutive expression in one or more host cells (i.e., tissue specific) or may provide for inducible expression in one or more cell types such as by temperature, nutrient additive, or exogenous factor such as a hormone or other ligand. A variety of vectors providing for constitutive and inducible expression in prokaryotic and eukaryotic hosts are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art.

[0578] The receptor polynucleotides can be inserted into the vector nucleic acid by well-known methodology. Generally, the DNA sequence that will ultimately be expressed is joined to an expression vector by cleaving the DNA sequence and the expression vector with one or more restriction enzymes and then ligating the fragments together. Procedures for restriction enzyme digestion and ligation are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art.

[0579] The vector containing the appropriate polynucleotide can be introduced into an appropriate host cell for propagation or expression using well-known techniques. Bacterial cells include, but are not limited to, E. coli, Streptomyces, and Salmonella typhimurium. Eukaryotic cells include, but are not limited to, yeast, insect cells such as Drosophila, animal cells such as COS and CHO cells, and plant cells.

[0580] As described herein, it may be desirable to express the polypeptide as a fusion protein. Accordingly, the invention provides fusion vectors that allow for the production of the receptor polypeptides. Fusion vectors can increase the expression of a recombinant protein, increase the solubility of the recombinant protein, and aid in the purification of the protein by acting for example as a ligand for affinity purification. A proteolytic cleavage site may be introduced at the junction of the fusion moiety so that the desired polypeptide can ultimately be separated from the fusion moiety. Proteolytic enzymes include, but are not limited to, factor Xa, thrombin, and enterokinase. Typical fusion expression vectors include pGEX (Smith et al., Gene 67:31-40 (1988)), pMAL (New England Biolabs, Beverly, Mass.) and pRIT5 (Pharmacia, Piscataway, N.J.) which fuse glutathione S-transferase (GST), maltose E binding protein, or protein A, respectively, to the target recombinant protein. Examples of suitable inducible non-fusion E. coli expression vectors include pTrc (Amann et al., Gene 69:301-315 (1988)) and pET 11d (Studier et al., Gene Expression Technology: Methods in Enzymology 185:60-89 (1990)).

[0581] Recombinant protein expression can be maximized in a host bacteria by providing a genetic background wherein the host cell has an impaired capacity to proteolytically cleave the recombinant protein. (Gottesman, S., Gene Expression Technology: Methods in Enzymology 185, Academic Press, San Diego, Calif. (1990) 119-128). Alternatively, the sequence of the polynucleotide of interest can be altered to provide preferential codon usage for a specific host cell, for example E. coli. (Wada et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 20:2111-2118 (1992)).

[0582] The receptor polynucleotides can also be expressed by expression vectors that are operative in yeast. Examples of vectors for expression in yeast e.g., S. cerevisiae include pYepSec1 (Baldari, et al., EMBO J. 6:229-234 (1987)), pMFa (Kurjan et al., Cell 30:933-943(1982)), pJRY88 (Schultz et al., Gene 54:113-123 (1987)), and pYES2 (Invitrogen Corporation, San Diego, Calif.).

[0583] The receptor polynucleotides can also be expressed in insect cells using, for example, baculovirus expression vectors. Baculovirus vectors available for expression of proteins in cultured insect cells (e.g., Sf 9 cells) include the pAc series (Smith et al., Mol. Cell Biol. 3:2156-2165 (1983)) and the pVL series (Lucklow et al., Virology 170:31-39 (1989)).

[0584] In certain embodiments of the invention, the polynucleotides described herein are expressed in mammalian cells using mammalian expression vectors. Examples of mammalian expression vectors include pCDM8 (Seed, B. Nature 329:840(1987)) and pMT2PC (Kaufman et al., EMBO J. 6:187-195 (1987)).

[0585] The expression vectors listed herein are provided by way of example only of the well-known vectors available to those of ordinary skill in the art that would be useful to express the receptor polynucleotides. The person of ordinary skill in the art would be aware of other vectors suitable for maintenance propagation or expression of the polynucleotides described herein. These are found for example in Sambrook, J., Fritsh, E. F., and Maniatis, T. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd, ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1989.

[0586] The invention also encompasses vectors in which the nucleic acid sequences described herein are cloned into the vector in reverse orientation, but operably linked to a regulatory sequence that permits transcription of antisense RNA. Thus, an antisense transcript can be produced to all, or to a portion, of the polynucleotide sequences described herein, including both coding and non-coding regions. Expression of this antisense RNA is subject to each of the parameters described above in relation to expression of the sense RNA (regulatory sequences, constitutive or inducible expression, tissue-specific expression).

[0587] The invention also relates to recombinant host cells containing the vectors described herein. Host cells therefore include prokaryotic cells, lower eukaryotic cells such as yeast, other eukaryotic cells such as insect cells, and higher eukaryotic cells such as mammalian cells.

[0588] The recombinant host cells are prepared by introducing the vector constructs described herein into the cells by techniques readily available to the person of ordinary skill in the art. These include, but are not limited to, calcium phosphate transfection, DEAE-dextran-mediated transfection, cationic lipid-mediated transfection, electroporation, transduction, infection, lipofection, and other techniques such as those found in Sambrook, et al. (Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd, ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1989).

[0589] Host cells can contain more than one vector. Thus, different nucleotide sequences can be introduced on different vectors of the same cell. Similarly, the receptor polynucleotides can be introduced either alone or with other polynucleotides that are not related to the receptor polynucleotides such as those providing trans-acting factors for expression vectors. When more than one vector is introduced into a cell, the vectors can be introduced independently, co-introduced or joined to the receptor polynucleotide vector.

[0590] In the case of bacteriophage and viral vectors, these can be introduced into cells as packaged or encapsulated virus by standard procedures for infection and transduction.

[0591] Viral vectors can be replication-competent or replication-defective. In the case in which viral replication is defective, replication will occur in host cells providing functions that complement the defects.

[0592] Vectors generally include selectable markers that enable the selection of the subpopulation of cells that contain the recombinant vector constructs. The marker can be contained in the same vector that contains the polynucleotides described herein or may be on a separate vector. Markers include tetracycline or ampicillin-resistance genes for prokaryotic host cells and dihydrofolate reductase or neomycin resistance for eukaryotic host cells. However, any marker that provides selection for a phenotypic trait will be effective.

[0593] While the mature proteins can be produced in bacteria, yeast, mammalian cells, and other cells under the control of the appropriate regulatory sequences, cell-free transcription and translation systems can also be used to produce these proteins using RNA derived from the DNA constructs described herein.

[0594] Where secretion of the polypeptide is desired, appropriate secretion signals are incorporated into the vector. The signal sequence can be endogenous to the receptor polypeptides or heterologous to these polypeptides.

[0595] Where the polypeptide is not secreted into the medium, the protein can be isolated from the host cell by standard disruption procedures, including freeze thaw, sonication, mechanical disruption, use of lysing agents and the like. The polypeptide can then be recovered and purified by well-known purification methods including ammonium sulfate precipitation, acid extraction, anion or cationic exchange chromatography, phosphocellulose chromatography, hydrophobic-interaction chromatography, affinity chromatography, hydroxylapatite chromatography, lectin chromatography, or high performance liquid chromatography.

[0596] It is also understood that depending upon the host cell in recombinant production of the polypeptides described herein, the polypeptides can have various glycosylation patterns, depending upon the cell, or maybe non-glycosylated as when produced in bacteria. In addition, the polypeptides may include an initial modified methionine in some cases as a result of a host-mediated process.

[0597] Uses of Vectors and Host Cells

[0598] The host cells expressing the polypeptides described herein, and particularly recombinant host cells, have a variety of uses. First, the cells are useful for producing receptor proteins or polypeptides that can be further purified to produce desired amounts of receptor protein or fragments. Thus, host cells containing expression vectors are useful for polypeptide production.

[0599] Host cells are also useful for conducting cell-based assays involving the receptor or receptor fragments. Thus, a recombinant host cell expressing a native receptor is useful to assay for compounds that stimulate or inhibit receptor function. This includes ligand binding, gene expression at the level of transcription or translation, G-protein interaction, and components of the signal transduction pathway. Host cells are also useful for identifying receptor mutants in which these functions are affected. If the mutants naturally occur and give rise to a pathology, host cells containing the mutations are useful to assay compounds that have a desired effect on the mutant receptor (for example, stimulating or inhibiting function) which may not be indicated by their effect on the native receptor.

[0600] Recombinant host cells are also useful for expressing the chimeric polypeptides described herein to assess compounds that activate or suppress activation by means of a heterologous amino terminal extracellular domain (or other binding region). Alternatively, a heterologous region spanning the entire transmembrane domain (or parts thereof) can be used to assess the effect of a desired amino terminal extracellular domain (or other binding region) on any given host cell. In this embodiment, a region spanning the entire transmembrane domain (or parts thereof) compatible with the specific host cell is used to make the chimeric vector. Alternatively, a heterologous carboxy terminal intracellular, e.g., signal transduction, domain can be introduced into the host cell.

[0601] Further, mutant receptors can be designed in which one or more of the various functions is engineered to be increased or decreased (e.g., ligand binding or G-protein binding) and used to augrnent or replace receptor proteins in an individual. Thus, host cells can provide a therapeutic benefit by replacing an aberrant receptor or providing an aberrant receptor that provides a therapeutic result. In one embodiment, the cells provide receptors that are abnormally active.

[0602] In another embodiment, the cells provide receptors that are abnormally inactive. These receptors can compete with endogenous receptors in the individual. In another embodiment, cells expressing receptors that cannot be activated, are introduced into an individual in order to compete with endogenous receptors for ligand. For example, in the case in which excessive ligand is part of a treatment modality, it may be necessary to inactivate this ligand at a specific point in treatment. Providing cells that compete for the ligand, but which cannot be affected by receptor activation would be beneficial.

[0603] Homologously recombinant host cells can also be produced that allow the in situ alteration of endogenous receptor polynucleotide sequences in a host cell genome. This technology is more fully described in WO 93/09222, WO 91/12650 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,641,670. Briefly, specific polynucleotide sequences corresponding to the receptor polynucleotides or sequences proximal or distal to a receptor gene are allowed to integrate into a host cell genome by homologous recombination where expression of the gene can be affected. In one embodiment, regulatory sequences are introduced that either increase or decrease expression of an endogenous sequence. Accordingly, a receptor protein can be produced in a cell not normally producing it, or increased expression of receptor protein can result in a cell normally producing the protein at a specific level. Alternatively, the entire gene can be deleted. Still further, specific mutations can be introduced into any desired region of the gene to produce mutant receptor proteins. Such mutations could be introduced, for example, into the specific functional regions such as the ligand-binding site or the G-protein binding site.

[0604] In one embodiment, the host cell can be a fertilized oocyte or embryonic stem cell that can be used to produce a transgenic animal containing the altered receptor gene. Alternatively, the host cell can be a stem cell or other early tissue precursor that gives rise to a specific subset of cells and can be used to produce transgenic tissues in an animal. See also Thomas et al., Cell 51:503 (1987) for a description of homologous recombination vectors. The vector is introduced into an embryonic stem cell line (e.g., by electroporation) and cells in which the introduced gene has homologously recombined with the endogenous receptor gene is selected (see e.g., Li, E. et al., Cell 69:915 (1992)). The selected cells are then injected into a blastocyst of an animal (e.g., a mouse) to form aggregation chimeras (see e.g., Bradley, A. in Teratocarcinomas and Embryonic Stem Cells: A Practical Approach, E. J. Robertson, ed. (IRL, Oxford, 1987) pp. 113-152). A chimeric embryo can then be implanted into a suitable pseudopregnant female foster animal and the embryo brought to term. Progeny harboring the homologously recombined DNA in their germ cells can be used to breed animals in which all cells of the animal contain the homologously recombined DNA by germline transmission of the transgene. Methods for constructing homologous recombination vectors and homologous recombinant animals are described further in Bradley, A. (1991) Current Opinion in Biotechnology 2:823-829 and in PCT International Publication Nos. WO 90/11354; WO 91/01140; and WO 93/04169.

[0605] The genetically engineered host cells can be used to produce non-human transgenic animals. A transgenic animal is preferably a mammal, for example a rodent, such as a rat or mouse, in which one or more of the cells of the animal include a transgene. A transgene is exogenous DNA which is integrated into the genome of a cell from which a transgenic animal develops and which remains in the genome of the mature animal in one or more cell types or tissues of the transgenic animal. These animals are useful for studying the function of a receptor protein and identifying and evaluating modulators of receptor protein activity.

[0606] Other examples of transgenic animals include non-human primates, sheep, dogs, cows, goats, chickens, and amphibians.

[0607] In one embodiment, a host cell is a fertilized oocyte or an embryonic stem cell into which receptor polynucleotide sequences have been introduced.

[0608] A transgenic animal can be produced by introducing nucleic acid into the male pronuclei of a fertilized oocyte, e.g., by microinjection, retroviral infection, and allowing the oocyte to develop in a pseudopregnant female foster animal. Any of the receptor nucleotide sequences can be introduced as a transgene into the genome of a non-human animal, such as a mouse.

[0609] Any of the regulatory or other sequences useful in expression vectors can form part of the transgenic sequence. This includes intronic sequences and polyadenylation signals, if not already included. A tissue-specific regulatory sequence(s) can be operably linked to the transgene to direct expression of the receptor protein to particular cells.

[0610] Methods for generating transgenic animals via embryo manipulation and microinjection, particularly animals such as mice, have become conventional in the art and are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,736,866 and 4,870,009, both by Leder et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,873,191 by Wagner et al. and in Hogan, B., Manipulating the Mouse Embryo, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1986). Similar methods are used for production of other transgenic animals. A transgenic founder animal can be identified based upon the presence of the transgene in its genome and/or expression of transgenic mRNA in tissues or cells of the animals. A transgenic founder animal can then be used to breed additional animals carrying the transgene. Moreover, transgenic animals carrying a transgene can further be bred to other transgenic animals carrying other transgenes. A transgenic animal also includes animals in which the entire animal or tissues in the animal have been produced using the homologously recombinant host cells described herein.

[0611] In another embodiment, transgenic non-human animals can be produced which contain selected systems which allow for regulated expression of the transgene. One example of such a system is the cre/loxP recombinase system of bacteriophage P1. For a description of the cre/loxP recombinase system, see, e.g., Lakso et al. PNAS 89:6232-6236 (1992). Another example of a recombinase system is the FLP recombinase system of S. cerevisiae (O'Gorman et al. Science 251:1351-1355 (1991). If a cre/loxP recombinase system is used to regulate expression of the transgene, animals containing transgenes encoding both the Cre recombinase and a selected protein is required. Such animals can be provided through the construction of “double” transgenic animals, e.g., by mating two transgenic animals, one containing a transgene encoding a selected protein and the other containing a transgene encoding a recombinase.

[0612] Clones of the non-human transgenic animals described herein can also be produced according to the methods described in Wilmut, I. et al. Nature 385:810-813 (1997) and PCT International Publication Nos. WO 97/07668 and WO 97/07669. In brief, a cell, e.g., a somatic cell, from the transgenic animal can be isolated and induced to exit the growth cycle and enter Go phase. The quiescent cell can then be fused, e.g., through the use of electrical pulses, to an enucleated oocyte from an animal of the same species from which the quiescent cell is isolated. The reconstructed oocyte is then cultured such that it develops to morula or blastocyst and then transferred to pseudopregnant female foster animal. The offspring borne of this female foster animal will be a clone of the animal from which the cell, e.g., the somatic cell, is isolated.

[0613] Transgenic animals containing recombinant cells that express the polypeptides described herein are useful to conduct the assays described herein in an in vivo context. Accordingly, the various physiological factors that are present in vivo and that could effect ligand binding, receptor activation, and signal transduction, may not be evident from in vitro cell-free or cell-based assays. Accordingly, it is useful to provide non-human transgenic animals to assay in vivo receptor function, including ligand interaction, the effect of specific mutant receptors on receptor function and ligand interaction, and the effect of chimeric receptors. It is also possible to assess the effect of null mutations, that is mutations that substantially or completely eliminate one or more receptor functions.

[0614] Pharmaceutical Compositions

[0615] The receptor nucleic acid molecules, protein (particularly fragments such as the amino terminal extracellular domain), modulators of the protein, and antibodies (also referred to herein as “active compounds”) can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration to a subject, e.g., a human. Such compositions typically comprise the nucleic acid molecule, protein, modulator, or antibody and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.

[0616] As used herein the language “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” is intended to include any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, such media can be used in the compositions of the invention. Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions. A pharmaceutical composition of the invention is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration. Examples of routes of administration include parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, oral (e.g., inhalation), transdermal (topical), transmucosal, and rectal administration. Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, or subcutaneous application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide. The parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.

[0617] Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions (where water soluble) or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersion. For intravenous administration, suitable carriers include physiological saline, bacteriostatic water, Cremophor EL™ (BASF, Parsippany, N.J.) or phosphate buffered saline (PBS). In all cases, the composition must be sterile and should be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof. The proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. Prevention of the action of microorganisms can be achieved by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, ascorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for example, sugars, polyalcohols such as manitol, sorbitol, sodium chloride in the composition. Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent which delays absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.

[0618] Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the active compound (e.g., a receptor protein or anti-receptor antibody) in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization. Generally, dispersions are prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle which contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying which yields a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.

[0619] Oral compositions generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They can be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets. For oral administration, the agent can be contained in enteric forms to survive the stomach or further coated or mixed to be released in a particular region of the GI tract by known methods. For the purpose of oral therapeutic administration, the active compound can be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, or capsules. Oral compositions can also be prepared using a fluid carrier for use as a mouthwash, wherein the compound in the fluid carrier is applied orally and swished and expectorated or swallowed. Pharmaceutically compatible binding agents, and/or adjuvant materials can be included as part of the composition. The tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.

[0620] For administration by inhalation, the compounds are delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from pressured container or dispenser which contains a suitable propellant, e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer.

[0621] Systemic administration can also be by transmucosal or transdermal means. For transmucosal or transdermal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art, and include, for example, for transmucosal administration, detergents, bile salts, and fusidic acid derivatives. Transmucosal administration can be accomplished through the use of nasal sprays or suppositories. For transdermal administration, the active compounds are formulated into ointments, salves, gels, or creams as generally known in the art.

[0622] The compounds can also be prepared in the form of suppositories (e.g., with conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter and other glycerides) or retention enemas for rectal delivery.

[0623] In one embodiment, the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems. Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Corporation and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,522,811.

[0624] It is especially advantageous to formulate oral or parenteral compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unit form as used herein refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subject to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. The specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on the unique characteristics of the active compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an active compound for the treatment of individuals.

[0625] The nucleic acid molecules of the invention can be inserted into vectors and used as gene therapy vectors. Gene therapy vectors can be delivered to a subject by, for example, intravenous injection, local administration (U.S. Pat. No. 5,328,470) or by stereotactic injection (see e.g., Chen et al., PNAS 91:3054-3057 (1994)). The pharmaceutical preparation of the gene therapy vector can include the gene therapy vector in an acceptable diluent, or can comprise a slow release matrix in which the gene delivery vehicle is imbedded. Alternatively, where the complete gene delivery vector can be produced intact from recombinant cells, e.g. retroviral vectors, the pharmaceutical preparation can include one or more cells which produce the gene delivery system.

[0626] The pharmaceutical compositions can be included in a container, pack, or dispenser together with instructions for administration.

[0627] This invention may be embodied in many different forms and should not be construed as limited to the embodiments set forth herein; rather, these embodiments are provided so that this disclosure will fully convey the invention to those skilled in the art. Many modifications and other embodiments of the invention will come to mind in one skilled in the art to which this invention pertains having the benefit of the teachings presented in the foregoing description. Although specific terms are employed, they are used as in the art unless otherwise indicated.

CHAPTER 3

17723 Receptor, A Novel G-protien Coupled Receptor

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

[0628] G-protein Coupled Receptors

[0629] G-protein coupled receptors (GPCRs) constitute a major class of proteins responsible for transducing a signal within a cell. GPCRs have three structural domains: an amino terminal extracellular domain, a transmembrane domain containing seven transmembrane segments, three extracellular loops, and three intracellular loops, and a carboxy terminal intracellular domain. Upon binding of a ligand to an extracellular portion of a GPCR, a signal is transduced within the cell that results in a change in a biological or physiological property of the cell. GPCRs, along with G-proteins and effectors (intracellular enzymes and channels modulated by G-proteins), are the components of a modular signaling system that connects the state of intracellular second messengers to extracellular inputs.

[0630] GPCR genes and gene-products are potential causative agents of disease (Spiegel et al., J. Clin. Invest. 92:1119-1125 (1993); McKusick et al., J. Med. Genet. 30:1-26(1993)). Specific defects in the rhodopsin gene and the V2 vasopressin receptor gene have been shown to cause various forms of retinitis pigmentosum (Nathans et al., Annu. Rev. Genet. 26:403-424(1992)), and nephrogenic diabetes insipidus (Holtzman et al., Hum. Mol. Genet. 2:1201-1204 (1993)). These receptors are of critical importance to both the central nervous system and peripheral physiological processes. Evolutionary analyses suggest that the ancestor of these proteins originally developed in concert with complex body plans and nervous systems.

[0631] The GPCR protein superfamily can be divided into five families: Family I, receptors typified by rhodopsin and the P2-adrenergic receptor and currently represented by over 200 unique members (Dohlman et al., Annu. Rev. Biochem. 60:653-688 (1991)); Family II, the parathyroid hormone/calcitonin/secretin receptor family (Juppner et al., Science 254:1024-1026 (1991); Lin et al., Science 254:1022-1024 (1991)); Family Im, the metabotropic glutamate receptor family (Nakanishi, Science 258 597:603 (1992)); Family IV, the cAMP receptor family, important in the chemotaxis and development of D. discoideum (Klein et al., Science 241:1467-1472 (1988)); and Family V, the fungal mating pheromone receptors such as STE2 (Kujan, Annu. Rev. Biochem. 61:1097-1129 (1992)).

[0632] There are also a small number of other proteins which present seven putative hydrophobic segments and appear to be unrelated to GPCRs; they have not been shown to couple to G-proteins. Drosophila expresses a photoreceptor-specific protein, bride of sevenless (boss), a seven-transmembrane-segment protein which has been extensively studied and does not show evidence of being a GPCR (Hart et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5047-5051 (1993)). The gene frizzled (fz) in Drosophila is also thought to be a protein with seven transmembrane segments. Like boss, fz has not been shown to couple to G-proteins (Vinson et al., Nature 338:263-264 (1989)).

[0633] G proteins represent a family of heterotrimeric proteins composed of α, β and γ subunits, that bind guanine nucleotides. These proteins are usually linked to cell surface receptors, e.g., receptors containing seven transmembrane segments. Following ligand binding to the GPCR, a conformational change is transmitted to the G protein, which causes the α-subunit to exchange a bound GDP molecule for a GTP molecule and to dissociate from the βγ-subunits. The GTP-bound form of the α-subunit typically functions as an effector-modulating moiety, leading to the production of second messengers, such as cAMP (e.g., by activation of adenyl cyclase), diacylglycerol or inositol phosphates. Greater than different types of α-subunits are known in humans. These subunits associate with a smaller pool of β and γ subunits. Examples of mammalian G proteins include Gi, Go, Gq, Gs and Gt. G proteins are described extensively in Lodish et al., Molecular Cell Biology, (Scientific American Books Inc., New York, N.Y., 1995), the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. GPCRs, G proteins and G protein-linked effector and second messenger systems have been reviewed in The G-Protein Linked Receptor Fact Book, Watson et al., eds., Academic Press (1994).

[0634] GPCRs are a major target for drug action and development. Accordingly, it is valuable to the field of pharmaceutical development to identify and characterize previously unknown GPCRs. The present invention advances the state of the art by providing a previously unidentified human GPCR.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

[0635] It is an object of the invention to identify novel GPCRs.

[0636] It is a further object of the invention to provide novel GPCR polypeptides that are useful as reagents or targets in receptor assays applicable to treatment and diagnosis of GPCR-mediated disorders.

[0637] It is a further object of the invention to provide polynucleotides corresponding to the novel GPCR receptor polypeptides that are useful as targets and reagents in receptor assays applicable to treatment and diagnosis of GPCR-mediated disorders and useful for producing novel receptor polypeptides by recombinant methods.

[0638] A specific object of the invention is to identify compounds that act as agonists and antagonists and modulate the expression of the novel receptor.

[0639] A further specific object of the invention is to provide compounds that modulate expression of the receptor for treatment and diagnosis of GPCR-related disorders.

[0640] The invention is thus based on the identification of a novel GPCR, designated the 17723 receptor.

[0641] The invention provides isolated 17723 receptor polypeptides including a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 10, or the amino acid sequence encoded by the cDNA deposited as ATCC Patent Deposit No. PTA-2688 on Nov. 17, 2000 (“the deposited cDNA”).

[0642] The invention also provides isolated 17723 receptor nucleic acid molecules having the sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 11 or in the deposited cDNA.

[0643] The invention also provides variant polypeptides having an amino acid sequence that is substantially homologous to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 10 or encoded by the deposited cDNA.

[0644] The invention also provides variant nucleic acid sequences that are substantially homologous to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 11 or in the deposited cDNA.

[0645] The invention also provides fragments of the polypeptide shown in SEQ ID NO: 10 and nucleotide shown in SEQ ID NO: 11, as well as substantially homologous fragments of the polypeptide or nucleic acid.

[0646] The invention also provides vectors and host cells for expressing the receptor nucleic acid molecules and polypeptides and particularly recombinant vectors and host cells.

[0647] The invention also provides methods of making the vectors and host cells and methods for using them to produce the receptor nucleic acid molecules and polypeptides.

[0648] The invention also provides antibodies that selectively bind the receptor polypeptides and fragments.

[0649] The invention also provides methods of screening for compounds that modulate the activity of the receptor polypeptides. Modulation can be at the level of the polypeptide receptor or at the level of controlling the expression of nucleic acid (RNA or DNA) expressing the receptor polypeptide.

[0650] The invention also provides a process for modulating receptor polypeptide activity, especially using the screened compounds, including to treat conditions related to expression of the receptor polypeptides.

[0651] The invention also provides diagnostic assays for determining the presence of and level of the receptor polypeptides or nucleic acid molecules in a biological sample.

[0652] The invention also provides diagnostic assays for determining the presence of a mutation in the receptor polypeptides or nucleic acid molecules.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

[0653] The present inventions now will be described more fully hereinafter with reference to the accompanying drawings, in which some, but not all embodiments of the invention are shown. Indeed, these inventions may be embodied in many different forms and should not be construed as limited to the embodiments set forth herein; rather, these embodiments are provided so that this disclosure will satisfy applicable legal requirements. Like numbers refer to like elements throughout.

[0654] Many modifications and other embodiments of the inventions set forth herein will come to mind to one skilled in the art to which these inventions pertain having the benefit of the teachings presented in the foregoing descriptions and the associated drawings. Therefore, it is to be understood that the inventions are not to be limited to the specific embodiments disclosed and that modifications and other embodiments are intended to be included within the scope of the appended claims. Although specific terms are employed herein, they are used in a generic and descriptive sense only and not for purposes of limitation.

[0655] Receptor Function/Signal Pathway

[0656] The 17723 receptor protein is a GPCR that participates in signaling pathways. As used herein, a “signaling pathway” refers to the modulation (e.g., stimulation or inhibition) of a cellular function/activity upon the binding of a ligand to the GPCR (17723 protein). Examples of such functions include mobilization of intracellular molecules that participate in a signal transduction pathway, e.g., phosphatidylinositol 4,5-bisphosphate (PIP2), inositol 1,4,5-triphosphate (IP3) and adenylate cyclase; polarization of the plasma membrane; production or secretion of molecules; alteration in the structure of a cellular component; cell proliferation, e.g., synthesis of DNA; cell migration; cell differentiation; and cell survival. Since the 17723 receptor protein is expressed in heart, brain, thymus, esophagus, and uterus, cells participating in a 17723 receptor protein signaling pathway include, but are not limited to cells derived from these tissues.

[0657] The response mediated by the receptor protein depends on the type of cell. For example, in some cells, binding of a ligand to the receptor protein may stimulate an activity such as release of compounds, gating of a channel, cellular adhesion, migration, differentiation, etc., through phosphatidylinositol or cyclic AMP metabolism and turnover while in other cells, the binding of the ligand will produce a different result. Regardless of the cellular activity/response modulated by the receptor protein, it is universal that the protein is a GPCR and interacts with G proteins to produce one or more secondary signals, in a variety of intracellular signal transduction pathways, e.g., through phosphatidylinositol or cyclic AMP metabolism and turnover, in a cell.

[0658] As used herein, “phosphatidylinositol turnover and metabolism” refers to the molecules involved in the turnover and metabolism of phosphatidylinositol 4,5-bisphosphate (PIP2) as well as to the activities of these molecules. PIP2 is a phospholipid found in the cytosolic leaflet of the plasma membrane. Binding of ligand to the receptor activates, in some cells, the plasma-membrane enzyme phospholipase C that in turn can hydrolyze PIP2 to produce 1,2-diacylglycerol (DAG) and inositol 1,4,5-triphosphate (IP3). Once formed IP3 can diffuse to the endoplasmic reticulum surface where it can bind an IP3 receptor, e.g., a calcium channel protein containing an IP3 binding site. IP3 binding can induce opening of the channel, allowing calcium ions to be released into the cytoplasm. IP3 can also be phosphorylated by a specific kinase to form inositol 1,3,4,5-tetraphosphate (IP4), a molecule which can cause calcium entry into the cytoplasm from the extracellular medium. IP3 and IP4 can subsequently be hydrolyzed very rapidly to the inactive products inositol 1,4-biphosphate (IP2) and inositol 1,3,4-triphosphate, respectively. These inactive products can be recycled by the cell to synthesize PIP2. The other second messenger produced by the hydrolysis of PIP2, namely 1,2-diacylglycerol (DAG), remains in the cell membrane where it can serve to activate the enzyme protein kinase C. Protein kinase C is usually found soluble in the cytoplasm of the cell, but upon an increase in the intracellular calcium concentration, this enzyme can move to the plasma membrane where it can be activated by DAG. The activation of protein kinase C in different cells results in various cellular responses such as the phosphorylation of glycogen synthase, or the phosphorylation of various transcription factors, e.g., NF-kB. The language “phosphatidylinositol activity”, as used herein, refers to an activity of PIP2 or one of its metabolites.

[0659] Another signaling pathway in which the receptor may participate is the cAMP turnover pathway. As used herein, “cyclic AMP turnover and metabolism” refers to the molecules involved in the turnover and metabolism of cyclic AMP (cAMP) as well as to the activities of these molecules. Cyclic AMP is a second messenger produced in response to ligand-induced stimulation of certain G protein coupled receptors. In the cAMP signaling pathway, binding of a ligand to a GPCR can lead to the activation of the enzyme adenyl cyclase, which catalyzes the synthesis of cAMP. The newly synthesized cAMP can in turn activate a cAMP-dependent protein kinase. This activated kinase can phosphorylate a voltage-gated potassium channel protein, or an associated protein, and lead to the inability of the potassium channel to open during an action potential. The inability of the potassium channel to open results in a decrease in the outward flow of potassium, which normally repolarizes the membrane of a neuron, leading to prolonged membrane depolarization.

[0660] Polypeptides

[0661] The invention is based on the discovery of a novel G-coupled protein receptor. Specifically, an expressed sequence tag (EST) was selected based on homology to G-protein-coupled receptor sequences. This EST was used to design primers based on sequences that it contains and used to identify a cDNA from a human heart cDNA library. Positive clones were sequenced and the overlapping fragments were assembled. Analysis of the assembled sequence revealed that the cloned cDNA molecule encodes a G-protein coupled receptor.

[0662] The invention thus relates to a novel GPCR having the deduced amino acid sequence shown in FIG. 16A-16B (SEQ ID NO: 10) or having the amino acid sequence encoded by the deposited cDNA, ATCC Patent Deposit No. PTA-2688.

[0663] The deposit will be maintained under the terms of the Budapest Treaty on the International Recognition of the Deposit of Microorganisms. The deposit is provided as a convenience to those of skill in the art and is not an admission that a deposit is required under 35 U.S.C. § 112. The deposited sequence, as well as the polypeptide encoded by the sequence, is incorporated herein by reference and controls in the event of any conflict, such as a sequencing error, with description in this application.

[0664] The “17723 receptor polypeptide” or “17723 receptor protein” refers to the polypeptide in SEQ ID NO: 10 or encoded by the deposited cDNA. The term “receptor protein” or “receptor polypeptide”, however, further includes the numerous variants described herein, as well as fragments derived from the full length 17723 polypeptide and variants.

[0665] The present invention thus provides an isolated or purified 17723 receptor polypeptide and variants and fragments thereof.

[0666] The 17723 polypeptide is a 402 residue protein exhibiting three main structural domains. The amino terminal extracellular domain is identified to be within residues 1 to about 43 in SEQ ID NO: 10. The transmembrane domain is identified to be within residues from about 44 to about 307 in SEQ ID NO: 10. The carboxyterminal intracellular domain is identified to be within residues from about 308 to 402 in SEQ ID NO: 10. The transmembrane domain contains seven segments that span the membrane. The transmembrane segments are found from about amino acid 44 to about amino acid 67, from about amino acid 78 to about amino acid 100, from about amino acid 119 to about amino acid 137, from about amino acid 157 to about amino acid 176, from about amino acid 202 to about amino acid 226, from about amino acid 256 to about amino acid 279, and from about amino acid 287 to about amino acid 307. Within the region spanning the entire transmembrane domain are three intracellular and three extracellular loops. The three intracellular loops are found from about amino acid 68 to about amino acid 77, from about amino acid 138 to about amino acid 156, and from about amino acid 227 to about amino acid 255. The three extracellular loops are found at from about amino acid 101 to about amino acid 118, from about amino acid 177 to about amino acid 201, and from about amino acid 280 to about amino acid 286.

[0667] The transmembrane domain includes a GPCR signal transduction signature, ERY, at residues 138-140. The sequence includes an arginine at residue 139, an invariant amino acid in GPCRs.

[0668] As used herein, a polypeptide is said to be “isolated” or “purified” when it is substantially free of cellular material when it is isolated from recombinant and non-recombinant cells, or free of chemical precursors or other chemicals when it is chemically synthesized. A polypeptide, however, can be joined to another polypeptide with which it is not normally associated in a cell and still be considered “isolated” or “purified.”

[0669] The receptor polypeptides can be purified to homogeneity. It is understood, however, that preparations in which the polypeptide is not purified to homogeneity are useful and considered to contain an isolated form of the polypeptide. The critical feature is that the preparation allows for the desired function of the polypeptide, even in the presence of considerable amounts of other components. Thus, the invention encompasses various degrees of purity.

[0670] In one embodiment, the language “substantially free of cellular material” includes preparations of the receptor polypeptide having less than about 30% (by dry weight) other proteins (i.e., contaminating protein), less than about 20% other proteins, less than about 10% other proteins, or less than about 5% other proteins. When the receptor polypeptide is recombinantly produced, it can also be substantially free of culture medium, i.e., culture medium represents less than about 20%, less than about 10%, or less than about 5% of the volume of the protein preparation.

[0671] The language “substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals” includes preparations of the receptor polypeptide in which it is separated from chemical precursors or other chemicals that are involved in its synthesis. In one embodiment, the language “substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals” includes preparations of the polypeptide having less than about 30% (by dry weight) chemical precursors or other chemicals, less than about 20% chemical precursors or other chemicals, less than about 10% chemical precursors or other chemicals, or less than about 5% chemical precursors or other chemicals.

[0672] In one embodiment, the receptor polypeptide comprises the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 10. However, the invention also encompasses sequence variants. Variants include a substantially homologous protein encoded by the same genetic locus in an organism, i.e., an allelic variant. The 17723 receptor has been mapped to chromosome 1 q42-44. Variants also encompass proteins derived from other genetic loci in an organism, but having substantial homology to the 17723 receptor protein of SEQ ID NO: 10. Variants also include proteins substantially homologous to the 17723 receptor protein but derived from another organism, i.e., an ortholog. Variants also include proteins that are substantially homologous to the 17723 receptor protein that are produced by chemical synthesis. Variants also include proteins that are substantially homologous to the 17723 receptor protein that are produced by recombinant methods. It is understood, however, that variants exclude any amino acid sequences disclosed prior to the invention.

[0673] As used herein, two proteins (or a region of the proteins) are substantially homologous when the amino acid sequences are at least about 50-55%, 55-60%, typically at least about 70-75%, more typically at least about 80-85%, and most typically at least about 90-95% or more homologous. A substantially homologous amino acid sequence, according to the present invention, will be encoded by a nucleic acid sequence hybridizing to the nucleic acid sequence, or portion thereof, of the sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 11 under stringent conditions as more fully described below.

[0674] To determine the percent identity of two amino acid sequences or of two nucleic acid sequences, the sequences are aligned for optimal comparison purposes (e.g., gaps can be introduced in one or both of a first and a second amino acid or nucleic acid sequence for optimal alignment and non-homologous sequences can be disregarded for comparison purposes). In a preferred embodiment, the length of a reference sequence aligned for comparison purposes is at least 30%, preferably at least 40%, more preferably at least 50%, even more preferably at least 60%, and even more preferably at least 70%, 80%, or 90% of the length of the reference sequence (e.g., when aligning a second sequence to the amino acid sequences herein having 402 amino acid residues, at least 120, preferably at least 160, more preferably at least 200, even more preferably at least 240, and even more preferably at least 280, 320, and 360 amino acid residues are aligned). The amino acid residues or nucleotides at corresponding amino acid positions or nucleotide positions are then compared. When a position in the first sequence is occupied by the same amino acid residue or nucleotide as the corresponding position in the second sequence, then the molecules are identical at that position (as used herein amino acid or nucleic acid “identity” is equivalent to amino acid or nucleic acid “homology”). The percent identity between the two sequences is a function of the number of identical positions shared by the sequences, taking into account the number of gaps, and the length of each gap, which need to be introduced for optimal alignment of the two sequences.

[0675] The invention also encompasses polypeptides having a lower degree of identity but having sufficient similarity so as to perform one or more of the same functions performed by the 17723 polypeptide. Similarity is determined by conserved amino acid substitution. Such substitutions are those that substitute a given amino acid in a polypeptide by another amino acid of like characteristics. Conservative substitutions are likely to be phenotypically silent. Typically seen as conservative substitutions are the replacements, one for another, among the aliphatic amino acids Ala, Val, Leu, and Ile; interchange of the hydroxyl residues Ser and Thr, exchange of the acidic residues Asp and Glu, substitution between the amide residues Asn and Gln, exchange of the basic residues Lys and Arg and replacements among the aromatic residues Phe, Tyr. Guidance concerning which amino acid changes are likely to be phenotypically silent are found in Bowie et al., Science 247:1306-1310 (1990).

4TABLE 1Conservative Amino Acid Substitutions.AromaticPhenylalanineTryptophanTyrosineHydrophobicLeucineIsoleucineValinePolarGlutamineAsparagineBasicArginineLysineHistidineAcidicAspartic AcidGlutamic AcidSmallAlanineSerineThreonineMethionineGlycine

[0676] The comparison of sequences and determination of percent identity and similarity between two sequences can be accomplished using a mathematical algorithm. (Computational Molecular Biology, Lesk, A. M., ed., Oxford University Press, New York, 1988; Biocomputing: Informatics and Genome Projects, Smith, D. W., ed., Academic Press, New York, 1993; Computer Analysis of Sequence Data, Part 1, Griffin, A. M., and Griffin, H. G., eds., Humana Press, New Jersey, 1994; Sequence Analysis in Molecular Biology, von Heinje, G., Academic Press, 1987; and Sequence Analysis Primer, Gribskov, M. and Devereux, J., eds., M Stockton Press, New York, 1991). In a preferred embodiment, the percent identity between two amino acid sequences is determined using the Needleman and Wunsch (J. Mol. Biol. (48):444-453 (1970)) algorithm which has been incorporated into the GAP program in the GCG software package (available at www.gcg.com), using either a Blossom 62 matrix or a PAM250 matrix, and a gap weight of 16, 14, 12, 10, 8, 6, or 4 and a length weight of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In yet another preferred embodiment, the percent identity between two nucleotide sequences is determined using the GAP program in the GCG software package (Devereux, J., et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 12(1):387 (1984)) (available at www.gcg.com), using a NWSgapdna.CMP matrix and a gap weight of 40, 50, 60, 70, or 80 and a length weight of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In another embodiment, the percent identity between two amino acid or nucleotide sequences is determined using the algorithm of E. Meyers and W. Miller (CABIOS, 4:11-17 (1989)) which has been incorporated into the ALIGN program (version 2.0), using a PAM120 weight residue table, a gap length penalty of 12 and a gap penalty of 4.

[0677] The nucleic acid and protein sequences of the present invention can further be used as a “query sequence” to perform a search against public databases to, for example, identify other family members or related sequences. Such searches can be performed using the NBLAST and XBLAST programs (version 2.0) of Altschul, et al. (1990) J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-10. BLAST nucleotide searches can be performed with the NBLAST program, score=100, wordlength=12 to obtain nucleotide sequences homologous to the nucleic acid molecules of the invention. BLAST protein searches can be performed with the XBLAST program, score=50, wordlength=3 to obtain amino acid sequences homologous to the proteins of the invention. To obtain gapped alignments for comparison purposes, Gapped BLAST can be utilized as described in Altschul et al., (1997) Nucleic Acids Res. 25(17):3389-3402. When utilizing BLAST and Gapped BLAST programs, the default parameters of the respective programs (e.g., XBLAST and NBLAST) can be used. See www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov.

[0678] A variant polypeptide can differ in amino acid sequence by one or more substitutions, deletions, insertions, inversions, fusions, and truncations or a combination of any of these.

[0679] Variant polypeptides can be fully functional or can lack function in one or more activities. Thus, in the present case, variations can affect the function, for example, of one or more of the regions corresponding to ligand binding, membrane association, G-protein binding and signal transduction.

[0680] Fully functional variants typically contain only conservative variation or variation in non-critical residues or in non-critical regions. Functional variants can also contain substitution of similar amino acids which result in no change or an insignificant change in function. Alternatively, such substitutions may positively or negatively affect function to some degree.

[0681] Non-functional variants typically contain one or more non-conservative amino acid substitutions, deletions, insertions, inversions, or truncation or a substitution, insertion, inversion, or deletion in a critical residue or critical region.

[0682] As indicated, variants can be naturally-occurring or can be made by recombinant means or chemical synthesis to provide useful and novel characteristics for the receptor polypeptide. This includes preventing immunogenicity from pharmaceutical formulations by preventing protein aggregation.

[0683] Useful variations further include alteration of ligand binding characteristics. For example, one embodiment involves a variation at the binding site that results in binding but not release, or slower release, of ligand. A further useful variation at the same sites can result in a higher affinity for ligand. Useful variations also include changes that provide for affinity for another ligand. Another useful variation includes one that allows binding but which prevents activation by the ligand. Another useful variation includes variation in the transmembrane G-protein-binding/signal transduction domain that provides for reduced or increased binding by the appropriate G-protein or for binding by a different G-protein than the one with which the receptor is normally associated. Another useful variation provides a fusion protein in which one or more domains or subregions is operationally fused to one or more domains or subregions from another G-protein coupled receptor.

[0684] Amino acids that are essential for function can be identified by methods known in the art, such as site-directed mutagenesis or alanine-scanning mutagenesis (Cunningham et al., Science 244:1081-1085 (1989)). The latter procedure introduces single alanine mutations at every residue in the molecule. The resulting mutant molecules are then tested for biological activity such as receptor binding or in vitro, or in vitro proliferative activity. Sites that are critical for ligand-receptor binding can also be determined by structural analysis such as crystallization, nuclear magnetic resonance or photoaffinity labeling (Smith et al., J. Mol. Biol. 224:899-904 (1992); de Vos et al. Science 255:306-312 (1992)).

[0685] Substantial homology can be to the entire nucleic acid or amino acid sequence or to fragments of these sequences.

[0686] The invention thus also includes polypeptide fragments of the 17723 receptor protein. Fragments can be derived from the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 10. However, the invention also encompasses fragments of the variants of the 17723 receptor protein as described herein.

[0687] The fragments to which the invention pertains, however, are not to be construed as encompassing fragments that may be disclosed prior to the present invention.

[0688] As used herein, a fragment comprises at least 9, 12 contiguous amino acids. Fragments retain one or more of the biological activities of the protein, for example the ability to bind to a G-protein or ligand, as well as fragments that can be used as an immunogen to generate receptor antibodies.

[0689] Biologically active fragments (peptides which are, for example, 9, 12, 15, 20, 30, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 50, 100 or more amino acids in length) can comprise a domain or motif, e.g., an extracellular or intracellular domain or loop, one or more transmembrane segments, or parts thereof, G-protein binding site, or GPCR signature, glycosylation sites, cAMP- and cGMP-dependent phosphorylation sites, protein kinase C phosphorylation sites, and casein kinase II phosphorylation sites, and N-myristoylation sites.

[0690] Possible fragments include, but are not limited to: 1) soluble peptides comprising the entire amino terminal extracellular domain amino acid 1 to about amino acid 43 of SEQ ID NO: 10 or parts thereof; 2) peptides comprising the entire carboxy terminal intracellular domain from about amino acid 308 to amino acid 402 of SEQ ID NO: 10 or parts thereof, 3) peptides comprising the region spanning the entire transmembrane domain from about amino acid 44 to amino acid 307; 4) any of the specific transmembrane segments, or parts thereof; 5) any of the three intracellular or three extracellular loops, or parts thereof

[0691] Possible fragments include, but are not limited to: 1) soluble peptides comprising the entire amino terminal extracellular domain about amino acid 1 to about amino acid 43 of SEQ ID NO: 10, or parts thereof; 2) peptides comprising the entire carboxy terminal intracellular domain from about amino acid 308 to amino acid 402 of SEQ ID NO: 10, or parts thereof; 3) peptides comprising the region spanning the entire transmembrane domain from about amino acid 44 to about amino acid 307, or parts thereof; 4) any of the specific transmembrane segments, or parts thereof, from about amino acid 44 to about amino acid 67, from about amino acid 78 to about amino acid 100, from about amino acid 119 to about amino acid 137, from about amino acid 157 to about amino acid 176, from about amino acid 202 to about amino acid 226, from about amino acid 256 to about amino acid 279, and from about amino acid 287 to about amino acid 307; 5) any of the three intracellular or three extracellular loops, or parts thereof, from about amino acid 68 to about amino acid 77, from about amino acid 138 to about amino acid 156, from about amino acid 227 to about amino acid 255, from about amino acid 101 to about amino acid 118, from about amino acid 177 to about amino acid 201, and from about amino acid 280 to about amino acid 286. Fragments further include combinations of the above fragments, such as an amino terminal domain combined with one or more transmembrane segments and the attendant extra or intracellular loops or one or more transmembrane segments, and the attendant intra or extracellular loops, plus the carboxy terminal domain. Thus, any of the above fragments can be combined. Other fragments include the mature protein from about amino acid 6 to 402. Other fragments contain the various functional sites described herein. Fragments, for example, can extend in one or both directions from the functional site to encompass 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, or up to 100 amino acids. Further, fragments can include sub-fragments of the specific domains mentioned above, which sub-fragments retain the function of the domain from which they are derived.

[0692] Fragments also include antigenic fragments and specifically those shown to have a high antigenic index in FIG. 18.

[0693] Accordingly, possible fragments include fragments defining a ligand-binding site, fragments defining a phosphorylation site, fragments defining membrane association, fragments defining myristoylation sites, fragments defining interaction with G proteins and signal transduction, and fragments defining glycosylation sites. By this is intended a discrete fragment that provides the relevant function or allows the relevant function to be identified. In a preferred embodiment, the fragment contains the ligand-binding site.

[0694] The invention also provides fragments with immunogenic properties. These contain an epitope-bearing portion of the 17723 receptor protein and variants. These epitope-bearing peptides are useful to raise antibodies that bind specifically to a receptor polypeptide or region or fragment. These peptides can contain at least 9, 12, at least 14, or between at least about 15 to about 30 amino acids.

[0695] Non-limiting examples of antigenic polypeptides that can be used to generate antibodies include peptides derived from the amino terminal extracellular domain or any of the extracellular loops. Regions having a high antigenicity index are shown in FIG. 18. However, intracellularly-made antibodies (“intrabodies”) are also encompassed, which would recognize intracellular receptor peptide regions.

[0696] The receptor polypeptides (including variants and fragments which may have been disclosed prior to the present invention) are useful for biological assays related to GPCRs. Such assays involve any of the known GPCR functions or activities or properties useful for diagnosis and treatment of GPCR-related conditions.

[0697] The epitope-bearing receptor and polypeptides may be produced by any conventional means (Houghten, R. A., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:5131-5135 (1985)). Simultaneous multiple peptide synthesis is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,631,211.

[0698] Fragments can be discrete (not fused to other amino acids or polypeptides) or can be within a larger polypeptide. Further, several fragments can be comprised within a single larger polypeptide. In one embodiment a fragment designed for expression in a host can have heterologous pre- and pro-polypeptide regions fused to the amino terminus of the receptor fragment and an additional region fused to the carboxyl terminus of the fragment.

[0699] The invention thus provides chimeric or fusion proteins. These comprise a receptor protein operatively linked to a heterologous protein having an amino acid sequence not substantially homologous to the receptor protein. “Operatively linked” indicates that the receptor protein and the heterologous protein are fused in-frame. The heterologous protein can be fused to the N-terminus or C-terminus of the receptor protein.

[0700] In one embodiment the fusion protein does not affect receptor function per se. For example, the fusion protein can be a GST-fusion protein in which the receptor sequences are fused to the C-terminus of the GST sequences. Other types of fusion proteins include, but are not limited to, enzymatic fusion proteins, for example beta-galactosidase fusions, yeast two-hybrid GAL fusions, poly-His fusions and Ig fusions. Such fusion proteins, particularly poly-His fusions, can facilitate the purification of recombinant receptor protein. In certain host cells (e.g., mammalian host cells), expression and/or secretion of a protein can be increased by using a heterologous signal sequence. Therefore, in another embodiment, the fusion protein contains a heterologous signal sequence at its N-terminus.

[0701] EP-A-O 464 533 discloses fusion proteins comprising various portions of immunoglobulin constant regions. The Fc is useful in therapy and diagnosis and thus results, for example, in improved pharmacokinetic properties (EP-A 0232 262). In drug discovery, for example, human proteins have been fused with Fc portions for the purpose of high-throughput screening assays to identify antagonists. Bennett et al. (J. Mol. Recog. 8:52-58 (1995)) and Johanson et al. (J. Biol. Chem. 270, 16:9459-9471 (1995)). Thus, this invention also encompasses soluble fusion proteins containing a receptor polypeptide and various portions of the constant regions of heavy or light chains of immunoglobulins of various subclass (IgG, IgM, IgA, IgE). Preferred as immunoglobulin is the constant part of the heavy chain of human IgG, particularly IgG1, where fusion takes place at the hinge region. For some uses it is desirable to remove the Fc after the fusion protein has been used for its intended purpose, for example when the fusion protein is to be used as antigen for immunizations. In a particular embodiment, the Fc part can be removed in a simple way by a cleavage sequence which is also incorporated and can be cleaved with factor Xa.

[0702] A chimeric or fusion protein can be produced by standard recombinant DNA techniques. For example, DNA fragments coding for the different protein sequences are ligated together in-frame in accordance with conventional techniques. In another embodiment, the fusion gene can be synthesized by conventional techniques including automated DNA synthesizers. Alternatively, PCR amplification of gene fragments can be carried out using anchor primers which give rise to complementary overhangs between two consecutive gene fragments which can subsequently be annealed and re-amplified to generate a chimeric gene sequence (see Ausubel et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, 1992). Moreover, many expression vectors are commercially available that already encode a fusion moiety (e.g., a GST protein). A receptor protein-encoding nucleic acid can be cloned into such an expression vector such that the fusion moiety is linked in-frame to the receptor protein.

[0703] Another form of fusion protein is one that directly affects receptor functions. Accordingly, a receptor polypeptide is encompassed by the present invention in which one or more of the receptor domains (or parts thereof) has been replaced by homologous domains (or parts thereof) from another G-protein coupled receptor or other type of receptor. Accordingly, various permutations are possible. The amino terminal extracellular domain, or subregion thereof, (for example, ligand-binding) can be replaced with the domain or subregion from another ligand-binding receptor protein. Alternatively, the entire transmembrane domain, or any of the seven segments or loops, or parts thereof, for example, G-protein-binding/signal transduction, can be replaced. Finally, the carboxy terminal intracellular domain or subregion can be replaced. Thus, chimeric receptors can be formed in which one or more of the native domains or subregions has been replaced.

[0704] The isolated receptor protein can be purified from cells that naturally express it, such as from heart, brain, thymus, esophagus, and uterus, purified from cells that have been altered to express it (recombinant), or synthesized using known protein synthesis methods.

[0705] In one embodiment, the protein is produced by recombinant DNA techniques. For example, a nucleic acid molecule encoding the receptor polypeptide is cloned into an expression vector, the expression vector introduced into a host cell and the protein expressed in the host cell. The protein can then be isolated from the cells by an appropriate purification scheme using standard protein purification techniques. Polypeptides often contain amino acids other than the 20 amino acids commonly referred to as the 20 naturally-occurring amino acids. Further, many amino acids, including the terminal amino acids, may be modified by natural processes, such as processing and other post-translational modifications, or by chemical modification techniques well known in the art. Common modifications that occur naturally in polypeptides are described in basic texts, detailed monographs, and the research literature, and they are well known to those of skill in the art.

[0706] Accordingly, the polypeptides also encompass derivatives or analogs in which a substituted amino acid residue is not one encoded by the genetic code, in which a substituent group is included, in which the mature polypeptide is fused with another compound, such as a compound to increase the half-life of the polypeptide (for example, polyethylene glycol), or in which the additional amino acids are fused to the mature polypeptide, such as a leader or secretory sequence or a sequence for purification of the mature polypeptide or a pro-protein sequence.

[0707] Known modifications include, but are not limited to, acetylation, acylation, ADP-ribosylation, amidation, covalent attachment of flavin, covalent attachment of a heme moiety, covalent attachment of a nucleotide or nucleotide derivative, covalent attachment of a lipid or lipid derivative, covalent attachment of phosphatidylinositol, cross-linking, cyclization, disulfide bond formation, demethylation, formation of covalent crosslinks, formation of cystine, formation of pyroglutamate, formylation, gamma carboxylation, glycosylation, GPI anchor formation, hydroxylation, iodination, methylation, myristoylation, oxidation, proteolytic processing, phosphorylation, prenylation, racemization, selenoylation, sulfation, transfer-RNA mediated addition of amino acids to proteins such as arginylation, and ubiquitination.

[0708] Such modifications are well known to those of skill in the art and have been described in great detail in the scientific literature. Several particularly common modifications, glycosylation, lipid attachment, sulfation, gamma-carboxylation of glutamic acid residues, hydroxylation and ADP-ribosylation, for instance, are described in most basic texts, such as Proteins—Structure and Molecular Properties, 2nd Ed., T. E. Creighton, W. H. Freeman and Company, New York (1993). Many detailed reviews are available on this subject, such as by Wold, F., Posttranslational Covalent Modification of proteins, B. C. Johnson, Ed., Academic Press, New York 1-12 (1983); Seifter et al. (Meth. Enzymol. 182: 626-646 (1990)) and Rattan et al. (Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci. 663:48-62 (1992)).

[0709] As is also well known, polypeptides are not always entirely linear. For instance, polypeptides may be branched as a result of ubiquitination, and they may be circular, with or without branching, generally as a result of post-translation events, including natural processing event and events brought about by human manipulation which do not occur naturally. Circular, branched and branched circular polypeptides may be synthesized by non-translational natural processes and by synthetic methods.

[0710] Modifications can occur anywhere in a polypeptide, including the peptide backbone, the amino acid side-chains and the amino or carboxyl termini. Blockage of the amino or carboxyl group in a polypeptide, or both, by a covalent modification, is common in naturally-occurring and synthetic polypeptides. For instance, the amino terminal residue of polypeptides made in E. coli, prior to proteolytic processing, almost invariably will be N-formylmethionine.

[0711] The modifications can be a function of how the protein is made. For recombinant polypeptides, for example, the modifications will be determined by the host cell posttranslational modification capacity and the modification signals in the polypeptide amino acid sequence. Accordingly, when glycosylation is desired, a polypeptide should be expressed in a glycosylating host, generally a eukaryotic cell. Insect cells often carry out the same posttranslational glycosylations as mammalian cells and, for this reason, insect cell expression systems have been developed to efficiently express mammalian proteins having native patterns of glycosylation. Similar considerations apply to other modifications.

[0712] The same type of modification may be present in the same or varying degree at several sites in a given polypeptide. Also, a given polypeptide may contain more than one type of modification.

[0713] Polypeptide Uses

[0714] The receptor polypeptides are useful for producing antibodies specific for the 17723 receptor protein, regions, or fragments. Regions having a high antigenicity index score are shown in FIG. 18.

[0715] The receptor polypeptides (including variants and fragments which may have been disclosed prior to the present invention) are useful for biological assays related to GPCRs. Such assays involve any of the known GPCR functions or activities or properties useful for diagnosis and treatment of GPCR-related conditions.

[0716] The receptor polypeptides are also useful in drug screening assays, in cell-based or cell-free systems. Cell-based systems can be native, i.e., cells that normally express the receptor protein, as a biopsy or expanded in cell culture. In one embodiment, however, cell-based assays involve recombinant host cells expressing the receptor protein.

[0717] The polypeptides can be used to identify compounds that modulate receptor activity. Both 17723 protein and appropriate variants and fragments can be used in high-throughput screens to assay candidate compounds for the ability to bind to the receptor. These compounds can be further screened against a functional receptor to determine the effect of the compound on the receptor activity. Compounds can be identified that activate (agonist) or inactivate (antagonist) the receptor to a desired degree.

[0718] The receptor polypeptides can be used to screen a compound for the ability to stimulate or inhibit interaction between the receptor protein and a target molecule that normally interacts with the receptor protein. The target can be ligand or a component of the signal pathway with which the receptor protein normally interacts (for example, a G-protein or other interactor involved in cAMP or phosphatidylinositol turnover and/or adenylate cyclase, or phospholipase C activation). The assay includes the steps of combining the receptor protein with a candidate compound under conditions that allow the receptor protein or fragment to interact with the target molecule, and to detect the formation of a complex between the protein and the target or to detect the biochemical consequence of the interaction with the receptor protein and the target, such as any of the associated effects of signal transduction such as G-protein phosphorylation, cyclic AMP or phosphatidylinositol turnover, and adenylate cyclase or phospholipase C activation.

[0719] Candidate compounds include, for example, 1) peptides such as soluble peptides, including Ig-tailed fusion peptides and members of random peptide libraries (see, e.g., Lam et al., Nature 354:82-84 (1991); Houghten et al., Nature 354:84-86 (1991)) and combinatorial chemistry-derived molecular libraries made of D- and/or L-configuration amino acids; 2) phosphopeptides (e.g., members of random and partially degenerate, directed phosphopeptide libraries, see, e.g., Songyang et al., Cell 72:767-778 (1993)); 3) antibodies (e.g., polyclonal, monoclonal, humanized, anti-idiotypic, chimeric, and single chain antibodies as well as Fab, F(ab′)2, Fab expression library fragments, and epitope-binding fragments of antibodies); and 4) small organic and inorganic molecules (e.g., molecules obtained from combinatorial and natural product libraries).

[0720] One candidate compound is a soluble full-length receptor or fragment that competes for ligand binding. Other candidate compounds include mutant receptors or appropriate fragments containing mutations that affect receptor function and thus compete for ligand. Accordingly, a fragment that competes for ligand, for example with a higher affinity, or a fragment that binds ligand but does not allow release, is encompassed by the invention.

[0721] The invention provides other end points to identify compounds that modulate (stimulate or inhibit) receptor activity. The assays typically involve an assay of events in the signal transduction pathway that indicate receptor activity. Thus, the expression of genes that are up- or down-regulated in response to the receptor protein dependent signal cascade can be assayed. In one embodiment, the regulatory region of such genes can be operably linked to a marker that is easily detectable, such as luciferase. Alternatively, phosphorylation of the receptor protein, or a receptor protein target, could also be measured.

[0722] Any of the biological or biochemical functions mediated by the receptor can be used as an endpoint assay. These include all of the biochemical or biochemical/biological events described herein, in the references cited herein, incorporated by reference for these endpoint assay targets, and other functions known to those of ordinary skill in the art.

[0723] Binding and/or activating compounds can also be screened by using chimeric receptor proteins in which the amino terminal extracellular domain, or parts thereof, the entire transmembrane domain or subregions, such as any of the seven transmembrane segments or any of the intracellular or extracellular loops and the carboxy terminal intracellular domain, or parts thereof, can be replaced by heterologous domains or subregions. For example, a G-protein-binding region can be used that interacts with a different G-protein than that which is recognized by the native receptor. Accordingly, a different set of signal transduction components is available as an end-point assay for activation. Alternatively, the entire transmembrane portion or subregions (such as transmembrane segments or intracellular or extracellular loops) can be replaced with the entire transmembrane portion or subregions specific to a host cell that is different from the host cell from which the amino terminal extracellular domain and/or the G-protein-binding region are derived. This allows for assays to be performed in other than the specific host cell from which the receptor is derived. Alternatively, the amino terminal extracellular domain (and/or other ligand-binding regions) could be replaced by a domain (and/or other binding region) binding a different ligand, thus, providing an assay for test compounds that interact with the heterologous amino terminal extracellular domain (or region) but still cause signal transduction. Finally, activation can be detected by a reporter gene containing an easily detectable coding region operably linked to a transcriptional regulatory sequence that is part of the native signal transduction pathway.

[0724] The receptor polypeptides are also useful in competition binding assays in methods designed to discover compounds that interact with the receptor. Thus, a compound is exposed to a receptor polypeptide under conditions that allow the compound to bind or to otherwise interact with the polypeptide. Soluble receptor polypeptide is also added to the mixture. If the test compound interacts with the soluble receptor polypeptide, it decreases the amount of complex formed or activity from the receptor target. This type of assay is particularly useful in cases in which compounds are sought that interact with specific regions of the receptor. Thus, the soluble polypeptide that competes with the target receptor region is designed to contain peptide sequences corresponding to the region of interest.

[0725] To perform cell free drug screening assays, it is desirable to immobilize either the receptor protein, or fragment, or its target molecule to facilitate separation of complexes from uncomplexed forms of one or both of the proteins, as well as to accommodate automation of the assay.

[0726] Techniques for immobilizing proteins on matrices can be used in the drug screening assays. In one embodiment, a fusion protein can be provided which adds a domain that allows the protein to be bound to a matrix. For example, glutathione-S-transferase/17723 fusion proteins can be adsorbed onto glutathione sepharose beads (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, Mo.) or glutathione derivatized microtitre plates, which are then combined with the cell lysates (e.g., 35S-labeled) and the candidate compound, and the mixture incubated under conditions conducive to complex formation (e.g., at physiological conditions for salt and pH). Following incubation, the beads are washed to remove any unbound label, and the matrix immobilized and radiolabel determined directly, or in the supernatant after the complexes are dissociated. Alternatively, the complexes can be dissociated from the matrix, separated by SDS-PAGE, and the level of receptor-binding protein found in the bead fraction quantitated from the gel using standard electrophoretic techniques. For example, either the polypeptide or its target molecule can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin using techniques well known in the art. Alternatively, antibodies reactive with the protein but which do not interfere with binding of the protein to its target molecule can be derivatized to the wells of the plate, and the protein trapped in the wells by antibody conjugation. Preparations of a receptor-binding protein and a candidate compound are incubated in the receptor protein-presenting wells and the amount of complex trapped in the well can be quantitated. Methods for detecting such complexes, in addition to those described above for the GST-immobilized complexes, include immunodetection of complexes using antibodies reactive with the receptor protein target molecule, or which are reactive with receptor protein and compete with the target molecule; as well as enzyme-linked assays which rely on detecting an enzymatic activity associated with the target molecule.

[0727] Modulators of receptor protein activity identified according to these drug screening assays can be used to treat a subject with a disorder mediated by the receptor pathway, by treating cells that express the 17723 protein, such as in heart, brain, thymus, esophagus, and uterus. These methods of treatment include the steps of administering the modulators of protein activity in a pharmaceutical composition as described herein, to a subject in need of such treatment.

[0728] The receptor polypeptides also are useful to provide a target for diagnosing a disease or predisposition to disease mediated by the receptor protein, especially in heart, brain, thymus, esophagus, and uterus. Accordingly, methods are provided for detecting the presence, or levels of, the receptor protein in a cell, tissue, or organism. The method involves contacting a biological sample with a compound capable of interacting with the receptor protein such that the interaction can be detected.

[0729] One agent for detecting receptor protein is an antibody capable of selectively binding to receptor protein. A biological sample includes tissues, cells and biological fluids isolated from a subject, as well as tissues, cells and fluids present within a subject.

[0730] The receptor protein also provides a target for diagnosing active disease, or predisposition to disease, in a patient having a variant receptor protein. Thus, receptor protein can be isolated from a biological sample, assayed for the presence of a genetic mutation that results in aberrant receptor protein. This includes amino acid substitution, deletion, insertion, rearrangement, (as the result of aberrant splicing events), and inappropriate post-translational modification. Analytic methods include altered electrophoretic mobility, altered tryptic peptide digest, altered receptor activity in cell-based or cell-free assay, alteration in ligand or antibody-binding pattern, altered isoelectric point, direct amino acid sequencing, and any other of the known assay techniques useful for detecting mutations in a protein.

[0731] In vitro techniques for detection of receptor protein include enzyme linked immunosorbent assays (ELISAs), Western blots, immunoprecipitations and immunofluorescence. Alternatively, the protein can be detected in vivo in a subject by introducing into the subject a labeled anti-receptor antibody. For example, the antibody can be labeled with a radioactive marker whose presence and location in a subject can be detected by standard imaging techniques. Particularly useful are methods which detect the allelic variant of a receptor protein expressed in a subject and methods which detect fragments of a receptor protein in a sample.

[0732] The receptor polypeptides are also useful in pharmacogenomic analysis. Pharmacogenomics deal with clinically significant hereditary variations in the response to drugs due to altered drug disposition and abnormal action in affected persons. See, e.g., Eichelbaum, M., Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Physiol. 23(10-11) :983-985 (1996), and Linder, M. W., Clin. Chem. 43(2):254-266 (1997). The clinical outcomes of these variations result in severe toxicity of therapeutic drugs in certain individuals or therapeutic failure of drugs in certain individuals as a result of individual variation in metabolism. Thus, the genotype of the individual can determine the way a therapeutic compound acts on the body or the way the body metabolizes the compound. Further, the activity of drug metabolizing enzymes effects both the intensity and duration of drug action. Thus, the pharmacogenomics of the individual permit the selection of effective compounds and effective dosages of such compounds for prophylactic or therapeutic treatment based on the individual's genotype. The discovery of genetic polymorphisms in some drug metabolizing enzymes has explained why some patients do not obtain the expected drug effects, show an exaggerated drug effect, or experience serious toxicity from standard drug dosages. Polymorphisms can be expressed in the phenotype of the extensive metabolizer and the phenotype of the poor metabolizer. Accordingly, genetic polymorphism may lead to allelic protein variants of the receptor protein in which one or more of the receptor functions in one population is different from those in another population. The polypeptides thus allow a target to ascertain a genetic predisposition that can affect treatment modality. Thus, in a ligand-based treatment, polymorphism may give rise to amino terminal extracellular domains and/or other ligand-binding regions that are more or less active in ligand binding, and receptor activation. Accordingly, ligand dosage would necessarily be modified to maximize the therapeutic effect within a given population containing a polymorphism. As an alternative to genotyping, specific polymorphic polypeptides could be identified.

[0733] The receptor polypeptides are also useful for monitoring therapeutic effects during clinical trials and other treatment. Thus, the therapeutic effectiveness of an agent that is designed to increase or decrease gene expression, protein levels or receptor activity can be monitored over the course of treatment using the receptor polypeptides as an end-point target.

[0734] The receptor polypeptides are also useful for treating a receptor-associated disorder. Accordingly, methods for treatment include the use of soluble receptor or fragments of the receptor protein that compete for ligand binding. These receptors or fragments can have a higher affinity for the ligand so as to provide effective competition.

[0735] Antibodies

[0736] The invention also provides antibodies that selectively bind to the 17723 receptor protein and its variants and fragments. An antibody is considered to selectively bind, even if it also binds to other proteins that are not substantially homologous with the receptor protein. These other proteins share homology with a fragment or domain of the receptor protein. This conservation in specific regions gives rise to antibodies that bind to both proteins by virtue of the homologous sequence. In this case, it would be understood that antibody binding to the receptor protein is still selective.

[0737] To generate antibodies, an isolated receptor polypeptide is used as an immunogen to generate antibodies using standard techniques for polyclonal and monoclonal antibody preparation. Either the full-length protein or antigenic peptide fragment can be used. Regions having a high antigenicity index are shown in FIG. 18.

[0738] Antibodies are preferably prepared from these regions or from discrete fragments in these regions. However, antibodies can be prepared from any region of the peptide as described herein. A preferred fragment produces an antibody that diminishes or completely prevents ligand-binding. Antibodies can be developed against the entire receptor or portions of the receptor, for example, the intracellular carboxy terminal domain, the amino terminal extracellular domain, the entire transmembrane domain or specific segments, any of the intra or extracellular loops, or any portions of the above. Antibodies may also be developed against specific functional sites, such as the site of ligand-binding, the site of G protein coupling, or sites that are glycosylated, phosphorylated, myristoylated, or otherwise modified as described herein.

[0739] An antigenic fragment will typically comprise at least 9 contiguous amino acid residues. The antigenic peptide can comprise, however, at least 12, at least 14 amino acid residues, at least 15 amino acid residues, at least 20 amino acid residues, or at least 30 amino acid residues. In one embodiment, fragments correspond to regions that are located on the surface of the protein, e.g., hydrophilic regions. These fragments are not to be construed, however, as encompassing any fragments which may be disclosed prior to the invention.

[0740] Antibodies can be polyclonal or monoclonal. An intact antibody, or a fragment thereof (e.g., Fab or F(ab′)2) can be used.

[0741] Detection can be facilitated by coupling (i.e., physically linking) the antibody to a detectable substance. Examples of detectable substances include various enzymes, prosthetic groups, fluorescent materials, luminescent materials, bioluminescent materials, and radioactive materials. Examples of suitable enzymes include horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, β-galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase; examples of suitable prosthetic group complexes include streptavidin/biotin and avidin/biotin; examples of suitable fluorescent materials include umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride or phycoerythrin; an example of a luminescent material includes luminol; examples of bioluminescent materials include luciferase, luciferin, and aequorin, and examples of suitable radioactive material include 125L, 131I, 35S or 3H.

[0742] An appropriate immunogenic preparation can be derived from native, recombinantly expressed, protein or chemically synthesized peptides.

[0743] Antibody Uses

[0744] The antibodies can be used to isolate a receptor protein by standard techniques, such as affinity chromatography or immunoprecipitation. The antibodies can facilitate the purification of the natural receptor protein from cells and recombinantly produced receptor protein expressed in host cells.

[0745] The antibodies are useful to detect the presence of receptor protein in cells or tissues to determine the pattern of expression of the receptor among various tissues in an organism and over the course of normal development.

[0746] The antibodies can be used to detect receptor protein in situ, in vitro, or in a cell lysate or supernatant in order to evaluate the abundance and pattern of expression.

[0747] The antibodies can be used to assess abnormal tissue distribution or abnormal expression during development.

[0748] Antibody detection of circulating fragments of the full-length receptor protein can be used to identify receptor turnover.

[0749] Further, the antibodies can be used to assess receptor expression in disease states such as in active stages of the disease or in an individual with a predisposition toward disease related to receptor function. When a disorder is caused by an inappropriate tissue distribution, developmental expression, or level of expression of the receptor protein, the antibody can be prepared against the normal receptor protein. If a disorder is characterized by a specific mutation in the receptor protein, antibodies specific for this mutant protein can be used to assay for the presence of the specific mutant receptor protein. However, intracellularly-made antibodies (“intrabodies”) are also encompassed, which would recognize intracellular receptor peptide regions.

[0750] The antibodies can also be used to assess normal and aberrant subcellular localization of cells in the various tissues in an organism. Antibodies can be developed against the whole receptor or portions of the receptor, for example, portions of the amino terminal extracellular domain or extracellular loops.

[0751] The diagnostic uses can be applied, not only in genetic testing, but also in monitoring a treatment modality. Accordingly, where treatment is ultimately aimed at correcting receptor expression level or the presence of aberrant receptors and aberrant tissue distribution or developmental expression, antibodies directed against the receptor or relevant fragments can be used to monitor therapeutic efficacy.

[0752] Additionally, antibodies are useful in pharmacogenomic analysis. Thus, antibodies prepared against polymorphic receptor proteins can be used to identify individuals that require modified treatment modalities.

[0753] The antibodies are also useful as diagnostic tools as an immunological marker for aberrant receptor protein analyzed by electrophoretic mobility, isoelectric point, tryptic peptide digest, and other physical assays known to those in the art.

[0754] The antibodies are also useful for tissue typing. Thus, where a specific receptor protein has been correlated with expression in a specific tissue, antibodies that are specific for this receptor protein can be used to identify a tissue type.

[0755] The antibodies are also useful in forensic identification. Accordingly, where an individual has been correlated with a specific genetic polymorphism resulting in a specific polymorphic protein, an antibody specific for the polymorphic protein can be used as an aid in identification.

[0756] The antibodies are also useful for inhibiting receptor function, for example, blocking ligand binding.

[0757] These uses can also be applied in a therapeutic context in which treatment involves inhibiting receptor function. An antibody can be used, for example, to block ligand binding. Antibodies can be prepared against specific fragments containing sites required for function or against intact receptor associated with a cell.

[0758] The invention also encompasses kits for using antibodies to detect the presence of a receptor protein in a biological sample. The kit can comprise antibodies such as a labeled or labelable antibody and a compound or agent for detecting receptor protein in a biological sample; means for determining the amount of receptor protein in the sample; and means for comparing the amount of receptor protein in the sample with a standard. The compound or agent can be packaged in a suitable container. The kit can further comprise instructions for using the kit to detect receptor protein.

[0759] Polynucleotides

[0760] The nucleotide sequence in SEQ ID NO: 11 was obtained by sequencing the deposited human full length cDNA. Accordingly, the sequence of the deposited clone is controlling as to any discrepancies between the two and any reference to the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 11 includes reference to the sequence of the deposited cDNA.

[0761] The specifically disclosed cDNA comprises the coding region and 5N and 3N untranslated sequences (SEQ ID NO: 11).

[0762] The human 17723 receptor cDNA is approximately 2144 nucleotides in length and encodes a fall length protein that is approximately 402 amino acid residues in length. The nucleic acid is expressed in heart, thymus, brain, esophagus, and uterus. Structural analysis of the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 10 is provided in FIG. 18, a hydropathy plot. The figure shows the putative structure of the seven transmembrane segments, the amino terminal extracellular domain and the carboxy terminal intracellular domain.

[0763] As used herein, the term “transmembrane segment” refers to a structural amino acid motif which includes a hydrophobic helix that spans the plasma membrane. The entire transmembrane domain spans from about amino acid 44 to about amino acid 307. Seven segments span the membrane and there are three intracellular and three extracellular loops in this domain.

[0764] The invention provides isolated polynucleotides encoding a 17723 receptor protein. The term “17723 polynucleotide” or “17723 nucleic acid” refers to the sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 11 or in the deposited cDNA. The term “receptor polynucleotide” or “receptor nucleic acid” further includes variants and fragments of the 17723 polynucleotide.

[0765] An “isolated” receptor nucleic acid is one that is separated from other nucleic acid present in the natural source of the receptor nucleic acid. Preferably, an “isolated” nucleic acid is free of sequences which naturally flank the nucleic acid (i.e., sequences located at the 5N and 3N ends of the nucleic acid) in the genomic DNA of the organism from which the nucleic acid is derived. However, there can be some flanking nucleotide sequences, for example up to about 5KB. The important point is that the nucleic acid is isolated from flanking sequences such that it can be subjected to the specific manipulations described herein such as recombinant expression, preparation of probes and primers, and other uses specific to the receptor nucleic acid sequences.

[0766] Moreover, an “isolated” nucleic acid molecule, such as a cDNA molecule, can be substantially free of other cellular material, or culture medium when produced by recombinant techniques, or chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized. However, the nucleic acid molecule can be fused to other coding or regulatory sequences and still be considered isolated.

[0767] For example, recombinant DNA molecules contained in a vector are considered isolated. Further examples of isolated DNA molecules include recombinant DNA molecules maintained in heterologous host cells or purified (partially or substantially) DNA molecules in solution. Isolated RNA molecules include in vivo or in vitro RNA transcripts of the isolated DNA molecules of the present invention. Isolated nucleic acid molecules according to the present invention further include such molecules produced synthetically.

[0768] The receptor polynucleotides can encode the mature protein plus additional amino or carboxyl-terminal amino acids, or amino acids interior to the mature polypeptide (when the mature form has more than one polypeptide chain, for instance). Such sequences may play a role in processing of a protein from precursor to a mature form, facilitate protein trafficking, prolong or shorten protein half-life or facilitate manipulation of a protein for assay or production, among other things. As generally is the case in situ, the additional amino acids may be processed away from the mature protein by cellular enzymes.

[0769] The receptor polynucleotides include, but are not limited to, the sequence encoding the mature polypeptide alone, the sequence encoding the mature polypeptide and additional coding sequences, such as a leader or secretory sequence (e.g., a pre-pro or pro-protein sequence), the sequence encoding the mature polypeptide, with or without the additional coding sequences, plus additional non-coding sequences, for example introns and non-coding 5N and 3N sequences such as transcribed but non-translated sequences that play a role in transcription, mRNA processing (including splicing and polyadenylation signals), ribosome binding and stability of mRNA. In addition, the polynucleotide may be fused to a marker sequence encoding, for example, a peptide that facilitates purification.

[0770] Receptor polynucleotides can be in the form of RNA, such as mRNA, or in the form DNA, including cDNA and genomic DNA obtained by cloning or produced by chemical synthetic techniques or by a combination thereof The nucleic acid, especially DNA, can be double-stranded or single-stranded. Single-stranded nucleic acid can be the coding strand (sense strand) or the non-coding strand (anti-sense strand).

[0771] One receptor nucleic acid comprises the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 11, corresponding to human heart cDNA.

[0772] In one embodiment, the receptor nucleic acid comprises only the coding region.

[0773] The invention further provides variant receptor polynucleotides, and fragments thereof, that differ from the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 11 due to degeneracy of the genetic code and thus encode the same protein as that encoded by the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 11.

[0774] The invention also provides receptor nucleic acid molecules encoding the variant polypeptides described herein. Such polynucleotides may be naturally occurring, such as allelic variants (same locus) (maps to chromosome 1 q42-44), homologs (different locus), and orthologs (different organism), or may be constructed by recombinant DNA methods or by chemical synthesis. Such non-naturally occurring variants may be made by mutagenesis techniques, including those applied to polynucleotides, cells, or organisms. Accordingly, as discussed above, the variants can contain nucleotide substitutions, deletions, inversions and insertions.

[0775] Variation can occur in either or both the coding and non-coding regions. The variations can produce both conservative and non-conservative amino acid substitutions.

[0776] Orthologs, homologs, and allelic variants can be identified using methods well known in the art. These variants comprise a nucleotide sequence encoding a receptor that is 50%, at least about 55%, typically at least about 70-75%, more typically at least about 80-85%, and most typically at least about 90-95% or more homologous to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 11 or a fragment of this sequence. Such nucleic acid molecules can readily be identified as being able to hybridize under stringent conditions, to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 11 or a fragment of the sequence. It is understood that stringent hybridization does not indicate substantial homology where it is due to general homology, such as poly A sequences, or sequences common to all or most proteins, all GPCRs, or all family I GPCRs. Moreover, it is understood that variants do not include any of the nucleic acid sequences that may have been disclosed prior to the invention.

[0777] As used herein, the term “hybridizes under stringent conditions” is intended to describe conditions for hybridization and washing under which nucleotide sequences encoding a receptor at least 50%, 55% homologous to each other typically remain hybridized to each other. The conditions can be such that sequences at least about 65%, at least about 70%, or at least about 75% or more homologous to each other typically remain hybridized to each other. Such stringent conditions are known to those skilled in the art and can be found in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, N.Y. (1989), 6.3.1-6.3.6. One example of stringent hybridization conditions are hybridization in 6× sodium chloride/sodium citrate (SSC) at about 45° C., followed by one or more washes in 0.2×SSC, 0.1% SDS at 50-65° C. In one embodiment, an isolated receptor nucleic acid molecule that hybridizes under stringent conditions to the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 11 corresponds to a naturally-occurring nucleic acid molecule. As used herein, a “naturally-occurring” nucleic acid molecule refers to an RNA or DNA molecule having a nucleotide sequence that occurs in nature (e.g., encodes a natural protein).

[0778] Furthermore, the invention provides polynucleotides that comprise a fragment of the full length receptor polynucleotides. The fragment can be single or double stranded and can comprise DNA or RNA. The fragment can be derived from either the coding or the non-coding sequence.

[0779] In one embodiment, an isolated receptor nucleic acid fragment is at least 27 nucleotides in length and hybridizes under stringent conditions to the nucleic acid molecule comprising the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO: 11. In other embodiments, the nucleic acid is at least 40, 50, 100, 250 or 500 nucleotides in length.

[0780] In another embodiment an isolated receptor nucleic acid encodes the entire coding region from amino acid 1 to amino acid 402. In another embodiment the isolated receptor nucleic acid encodes a sequence corresponding to the mature protein from about amino acid 6 to amino acid 402. Receptor nucleic acid fragments further include sequences corresponding to the domains and segments described herein, subregions also described, and specific functional sites. Receptor nucleic acid fragments also include combinations of the domains, segments, loops, and other functional sites described above. Thus, for example, a receptor nucleic acid could include sequences corresponding to the amino terminal extracellular domain and one transmembrane fragment. A person of ordinary skill in the art would be aware of the many permutations that are possible. However, it is understood that a receptor fragment includes any nucleic acid sequence that does not include the entire gene. Other fragments include nucleotide sequences encoding the amino acid fragments described herein. Further fragments can include subfragments of the specific domains or sites described herein. Fragments also include nucleic acid sequences corresponding to specific amino acid sequences described above or fragments thereof. Nucleic acid fragments, according to the present invention, are not to be construed as encompassing those fragments that may have been disclosed prior to the invention.

[0781] Receptor nucleic acid fragments include nucleic acid molecules encoding a polypeptide comprising the amino terminal extracellular domain including amino acid residues from 1 to about 43, a polypeptide comprising the region spanning the transmembrane domain (amino acid residues from about 44 to about 307), a polypeptide comprising the carboxy terminal intracellular domain (amino acid residues from about 308 to about 402), and a polypeptide encoding the G-protein receptor signature (ERY or surrounding amino acid residues from about 130 to about 140), nucleic acid molecules encoding any of the seven transmembrane segments, extracellular or intracellular loops, phosphorylation sites, glycosylation sites, N-myristoylation sites, and other functional sites described herein. Where the location of the domains have been predicted by computer analysis, one of ordinary skill would appreciate that the amino acid residues constituting these domains can vary depending on the criteria used to define the domains.

[0782] The invention also provides receptor nucleic acid fragments that encode epitope bearing regions of the receptor proteins described herein.

[0783] The isolated receptor polynucleotide sequences, and especially fragments, are useful as DNA probes and primers.

[0784] For example, the coding region of a receptor gene can be isolated using the known nucleotide sequence to synthesize an oligonucleotide probe. A labeled probe can then be used to screen a cDNA library, genomic DNA library, or mRNA to isolate nucleic acid corresponding to the coding region. Further, primers can be used in PCR reactions to clone specific regions of receptor genes.

[0785] A probe/primer typically comprises substantially purified oligonucleotide. The oligonucleotide typically comprises a region of nucleotide sequence that hybridizes under stringent conditions to at least about 12, typically about 25, more typically about 40, 50 or 75 consecutive nucleotides of SEQ ID NO: 11 sense or anti-sense strand or other receptor polynucleotides. A probe further comprises a label, e.g., radioisotope, fluorescent compound, enzyme, or enzyme co-factor.

[0786] Polynucleotide Uses

[0787] The receptor polynucleotides are useful for probes, primers, and in biological assays. Where the polynucleotides are used to assess GPCR properties or functions, such as in the assays described herein, all or less than all of the entire cDNA can be useful. In this case, even fragments that may have been known prior to the invention are encompassed. Thus, for example, assays specifically directed to GPCR functions, such as assessing agonist or antagonist activity, encompass the use of known fragments. Further, diagnostic methods for assessing receptor function can also be practiced with any fragment, including those fragments that may have been known prior to the invention. Similarly, in methods involving treatment of receptor dysfunction, all fragments are encompassed including those which may have been known in the art.

[0788] The receptor polynucleotides are useful as a hybridization probe for cDNA and genomic DNA to isolate a full-length cDNA and genomic clones encoding the polypeptide described in SEQ ID NO: 10 and to isolate cDNA and genomic clones that correspond to variants producing the same polypeptide shown in SEQ ID NO: 10 or the other variants described herein. Variants can be isolated from the same tissue and organism from which the polypeptide shown in SEQ ID NO: 10 was isolated, different tissues from the same organism, or from different organisms. This method is useful for isolating genes and cDNA that are developmentally-controlled and therefore may be expressed in the same tissue or different tissues at different points in the development of an organism.

[0789] The probe can correspond to any sequence along the entire length of the gene encoding the receptor. Accordingly, it could be derived from 5′ noncoding regions, the coding region, and 3′ noncoding regions.

[0790] The nucleic acid probe can be, for example, the full-length cDNA of SEQ ID NO: 10, or a fragment thereof, such as an oligonucleotide of at least 12, 15, 30, 50, 100, 250 or 500 nucleotides in length and sufficient to specifically hybridize under stringent conditions to mRNA or DNA.

[0791] Fragments of the polynucleotides described herein are also useful to synthesize larger fragments or full-length polynucleotides described herein. For example, a fragment can be hybridized to any portion of an mRNA and a larger or fill-length cDNA can be produced.

[0792] The fragments are also useful to synthesize antisense molecules of desired length and sequence.

[0793] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful as primers for PCR to amplify any given region of a receptor polynucleotide.

[0794] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for constructing recombinant vectors. Such vectors include expression vectors that express a portion of, or all of, the receptor polypeptides. Vectors also include insertion vectors, used to integrate into another polynucleotide sequence, such as into the cellular genome, to alter in situ expression of receptor genes and gene products. For example, an endogenous receptor coding sequence can be replaced via homologous recombination with all or part of the coding region containing one or more specifically introduced mutations.

[0795] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for expressing antigenic portions of the receptor proteins.

[0796] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful as probes for determining the chromosomal positions of the receptor polynucleotides by means of in situ hybridization methods.

[0797] The receptor polynucleotide probes are also useful to determine patterns of the presence of the gene encoding the receptors and their variants with respect to tissue distribution, for example, whether gene duplication has occurred and whether the duplication occurs in all or only a subset of tissues. The genes can be naturally occurring or can have been introduced into a cell, tissue, or organism exogenously.

[0798] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for designing ribozymes corresponding to all, or a part, of the mRNA produced from genes encoding the polynucleotides described herein.

[0799] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for constructing host cells expressing a part, or all, of the receptor polynucleotides and polypeptides.

[0800] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for constructing transgenic animals expressing all, or a part, of the receptor polynucleotides and polypeptides.

[0801] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for making vectors that express part, or all, of the receptor polypeptides.

[0802] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful as hybridization probes for determining the level of receptor nucleic acid expression. Accordingly, the probes can be used to detect the presence of, or to determine levels of, receptor nucleic acid in cells, tissues, and in organisms. The nucleic acid whose level is determined can be DNA or RNA. Accordingly, probes corresponding to the polypeptides described herein can be used to assess gene copy number in a given cell, tissue, or organism. This is particularly relevant in cases in which there has been an amplification of the receptor genes.

[0803] Alternatively, the probe can be used in an in situ hybridization context to assess the position of extra copies of the receptor genes, as on extrachromosomal elements or as integrated into chromosomes in which the receptor gene is not normally found, for example as a homogeneously staining region.

[0804] These uses are relevant for diagnosis of disorders involving an increase or decrease in receptor expression relative to normal results.

[0805] In vitro techniques for detection of mRNA include Northern hybridizations and in situ hybridizations. In vitro techniques for detecting DNA includes Southern hybridizations and in situ hybridization.

[0806] Probes can be used as a part of a diagnostic test kit for identifying cells or tissues that express a receptor protein, such as by measuring a level of a receptor-encoding nucleic acid in a sample of cells from a subject e.g., mRNA or genomic DNA, or determining if a receptor gene has been mutated.

[0807] Nucleic acid expression assays are useful for drug screening to identify compounds that modulate receptor nucleic acid expression.

[0808] The invention thus provides a method for identifying a compound that can be used to treat a disorder associated with nucleic acid expression of the receptor gene. The method typically includes assaying the ability of the compound to modulate the expression of the receptor nucleic acid and thus identifying a compound that can be used to treat a disorder characterized by undesired receptor nucleic acid expression.

[0809] The assays can be performed in cell-based and cell-free systems. Cell-based assays include cells naturally expressing the receptor nucleic acid or recombinant cells genetically engineered to express specific nucleic acid sequences.

[0810] Alternatively, candidate compounds can be assayed in vivo in patients or in transgenic animals.

[0811] The assay for receptor nucleic acid expression can involve direct assay of nucleic acid levels, such as mRNA levels, or on collateral compounds involved in the signal pathway (such as cyclic AMP or phosphatidylinositol turnover). Further, the expression of genes that are up- or down-regulated in response to the receptor protein signal pathway can also be assayed. In this embodiment the regulatory regions of these genes can be operably linked to a reporter gene such as luciferase.

[0812] Thus, modulators of receptor gene expression can be identified in a method wherein a cell is contacted with a candidate compound and the expression of mRNA determined. The level of expression of receptor mRNA in the presence of the candidate compound is compared to the level of expression of receptor mRNA in the absence of the candidate compound. The candidate compound can then be identified as a modulator of nucleic acid expression based on this comparison and be used, for example to treat a disorder characterized by aberrant nucleic acid expression. When expression of mRNA is statistically significantly greater in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as a stimulator of nucleic acid expression. When nucleic acid expression is statistically significantly less in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as an inhibitor of nucleic acid expression.

[0813] Accordingly, the invention provides methods of treatment, with the nucleic acid as a target, using a compound identified through drug screening as a gene modulator to modulate receptor nucleic acid expression. Modulation includes both up-regulation (i.e. activation or agonization) or down-regulation (suppression or antagonization) or nucleic acid expression.

[0814] Alternatively, a modulator for receptor nucleic acid expression can be a small molecule or drug identified using the screening assays described herein as long as the drug or small molecule inhibits the receptor nucleic acid expression.

[0815] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for monitoring the effectiveness of modulating compounds on the expression or activity of the receptor gene in clinical trials or in a treatment regimen. Thus, the gene expression pattern can serve as a barometer for the continuing effectiveness of treatment with the compound, particularly with compounds to which a patient can develop resistance. The gene expression pattern can also serve as a marker indicative of a physiological response of the affected cells to the compound. Accordingly, such monitoring would allow either increased administration of the compound or the administration of alternative compounds to which the patient has not become resistant. Similarly, if the level of nucleic acid expression falls below a desirable level, administration of the compound could be commensurately decreased.

[0816] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful in diagnostic assays for qualitative changes in receptor nucleic acid, and particularly in qualitative changes that lead to pathology. The polynucleotides can be used to detect mutations in receptor genes and gene expression products such as mRNA. The polynucleotides can be used as hybridization probes to detect naturally-occurring genetic mutations in the receptor gene and thereby to determine whether a subject with the mutation is at risk for a disorder caused by the mutation. Mutations include deletion, addition, or substitution of one or more nucleotides in the gene, chromosomal rearrangement, such as inversion or transposition, modification of genomic DNA, such as aberrant methylation patterns or changes in gene copy number, such as amplification. Detection of a mutated form of the receptor gene associated with a dysfunction provides a diagnostic tool for an active disease or susceptibility to disease when the disease results from overexpression, underexpression, or altered expression of a receptor protein.

[0817] Individuals carrying mutations in the receptor gene can be detected at the nucleic acid level by a variety of techniques. Genomic DNA can be analyzed directly or can be amplified by using PCR prior to analysis. RNA or cDNA can be used in the same way.

[0818] In certain embodiments, detection of the mutation involves the use of a probe/primer in a polymerase chain reaction (PCR) (see, e.g. U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,683,195 and 4,683,202), such as anchor PCR or RACE PCR, or, alternatively, in a ligation chain reaction (LCR) (see, e.g., Landegran et al., Science 241:1077-1080 (1988); and Nakazawa et al., PNAS 91:360-364 (1994)), the latter of which can be particularly useful for detecting point mutations in the gene (see Abravaya et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 23:675-682 (1995)). This method can include the steps of collecting a sample of cells from a patient, isolating nucleic acid (e.g., genomic, mRNA or both) from the cells of the sample, contacting the nucleic acid sample with one or more primers which specifically hybridize to a gene under conditions such that hybridization and amplification of the gene (if present) occurs, and detecting the presence or absence of an amplification product, or detecting the size of the amplification product and comparing the length to a control sample. Deletions and insertions can be detected by a change in size of the amplified product compared to the normal genotype. Point mutations can be identified by hybridizing amplified DNA to normal RNA or antisense DNA sequences.

[0819] Alternatively, mutations in a receptor gene can be directly identified, for example, by alterations in restriction enzyme digestion patterns determined by gel electrophoresis.

[0820] Further, sequence-specific ribozymes (U.S. Pat. No. 5,498,531) can be used to score for the presence of specific mutations by development or loss of a ribozyme cleavage site.

[0821] Perfectly matched sequences can be distinguished from mismatched sequences by nuclease cleavage digestion assays or by differences in melting temperature.

[0822] Sequence changes at specific locations can also be assessed by nuclease protection assays such as RNase and S1 protection or the chemical cleavage method.

[0823] Furthermore, sequence differences between a mutant receptor gene and a wild-type gene can be determined by direct DNA sequencing. A variety of automated sequencing procedures can be utilized when performing the diagnostic assays ((1995) Biotechniques 19:448), including sequencing by mass spectrometry (see, e.g., PCT International Publication No. WO 94/16101; Cohen et al., Adv. Chromatogr. 36:127-162 (1996); and Griffin et al., Appl. Biochem. Biotechnol. 38:147-159 (1993)).

[0824] Other methods for detecting mutations in the gene include methods in which protection from cleavage agents is used to detect mismatched bases in RNA/RNA or RNA/DNA duplexes (Myers et al., Science 230:1242 (1985)); Cotton et al., PNAS 85:4397 (1988); Saleeba et al., Meth. Enzymol. 217:286-295 (1992)), electrophoretic mobility of mutant and wild type nucleic acid is compared (Orita et al., PNAS 86:2766 (1989); Cotton et al., Mutat. Res. 285:125-144 (1993); and Hayashi et al., Genet. Anal. Tech. Appl. 9:73-79 (1992)), and movement of mutant or wild-type fragments in polyacrylamide gels containing a gradient of denaturant is assayed using denaturing gradient gel electrophoresis (Myers et et al., Nature 313:495 (1985)). Examples of other techniques for detecting point mutations include, selective oligonucleotide hybridization, selective amplification, and selective primer extension.

[0825] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for testing an individual for a genotype that while not necessarily causing the disease, nevertheless affects the treatment modality. Thus, the polynucleotides can be used to study the relationship between an individual's genotype and the individual's response to a compound used for treatment (pharmacogenomic relationship). In the present case, for example, a mutation in the receptor gene that results in altered affinity for ligand could result in an excessive or decreased drug effect with standard concentrations of ligand that activates the receptor. Accordingly, the receptor polynucleotides described herein can be used to assess the mutation content of the receptor gene in an individual in order to select an appropriate compound or dosage regimen for treatment.

[0826] Thus polynucleotides displaying genetic variations that affect treatment provide a diagnostic target that can be used to tailor treatment in an individual. Accordingly, the production of recombinant cells and animals containing these polymorphisms allow effective clinical design of treatment compounds and dosage regimens.

[0827] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for chromosome identification when the sequence is identified with an individual chromosome and to a particular location on the chromosome. First, the DNA sequence is matched to the chromosome by in situ or other chromosome-specific hybridization. Sequences can also be correlated to specific chromosomes by preparing PCR primers that can be used for PCR screening of somatic cell hybrids containing individual chromosomes from the desired species. Only hybrids containing the chromosome containing the gene homologous to the primer will yield an amplified fragment. Sublocalization can be achieved using chromosomal fragments. Other strategies include prescreening with labeled flow-sorted chromosomes and preselection by hybridization to chromosome-specific libraries. Further mapping strategies include fluorescence in situ hybridization which allows hybridization with probes shorter than those traditionally used. Reagents for chromosome mapping can be used individually to mark a single chromosome or a single site on the chromosome, or panels of reagents can be used for marking multiple sites and/or multiple chromosomes. Reagents corresponding to noncoding regions of the genes actually are preferred for mapping purposes. Coding sequences are more likely to be conserved within gene families, thus increasing the chance of cross hybridizations during chromosomal mapping.

[0828] The receptor polynucleotides can also be used to identify individuals from small biological samples. This can be done for example using restriction fragment-length polymorphism (RFLP) to identify an individual. Thus, the polynucleotides described herein are useful as DNA markers for RFLP (See U.S. Pat. No. 5,272,057).

[0829] Furthermore, the receptor sequence can be used to provide an alternative technique which determines the actual DNA sequence of selected fragments in the genome of an individual. Thus, the receptor sequences described herein can be used to prepare two PCR primers from the 5N and 3N ends of the sequences. These primers can then be used to amplify DNA from an individual for subsequent sequencing.

[0830] Panels of corresponding DNA sequences from individuals prepared in this manner can provide unique individual identifications, as each individual will have a unique set of such DNA sequences. It is estimated that allelic variation in humans occurs with a frequency of about once per each 500 bases. Allelic variation occurs to some degree in the coding regions of these sequences, and to a greater degree in the noncoding regions. The receptor sequences can be used to obtain such identification sequences from individuals and from tissue. The sequences represent unique fragments of the human genome. Each of the sequences described herein can, to some degree, be used as a standard against which DNA from an individual can be compared for identification purposes.

[0831] If a panel of reagents from the sequences is used to generate a unique identification database for an individual, those same reagents can later be used to identify tissue from that individual. Using the unique identification database, positive identification of the individual, living or dead, can be made from extremely small tissue samples.

[0832] The receptor polynucleotides can also be used in forensic identification procedures. PCR technology can be used to amplify DNA sequences taken from very small biological samples, such as a single hair follicle, body fluids (eg. blood, saliva, or semen). The amplified sequence can then be compared to a standard allowing identification of the origin of the sample.

[0833] The receptor polynucleotides can thus be used to provide polynucleotide reagents, e.g., PCR primers, targeted to specific loci in the human genome, which can enhance the reliability of DNA-based forensic identifications by, for example, providing another “identification marker” (i.e. another DNA sequence that is unique to a particular individual). As described above, actual base sequence information can be used for identification as an accurate alternative to patterns formed by restriction enzyme generated fragments. Sequences targeted to the noncoding region are particularly useful since greater polymorphism occurs in the noncoding regions, making it easier to differentiate individuals using this technique.

[0834] The receptor polynucleotides can further be used to provide polynucleotide reagents, e.g., labeled or labelable probes which can be used in, for example, an in situ hybridization technique, to identify a specific tissue. This is useful in cases in which a forensic pathologist is presented with a tissue of unknown origin. Panels of receptor probes can be used to identify tissue by species and/or by organ type.

[0835] In a similar fashion, these primers and probes can be used to screen tissue culture for contamination (i.e. screen for the presence of a mixture of different types of cells in a culture).

[0836] Alternatively, the receptor polynucleotides can be used directly to block transcription or translation of receptor gene sequences by means of antisense or ribozyme constructs. Thus, in a disorder characterized by abnormally high or undesirable receptor gene expression, nucleic acids can be directly used for treatment.

[0837] The receptor polynucleotides are thus useful as antisense constructs to control receptor gene expression in cells, tissues, and organisms. A DNA antisense polynucleotide is designed to be complementary to a region of the gene involved in transcription, preventing transcription and hence production of receptor protein. An antisense RNA or DNA polynucleotide would hybridize to the mRNA and thus block translation of mRNA into receptor protein.

[0838] Examples of antisense molecules useful to inhibit nucleic acid expression include antisense molecules complementary to a fragment of the 5N untranslated region of SEQ ID NO: 11 which also includes the start codon and antisense molecules which are complementary to a fragment of the 3N untranslated region of SEQ ID NO: 11.

[0839] Alternatively, a class of antisense molecules can be used to inactivate mRNA in order to decrease expression of receptor nucleic acid. Accordingly, these molecules can treat a disorder characterized by abnormal or undesired receptor nucleic acid expression. This technique involves cleavage by means of ribozymes containing nucleotide sequences complementary to one or more regions in the mRNA that attenuate the ability of the mRNA to be translated. Possible regions include coding regions and particularly coding regions corresponding to the catalytic and other functional activities of the receptor protein, such as ligand binding.

[0840] The receptor polynucleotides also provide vectors for gene therapy in patients containing cells that are aberrant in receptor gene expression. Thus, recombinant cells, which include the patient's cells that have been engineered ex vivo and returned to the patient, are introduced into an individual where the cells produce the desired receptor protein to treat the individual.

[0841] The invention also encompasses kits for detecting the presence of a receptor nucleic acid in a biological sample. For example, the kit can comprise reagents such as a labeled or labelable nucleic acid or agent capable of detecting receptor nucleic acid in a biological sample; means for determining the amount of receptor nucleic acid in the sample; and

[0842] means for comparing the amount of receptor nucleic acid in the sample with a standard. The compound or agent can be packaged in a suitable container. The kit can further comprise instructions for using the kit to detect receptor mRNA or DNA.

[0843] Vectors/Host Cells

[0844] The invention also provides vectors containing the receptor polynucleotides. The term “vector” refers to a vehicle, preferably a nucleic acid molecule, that can transport the receptor polynucleotides. When the vector is a nucleic acid molecule, the receptor polynucleotides are covalently linked to the vector nucleic acid. With this aspect of the invention, the vector includes a plasmid, single or double stranded phage, a single or double stranded RNA or DNA viral vector, or artificial chromosome, such as a BAC, PAC, YAC, OR MAC.

[0845] A vector can be maintained in the host cell as an extrachromosomal element where it replicates and produces additional copies of the receptor polynucleotides. Alternatively, the vector may integrate into the host cell genome and produce additional copies of the receptor polynucleotides when the host cell replicates.

[0846] The invention provides vectors for the maintenance (cloning vectors) or vectors for expression (expression vectors) of the receptor polynucleotides. The vectors can function in procaryotic or eukaryotic cells or in both (shuttle vectors). Expression vectors contain cis-acting regulatory regions that are operably linked in the vector to the receptor polynucleotides such that transcription of the polynucleotides is allowed in a host cell. The polynucleotides can be introduced into the host cell with a separate polynucleotide capable of affecting transcription. Thus, the second polynucleotide may provide a trans-acting factor interacting with the cis-regulatory control region to allow transcription of the receptor polynucleotides from the vector. Alternatively, a trans-acting factor may be supplied by the host cell. Finally, a trans-acting factor can be produced from the vector itself.

[0847] It is understood, however, that in some embodiments, transcription and/or translation of the receptor polynucleotides can occur in a cell-free system.

[0848] The regulatory sequence to which the polynucleotides described herein can be operably linked include promoters for directing mRNA transcription. These include, but are not limited to, the left promoter from bacteriophage λ, the lac, TRP, and TAC promoters from E. coli, the early and late promoters from SV40, the CMV immediate early promoter, the adenovirus early and late promoters, and retrovirus long-terminal repeats.

[0849] In addition to control regions that promote transcription, expression vectors may also include regions that modulate transcription, such as repressor binding sites and enhancers. Examples include the SV40 enhancer, the cytomegalovirus immediate early enhancer, polyoma enhancer, adenovirus enhancers, and retrovirus LTR enhancers.

[0850] In addition to containing sites for transcription initiation and control, expression vectors can also contain sequences necessary for transcription termination and, in the transcribed region a ribosome binding site for translation. Other regulatory control elements for expression include initiation and termination codons as well as polyadenylation signals. The person of ordinary skill in the art would be aware of the numerous regulatory sequences that are useful in expression vectors. Such regulatory sequences are described, for example, in Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd. ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., (1989).

[0851] A variety of expression vectors can be used to express a receptor polynucleotide. Such vectors include chromosomal, episomal, and virus-derived vectors, for example vectors derived from bacterial plasmids, from bacteriophage, from yeast episomes, from yeast chromosomal elements, including yeast artificial chromosomes, from viruses such as baculoviruses, papovaviruses such as SV40, Vaccinia viruses, adenoviruses, poxviruses, pseudorabies viruses, and retroviruses. Vectors may also be derived from combinations of these sources such as those derived from plasmid and bacteriophage genetic elements, eg. cosmids and phagemids. Appropriate cloning and expression vectors for prokaryotic and eukaryotic hosts are described in Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd. ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., (1989).

[0852] The regulatory sequence may provide constitutive expression in one or more host cells (i.e. tissue specific) or may provide for inducible expression in one or more cell types such as by temperature, nutrient additive, or exogenous factor such as a hormone or other ligand. A variety of vectors providing for constitutive and inducible expression in prokaryotic and eukaryotic hosts are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art.

[0853] The receptor polynucleotides can be inserted into the vector nucleic acid by well-known methodology. Generally, the DNA sequence that will ultimately be expressed is joined to an expression vector by cleaving the DNA sequence and the expression vector with one or more restriction enzymes and then ligating the fragments together. Procedures for restriction enzyme digestion and ligation are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art.

[0854] The vector containing the appropriate polynucleotide can be introduced into an appropriate host cell for propagation or expression using well-known techniques. Bacterial cells include, but are not limited to, E. coli, Streptomyces, and Salmonella typhimurium. Eukaryotic cells include, but are not limited to, yeast, insect cells such as Drosophila, animal cells such as COS and CHO cells, and plant cells.

[0855] As described herein, it may be desirable to express the polypeptide as a fusion protein. Accordingly, the invention provides fusion vectors that allow for the production of the receptor polypeptides. Fusion vectors can increase the expression of a recombinant protein, increase the solubility of the recombinant protein, and aid in the purification of the protein by acting for example as a ligand for affinity purification. A proteolytic cleavage site may be introduced at the junction of the fusion moiety so that the desired polypeptide can ultimately be separated from the fusion moiety. Proteolytic enzymes include, but are not limited to, factor Xa, thrombin, and enterokinase. Typical fusion expression vectors include pGEX (Smith et al., Gene 67:31-40 (1988)), pMAL (New England Biolabs, Beverly, Mass.) and pRIT5 (Pharmacia, Piscataway, N.J.) which fuse glutathione S-transferase (GST), maltose E binding protein, or protein A, respectively, to the target recombinant protein. Examples of suitable inducible non-fusion E. coli expression vectors include pTrc (Amann et al., Gene 69:301-315 (1988)) and pET 11d (Studier et al., Gene Expression Technology: Methods in Enzymology 185:60-89 (1990)).

[0856] Recombinant protein expression can be maximized in a host bacteria by providing a genetic background wherein the host cell has an impaired capacity to proteolytically cleave the recombinant protein. (Gottesman, S., Gene Expression Technology: Methods in Enzymology 185, Academic Press, SanDiego, Calif. (1990)119-128). Alternatively, the sequence of the polynucleotide of interest can be altered to provide preferential codon usage for a specific host cell, for example E. coli. (Wada et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 20:2111-2118 (1992)).

[0857] The receptor polynucleotides can also be expressed by expression vectors that are operative in yeast. Examples of vectors for expression in yeast e.g., S. cerevisiae include pYepSec1 (Baldari, et al., EMBO J. 6:229-234 (1987)), pMFa (Kurjan et al., Cell 30:933-943(1982)), pJRY88 (Schultz et al., Gene 54:113-123 (1987)), and pYES2 (Invitrogen Corporation, San Diego, Calif.).

[0858] The receptor polynucleotides can also be expressed in insect cells using, for example, baculovirus expression vectors. Baculovirus vectors available for expression of proteins in cultured insect cells (e.g., Sf 9 cells) include the pAc series (Smith et al., Mol. Cell Biol. 3:2156-2165 (1983)) and the pVL series (Lucklow et al., Virology 170:31-39 (1989)).

[0859] In certain embodiments of the invention, the polynucleotides described herein are expressed in mammalian cells using mammalian expression vectors. Examples of mammalian expression vectors include pCDM8 (Seed, B. Nature 329:840(1987)) and pMT2PC (Kaufman et al., EMBO J. 6:187-195 (1987)).

[0860] The expression vectors listed herein are provided by way of example only of the well-known vectors available to those of ordinary skill in the art that would be useful to express the receptor polynucleotides. The person of ordinary skill in the art would be aware of other vectors suitable for maintenance propagation or expression of the polynucleotides described herein. These are found for example in Sambrook, J., Fritsh, E. F., and Maniatis, T. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd, ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1989.

[0861] The invention also encompasses vectors in which the nucleic acid sequences described herein are cloned into the vector in reverse orientation, but operably linked to a regulatory sequence that permits transcription of antisense RNA. Thus, an antisense transcript can be produced to all, or to a portion, of the polynucleotide sequences described herein, including both coding and non-coding regions. Expression of this antisense RNA is subject to each of the parameters described above in relation to expression of the sense RNA (regulatory sequences, constitutive or inducible expression, tissue-specific expression).

[0862] The invention also relates to recombinant host cells containing the vectors described herein. Host cells therefore include prokaryotic cells, lower eukaryotic cells such as yeast, other eukaryotic cells such as insect cells, and higher eukaryotic cells such as mammalian cells.

[0863] The recombinant host cells are prepared by introducing the vector constructs described herein into the cells by techniques readily available to the person of ordinary skill in the art. These include, but are not limited to, calcium phosphate transfection, DEAE-dextran-mediated transfection, cationic lipid-mediated transfection, electroporation, transduction, infection, lipofection, and other techniques such as those found in Sambrook, et al. (Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd, ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1989).

[0864] Host cells can contain more than one vector. Thus, different nucleotide sequences can be introduced on different vectors of the same cell. Similarly, the receptor polynucleotides can be introduced either alone or with other polynucleotides that are not related to the receptor polynucleotides such as those providing trans-acting factors for expression vectors. When more than one vector is introduced into a cell, the vectors can be introduced independently, co-introduced or joined to the receptor polynucleotide vector.

[0865] In the case of bacteriophage and viral vectors, these can be introduced into cells as packaged or encapsulated virus by standard procedures for infection and transduction. Viral vectors can be replication-competent or replication-defective. In the case in which viral replication is defective, replication will occur in host cells providing functions that complement the defects.

[0866] Vectors generally include selectable markers that enable the selection of the subpopulation of cells that contain the recombinant vector constructs. The marker can be contained in the same vector that contains the polynucleotides described herein or may be on a separate vector. Markers include tetracycline or ampicillin-resistance genes for prokaryotic host cells and dihydrofolate reductase or neomycin resistance for eukaryotic host cells. However, any marker that provides selection for a phenotypic trait will be effective.

[0867] While the mature proteins can be produced in bacteria, yeast, mammalian cells, and other cells under the control of the appropriate regulatory sequences, cell-free transcription and translation systems can also be used to produce these proteins using RNA derived from the DNA constructs described herein.

[0868] Where secretion of the polypeptide is desired, appropriate secretion signals are incorporated into the vector. The signal sequence can be endogenous to the receptor polypeptides or heterologous to these polypeptides.

[0869] Where the polypeptide is not secreted into the medium, the protein can be isolated from the host cell by standard disruption procedures, including freeze thaw, sonication, mechanical disruption, use of lysing agents and the like. The polypeptide can then be recovered and purified by well-known purification methods including ammonium sulfate precipitation, acid extraction, anion or cationic exchange chromatography, phosphocellulose chromatography, hydrophobic-interaction chromatography, affinity chromatography, hydroxylapatite chromatography, lectin chromatography, or high performance liquid chromatography.

[0870] It is also understood that depending upon the host cell in recombinant production of the polypeptides described herein, the polypeptides can have various glycosylation patterns, depending upon the cell, or maybe non-glycosylated as when produced in bacteria. In addition, the polypeptides may include an initial modified methionine in some cases as a result of a host-mediated process.

[0871] Uses of Vectors and Host Cells

[0872] The host cells expressing the polypeptides described herein, and particularly recombinant host cells, have a variety of uses. First, the cells are useful for producing receptor proteins or polypeptides that can be further purified to produce desired amounts of receptor protein or fragments. Thus, host cells containing expression vectors are useful for polypeptide production.

[0873] Host cells are also useful for conducting cell-based assays involving the receptor or receptor fragments. Thus, a recombinant host cell expressing a native receptor is useful to assay for compounds that stimulate or inhibit receptor function. This includes ligand binding, gene expression at the level of transcription or translation, G-protein interaction, and components of the signal transduction pathway.

[0874] Host cells are also useful for identifying receptor mutants in which these functions are affected. If the mutants naturally occur and give rise to a pathology, host cells containing the mutations are useful to assay compounds that have a desired effect on the mutant receptor (for example, stimulating or inhibiting function) which may not be indicated by their effect on the native receptor.

[0875] Recombinant host cells are also useful for expressing the chimeric polypeptides described herein to assess compounds that activate or suppress activation by means of a heterologous amino terminal extracellular domain (or other binding region). Alternatively, a heterologous region spanning the entire transmembrane domain (or parts thereof) can be used to assess the effect of a desired amino terminal extracellular domain (or other binding region) on any given host cell. In this embodiment, a region spanning the entire transmembrane domain (or parts thereof) compatible with the specific host cell is used to make the chimeric vector. Alternatively, a heterologous carboxy terminal intracellular, e.g., signal transduction, domain can be introduced into the host cell.

[0876] Further, mutant receptors can be designed in which one or more of the various functions is engineered to be increased or decreased (e.g., ligand binding or G-protein binding) and used to augment or replace receptor proteins in an individual. Thus, host cells can provide a therapeutic benefit by replacing an aberrant receptor or providing an aberrant receptor that provides a therapeutic result. In one embodiment, the cells provide receptors that are abnormally active.

[0877] In another embodiment, the cells provide receptors that are abnormally inactive. These receptors can compete with endogenous receptors in the individual.

[0878] In another embodiment, cells expressing receptors that cannot be activated, are introduced into an individual in order to compete with endogenous receptors for ligand. For example, in the case in which excessive ligand is part of a treatment modality, it may be necessary to inactivate this ligand at a specific point in treatment. Providing cells that compete for the ligand, but which cannot be affected by receptor activation would be beneficial.

[0879] Homologously recombinant host cells can also be produced that allow the in situ alteration of endogenous receptor polynucleotide sequences in a host cell genome. This technology is more fully described in WO 93/09222, WO 91/12650 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,641,670. Briefly, specific polynucleotide sequences corresponding to the receptor polynucleotides or sequences proximal or distal to a receptor gene are allowed to integrate into a host cell genome by homologous recombination where expression of the gene can be affected. In one embodiment, regulatory sequences are introduced that either increase or decrease expression of an endogenous sequence. Accordingly, a receptor protein can be produced in a cell not normally producing it, or increased expression of receptor protein can result in a cell normally producing the protein at a specific level. Alternatively, the entire gene can be deleted. Still further, specific mutations can be introduced into any desired region of the gene to produce mutant receptor proteins. Such mutations could be introduced, for example, into the specific functional regions such as the ligand-binding site or the G-protein binding site.

[0880] In one embodiment, the host cell can be a fertilized oocyte or embryonic stem cell that can be used to produce a transgenic animal containing the altered receptor gene. Alternatively, the host cell can be a stem cell or other early tissue precursor that gives rise to a specific subset of cells and can be used to produce transgenic tissues in an animal. See also Thomas et al., Cell 51:503 (1987) for a description of homologous recombination vectors. The vector is introduced into an embryonic stem cell line (e.g., by electroporation) and cells in which the introduced gene has homologously recombined with the endogenous receptor gene is selected (see e.g., Li, E. et al., Cell 69:915 (1992)). The selected cells are then injected into a blastocyst of an animal (e.g., a mouse) to form aggregation chimeras (see e.g., Bradley, A. in Teratocarcinomas and Embryonic Stem Cells: A Practical Approach, E. J. Robertson, ed. (IRL, Oxford, 1987) pp. 113-152). A chimeric embryo can then be implanted into a suitable pseudopregnant female foster animal and the embryo brought to term. Progeny harboring the homologously recombined DNA in their germ cells can be used to breed animals in which all cells of the animal contain the homologously recombined DNA by germline transmission of the transgene. Methods for constructing homologous recombination vectors and homologous recombinant animals are described further in Bradley, A. (1991) Current Opinion in Biotechnology 2:823-829 and in PCT International Publication Nos. WO 90/11354; WO 91/01140; and WO 93/04169.

[0881] The genetically engineered host cells can be used to produce non-human transgenic animals. A transgenic animal is preferably a mammal, for example a rodent, such as a rat or mouse, in which one or more of the cells of the animal include a transgene. A transgene is exogenous DNA which is integrated into the genome of a cell from which a transgenic animal develops and which remains in the genome of the mature animal in one or more cell types or tissues of the transgenic animal. These animals are useful for studying the function of a receptor protein and identifying and evaluating modulators of receptor protein activity.

[0882] Other examples of transgenic animals include non-human primates, sheep, dogs, cows, goats, chickens, and amphibians.

[0883] In one embodiment, a host cell is a fertilized oocyte or an embryonic stem cell into which receptor polynucleotide sequences have been introduced.

[0884] A transgenic animal can be produced by introducing nucleic acid into the male pronuclei of a fertilized oocyte, e.g., by microinjection, retroviral infection, and allowing the oocyte to develop in a pseudopregnant female foster animal. Any of the receptor nucleotide sequences can be introduced as a transgene into the genome of a non-human animal, such as a mouse.

[0885] Any of the regulatory or other sequences useful in expression vectors can form part of the transgenic sequence. This includes intronic sequences and polyadenylation signals, if not already included. A tissue-specific regulatory sequence(s) can be operably linked to the transgene to direct expression of the receptor protein to particular cells.

[0886] Methods for generating transgenic animals via embryo manipulation and microinjection, particularly animals such as mice, have become conventional in the art and are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,736,866 and 4,870,009, both by Leder et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,873,191 by Wagner et al. and in Hogan, B., Manipulating the Mouse Embryo, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1986). Similar methods are used for production of other transgenic animals. A transgenic founder animal can be identified based upon the presence of the transgene in its genome and/or expression of transgenic mRNA in tissues or cells of the animals. A transgenic founder animal can then be used to breed additional animals carrying the transgene. Moreover, transgenic animals carrying a transgene can further be bred to other transgenic animals carrying other transgenes. A transgenic animal also includes animals in which the entire animal or tissues in the animal have been produced using the homologously recombinant host cells described herein.

[0887] In another embodiment, transgenic non-human animals can be produced which contain selected systems which allow for regulated expression of the transgene. One example of such a system is the cre/loxP recombinase system of bacteriophage P1. For a description of the cre/loxP recombinase system, see, e.g., Lakso et al. PNAS 89:6232-6236 (1992). Another example of a recombinase system is the FLP recombinase system of S. cerevisiae (O'Gorman et al. Science 251:1351-1355 (1991). If a cre/loxP recombinase system is used to regulate expression of the transgene, animals containing transgenes encoding both the Cre recombinase and a selected protein is required. Such animals can be provided through the construction of “double” transgenic animals, e.g., by mating two transgenic animals, one containing a transgene encoding a selected protein and the other containing a transgene encoding a recombinase.

[0888] Clones of the non-human transgenic animals described herein can also be produced according to the methods described in Wilmut, I. et al. Nature 385:810-813 (1997) and PCT International Publication Nos. WO 97/07668 and WO 97/07669. In brief, a cell, e.g., a somatic cell, from the transgenic animal can be isolated and induced to exit the growth cycle and enter Go phase. The quiescent cell can then be fused, e.g., through the use of electrical pulses, to an enucleated oocyte from an animal of the same species from which the quiescent cell is isolated. The reconstructed oocyte is then cultured such that it develops to morula or blastocyst and then transferred to a pseudopregnant female foster animal. The offspring born of this female foster animal will be a clone of the animal from which the cell, e.g., the somatic cell, is isolated.

[0889] Transgenic animals containing recombinant cells that express the polypeptides described herein are useful to conduct the assays described herein in an in vivo context. Accordingly, the various physiological factors that are present in vivo and that could effect ligand binding, receptor activation, and signal transduction, may not be evident from in vitro cell-free or cell-based assays. Accordingly, it is useful to provide non-human transgenic animals to assay in vivo receptor function, including ligand interaction, the effect of specific mutant receptors on receptor function and ligand interaction, and the effect of chimeric receptors. It is also possible to assess the effect of null mutations, that is mutations that substantially or completely eliminate one or more receptor functions.

[0890] Pharmaceutical Compositions

[0891] The receptor nucleic acid molecules, protein (particularly fragments such as the amino terminal extracellular domain), modulators of the protein, and antibodies (also referred to herein as “active compounds”) can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration to a subject, e.g., a human. Such compositions typically comprise the nucleic acid molecule, protein, modulator, or antibody and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.

[0892] As used herein the language “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” is intended to include any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, such media can be used in the compositions of the invention. Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions. A pharmaceutical composition of the invention is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration. Examples of routes of administration include parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, oral (e.g., inhalation), transdermal (topical), transmucosal, and rectal administration. Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, or subcutaneous application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide. The parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.

[0893] Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions (where water soluble) or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersion. For intravenous administration, suitable carriers include physiological saline, bacteriostatic water, Cremophor EL™ (BASF, Parsippany, N.J.) or phosphate buffered saline (PBS). In all cases, the composition must be sterile and should be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof. The proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. Prevention of the action of microorganisms can be achieved by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, ascorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for example, sugars, polyalcohols such as mannitol, sorbitol, sodium chloride in the composition. Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent which delays absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.

[0894] Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the active compound (e.g., a receptor protein or anti-receptor antibody) in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization. Generally, dispersions are prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle which contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying which yields a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.

[0895] Oral compositions generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They can be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets. For oral administration, the agent can be contained in enteric forms to survive the stomach or further coated or mixed to be released in a particular region of the GI tract by known methods. For the purpose of oral therapeutic administration, the active compound can be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, or capsules. Oral compositions can also be prepared using a fluid carrier for use as a mouthwash, wherein the compound in the fluid carrier is applied orally and swished and expectorated or swallowed. Pharmaceutically compatible binding agents, and/or adjuvant materials can be included as part of the composition. The tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.

[0896] For administration by inhalation, the compounds are delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from pressured container or dispenser which contains a suitable propellant, e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer.

[0897] Systemic administration can also be by transmucosal or transdermal means. For transmucosal or transdermal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art, and include, for example, for transmucosal administration, detergents, bile salts, and fusidic acid derivatives. Transmucosal administration can be accomplished through the use of nasal sprays or suppositories. For transdermal administration, the active compounds are formulated into ointments, salves, gels, or creams as generally known in the art.

[0898] The compounds can also be prepared in the form of suppositories (e.g., with conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter and other glycerides) or retention enemas for rectal delivery.

[0899] In one embodiment, the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems. Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Corporation and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,522,811.

[0900] It is especially advantageous to formulate oral or parenteral compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. “Dosage unit form” as used herein refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subject to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. The specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on the unique characteristics of the active compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an active compound for the treatment of individuals.

[0901] The nucleic acid molecules of the invention can be inserted into vectors and used as gene therapy vectors. Gene therapy vectors can be delivered to a subject by, for example, intravenous injection, local administration (U.S. Pat. No. 5,328,470) or by stereotactic injection (see e.g., Chen et al., PNAS 91:3054-3057 (1994)). The pharmaceutical preparation of the gene therapy vector can include the gene therapy vector in an acceptable diluent, or can comprise a slow release matrix in which the gene delivery vehicle is imbedded. Alternatively, where the complete gene delivery vector can be produced intact from recombinant cells, e.g. retroviral vectors, the pharmaceutical preparation can include one or more cells which produce the gene delivery system.

[0902] The pharmaceutical compositions can be included in a container, pack, or dispenser together with instructions for administration.

[0903] This invention may be embodied in many different forms and should not be construed as limited to the embodiments set forth herein; rather, these embodiments are provided so that this disclosure will fully convey the invention to those skilled in the art. Many modifications and other embodiments of the invention will come to mind in one skilled in the art to which this invention pertains having the benefit of the teachings presented in the foregoing description. Although specific terms are employed, they are used as in the art unless otherwise indicated.

CHAPTER 4

23992 Receptor, A Novel G-protein Coupled Receptor

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

[0904] G-Protein Coupled Receptors

[0905] G-protein coupled receptors (GPCRs) constitute a major class of proteins responsible for transducing a signal within a cell. GPCRs have three structural domains:

[0906] an amino terminal extracellular domain, a transmembrane domain containing seven transmembrane segments, three extracellular loops, and three intracellular loops, and a carboxy terminal intracellular domain. Upon binding of a ligand to an extracellular portion of a GPCR, a signal is transduced within the cell that results in a change in a biological or physiological property of the cell. GPCRs, along with G-proteins and effectors (intracellular enzymes and channels modulated by G-proteins), are the components of a modular signaling system that connects the state of intracellular second messengers to extracellular inputs.

[0907] GPCR genes and gene-products are potential causative agents of disease (Spiegel et al., J Clin. Invest. 92:1119-1125 (1993); McKusick et al., J Med. Genet. 30:1-26 (1993)). Specific defects in the rhodopsin gene and the V2 vasopressin receptor gene have been shown to cause various forms of retinitis pigmentosum (Nathans et al., Annu. Rev. Genet. 26:403-424(1992)), and nephrogenic diabetes insipidus (Holtzman et al., Hum. Mol. Genet. 2:1201-1204 (1993)). These receptors are of critical importance to both the central nervous system and peripheral physiological processes. Evolutionary analyses suggest that the ancestor of these proteins originally developed in concert with complex body plans and nervous systems.

[0908] The GPCR protein superfamily can be divided into five families: Family I, receptors typified by rhodopsin and the β2-adrenergic receptor and currently represented by over 200 unique members (Dohlman et al., Annu. Rev. Biochem. 60:653-688 (1991)); Family II, the parathyroid hormone/calcitonin/secretin receptor family (Juppner et al., Science 254:1024-1026 (1991); Lin et al., Science 254:1022-1024 (1991)); Family III, the metabotropic glutamate receptor family (Nakanishi, Science 258 597:603 (1992)); Family IV, the cAMP receptor family, important in the chemotaxis and development of D. discoideum (Klein et al., Science 241:1467-1472 (1988)); and Family V, the fungal mating pheromone receptors such as STE2 (Kuian, Annu. Rev. Biochem. 61:1097-1129 (1992)).

[0909] There are also a small number of other proteins which present seven putative hydrophobic segments and appear to be unrelated to GPCRs; they have not been shown to couple to G-proteins. Drosophila expresses a photoreceptor-specific protein, bride of sevenless (boss), a seven-transmembrane-segment protein which has been extensively studied and does not show evidence of being a GPCR (Hart et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5047-5051 (1993)). The gene frizzled (fz) in Drosophila is also thought to be a protein with seven transmembrane segments. Like boss, fz has not been shown to couple to G-proteins (Vinson et al., Nature 338:263-264 (1989)).

[0910] G proteins represent a family of heterotrimeric proteins composed of α, β and γ subunits, that bind guanine nucleotides. These proteins are usually linked to cell surface receptors, e.g., receptors containing seven transmembrane segments. Following ligand binding to the GPCR, a conformational change is transmitted to the G protein, which causes the α-subunit to exchange a bound GDP molecule for a GTP molecule and to dissociate from the βγ-subunits. The GTP-bound form of the α-subunit typically functions as an effector-modulating moiety, leading to the production of second messengers, such as cAMP (e.g., by activation of adenyl cyclase), diacylglycerol or inositol phosphates. Greater than 20 different types of α-subunits are known in humans. These subunits associate with a smaller pool of β and γ subunits. Examples of mammalian G proteins include Gi, Go, Gq, Gs and Gt. G proteins are described extensively in Lodish et al., Molecular Cell Biology, (Scientific American Books Inc., New York, N.Y., 1995), the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. GPCRs, G proteins and G protein-linked effector and second messenger systems have been reviewed in The G-Protein Linked Receptor Fact Book, Watson et al., eds., Academic Press (1994).

[0911] GPCRs are a major target for drug action and development. Accordingly, it is valuable to the field of pharmaceutical development to identify and characterize previously unknown GPCRs. The present invention advances the state of the art by providing a previously unidentified human GPCR.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

[0912] It is an object of the invention to identify novel GPCRs.

[0913] It is a further object of the invention to provide novel GPCR polypeptides that are useful as reagents or targets in receptor assays applicable to treatment and diagnosis of GPCR-mediated disorders.

[0914] It is a further object of the invention to provide polynucleotides corresponding to the novel GPCR receptor polypeptides that are useful as targets and reagents in receptor assays applicable to treatment and diagnosis of GPCR-mediated disorders and useful for producing novel receptor polypeptides by recombinant methods.

[0915] A specific object of the invention is to identify compounds that act as agonists and antagonists and modulate the expression of the novel receptor.

[0916] A further specific object of the invention is to provide compounds that modulate expression of the receptor for treatment and diagnosis of GPCR-related disorders.

[0917] The invention is thus based on the identification of a novel GPCR, designated the 23992 receptor.

[0918] The invention provides isolated 23992 receptor polypeptides including a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 13.

[0919] The invention also provides isolated 23992 receptor nucleic acid molecules having the sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 14 or in the deposited cDNA.

[0920] The invention also provides variant polypeptides having an amino acid sequence that is substantially homologous to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 13 or encoded by the deposited cDNA.

[0921] The invention also provides variant nucleic acid sequences that are substantially homologous to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 14 or in the deposited cDNA.

[0922] The invention also provides fragments of the polypeptide shown in SEQ ID NO: 13 and nucleotide shown in SEQ ID NO: 14, as well as substantially homologous fragments of the polypeptide or nucleic acid.

[0923] The invention further provides nucleic acid constructs comprising the nucleic acid molecules described above. In a preferred embodiment, the nucleic acid molecules of the invention are operatively linked to a regulatory sequence.

[0924] The invention also provides vectors and host cells for expressing the receptor nucleic acid molecules and polypeptides and particularly recombinant vectors and host cells.

[0925] The invention also provides methods of making the vectors and host cells and methods for using them to produce the receptor nucleic acid molecules and polypeptides.

[0926] The invention also provides antibodies or antigen-binding fragments thereof that selectively bind the receptor polypeptides and fragments.

[0927] The invention also provides methods of screening for compounds that modulate expression or activity of the receptor polypeptides or nucleic acid (RNA or DNA).

[0928] The invention also provides a process for modulating receptor polypeptide or nucleic acid expression or activity, especially using the screened compounds. Modulation may be used to treat conditions related to aberrant activity or expression of the receptor polypeptides or nucleic acids.

[0929] The invention also provides assays for determining the presence or absence of and level of the receptor polypeptides or nucleic acid molecules in a biological sample, including for disease diagnosis.

[0930] The invention also provides assays for determining the presence of a mutation in the receptor polypeptides or nucleic acid molecules, including for disease diagnosis.

[0931] In still a further embodiment, the invention provides a computer readable means containing the nucleotide and/or amino acid sequences of the nucleic acids and polypeptides of the invention, respectively.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

[0932] The present inventions now will be described more filly hereinafter with reference to the accompanying drawings, in which some, but not all embodiments of the invention are shown. Indeed, these inventions may be embodied in many different forms and should not be construed as limited to the embodiments set forth herein; rather, these embodiments are provided so that this disclosure will satisfy applicable legal requirements. Like numbers refer to like elements throughout.

[0933] Many modifications and other embodiments of the inventions set forth herein will come to mind to one skilled in the art to which these inventions pertain having the benefit of the teachings presented in the foregoing descriptions and the associated drawings. Therefore, it is to be understood that the inventions are not to be limited to the specific embodiments disclosed and that modifications and other embodiments are intended to be included within the scope of the appended claims. Although specific terms are employed herein, they are used in a generic and descriptive sense only and not for purposes of limitation.

[0934] Receptor Function/Signal Pathway

[0935] The 23992 receptor protein is a GPCR that participates in signaling pathways. As used herein, a “signaling pathway” refers to the modulation (e.g., stimulation or inhibition) of a cellular function/activity upon the binding of a ligand to the GPCR (23992 protein). Examples of such functions include mobilization of intracellular molecules that participate in a signal transduction pathway, e.g., phosphatidylinositol 4,5-bisphosphate (PIP2), inositol 1,4,5-triphosphate (IP3) and adenylate cyclase; polarization of the plasma membrane; production or secretion of molecules; alteration in the structure of a cellular component; cell proliferation, e.g., synthesis of DNA; cell migration; cell differentiation; and cell survival. Since the 23992 receptor protein is expressed in lung, uterus, colon, liver, heart and spleen, cells participating in a 23992 receptor protein signaling pathway include, but are not limited to cells derived from these tissues.

[0936] The response mediated by the receptor protein depends on the type of cell. For example, in some cells, binding of a ligand to the receptor protein may stimulate an activity such as release of compounds, gating of a channel, cellular adhesion, migration, differentiation, etc., through phosphatidylinositol or cyclic AMP metabolism and turnover while in other cells, the binding of the ligand will produce a different result. Regardless of the cellular activity/response modulated by the receptor protein, it is universal that the protein is a GPCR and interacts with G proteins to produce one or more secondary signals, in a variety of intracellular signal transduction pathways, e.g., through phosphatidylinositol or cyclic AMP metabolism and turnover, in a cell.

[0937] As used herein, “phosphatidylinositol turnover and metabolism” refers to the molecules involved in the turnover and metabolism of phosphatidylinositol 4,5-bisphosphate (PIP2) as well as to the activities of these molecules. PIP2 is a phospholipid found in the cytosolic leaflet of the plasma membrane. Binding of ligand to the receptor activates, in some cells, the plasma-membrane enzyme phospholipase C that in turn can hydrolyze PIP2 to produce 1,2-diacylglycerol (DAG) and inositol 1,4,5-triphosphate (IP3). Once formed IP3 can diffuse to the endoplasmic reticulum surface where it can bind an IP3 receptor, e.g., a calcium channel protein containing an IP3 binding site. IP3 binding can induce opening of the channel, allowing calcium ions to be released into the cytoplasm. IP3 can also be phosphorylated by a specific kinase to form inositol 1,3,4,5-tetraphosphate (IP4), a molecule which can cause calcium entry into the cytoplasm from the extracellular medium. IP3 and IP4 can subsequently be hydrolyzed very rapidly to the inactive products inositol 1,4-biphosphate (IP2) and inositol 1,3,4-triphosphate, respectively. These inactive products can be recycled by the cell to synthesize PIP2. The other second messenger produced by the hydrolysis of PIP2, namely 1,2-diacylglycerol (DAG), remains in the cell membrane where it can serve to activate the enzyme protein kinase C. Protein kinase C is usually found soluble in the cytoplasm of the cell, but upon an increase in the intracellular calcium concentration, this enzyme can move to the plasma membrane where it can be activated by DAG. The activation of protein kinase C in different cells results in various cellular responses such as the phosphorylation of glycogen synthase, or the phosphorylation of various transcription factors, e.g., NF-kB. The language “phosphatidylinositol activity”, as used herein, refers to an activity of PIP2 or one of its metabolites.

[0938] Another signaling pathway in which the receptor may participate is the cAMP turnover pathway. As used herein, “cyclic AMP turnover and metabolism” refers to the molecules involved in the turnover and metabolism of cyclic AMP (cAMP) as well as to the activities of these molecules. Cyclic AMP is a second messenger produced in response to ligand-induced stimulation of certain G protein coupled receptors. In the cAMP signaling pathway, binding of a ligand to a GPCR can lead to the activation of the enzyme adenyl cyclase, which catalyzes the synthesis of cAMP. The newly synthesized cAMP can in turn activate a cAMP-dependent protein kinase. This activated kinase can phosphorylate a voltage-gated potassium channel protein, or an associated protein, and lead to the inability of the potassium channel to open during an action potential. The inability of the potassium channel to open results in a decrease in the outward flow of potassium, which normally repolarizes the membrane of a neuron, leading to prolonged membrane depolarization.

[0939] Polypeptides

[0940] The invention is based on the discovery of a novel G-coupled protein receptor. Specifically, an expressed sequence tag (EST) was selected based on homology to G-protein-coupled receptor sequences. This EST was used to design primers based on sequences that it contains and used to identify a cDNA from a human lung cDNA library. Positive clones were sequenced and the overlapping fragments were assembled. Analysis of the assembled sequence revealed that the cloned cDNA molecule encodes a G-protein coupled receptor.

[0941] The invention thus relates to a novel GPCR having the deduced amino acid sequence shown in FIGS. 21A-21B (SEQ ID NO: 13).

[0942] The deposit will be maintained under the terms of the Budapest Treaty on the International Recognition of the Deposit of Microorganisms. The deposit is provided as a convenience to those of skill in the art and is not an admission that a deposit is required under 35 U.S.C. § 112. The deposited sequence, as well as the polypeptide encoded by the sequence, is incorporated herein by reference and controls in the event of any conflict, such as a sequencing error, with description in this application.

[0943] The “23992 receptor polypeptide” or “23992 receptor protein” refers to the polypeptide in SEQ ID NO: 13 or encoded by the deposited cDNA. The term “receptor protein” or “receptor polypeptide”, however, further includes the numerous variants described herein, as well as fragments derived from the full length 23992 polypeptide and variants.

[0944] The present invention thus provides an isolated or purified 23992 receptor polypeptide and variants and fragments thereof.

[0945] The 23992 polypeptide is a 333 residue protein exhibiting three main structural domains, an amino terminal extracellular domain, a transmembrane domain, and a carboxy terminal intracellular domain. The transmembrane domain contains seven segments that span the membrane. Within the region spanning the entire transmembrane domain are three intracellular and three extracellular loops.

[0946] The transmembrane domain includes a GPCR signal transduction signature, RYL, at residues 138-140. The sequence includes an arginine at residue 139, an invariant amino acid in GPCRs.

[0947] Based on a BLAST search, homology was shown, among other things, to chemokine receptor-like 2 (CML2). 23992 receptor nucleic acid is expressed in tissues or cells that include, but are not limited to, lung, uterus, and particularly pregnant uterus, colon, liver, spleen, heart, and adenocarcinoma, and particularly poorly differentiated adenocarcinoma with signet ring features.

[0948] As used herein, a polypeptide is said to be “isolated” or “purified” when it is substantially free of cellular material when it is isolated from recombinant and non-recombinant cells, or free of chemical precursors or other chemicals when it is chemically synthesized. A polypeptide, however, can be joined to another polypeptide with which it is not normally associated in a cell and still be considered “isolated” or “purified.” The receptor polypeptides can be purified to homogeneity. It is understood, however, that preparations in which the polypeptide is not purified to homogeneity are useful and considered to contain an isolated form of the polypeptide. The critical feature is that the preparation allows for the desired function of the polypeptide, even in the presence of considerable amounts of other components. Thus, the invention encompasses various degrees of purity.

[0949] In one embodiment, the language “substantially free of cellular material” includes preparations of the receptor polypeptide having less than about 30% (by dry weight) other proteins (i.e., contaminating protein), less than about 20% other proteins, less than about 10% other proteins, or less than about 5% other proteins. When the receptor polypeptide is recombinantly produced, it can also be substantially free of culture medium, i.e., culture medium represents less than about 20%, less than about 10%, or less than about 5% of the volume of the protein preparation.

[0950] A receptor polypeptide is also considered to be isolated when it is part of a membrane preparation or is purified and then reconstituted with membrane vesicles or liposomes.

[0951] The language “substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals” includes preparations of the receptor polypeptide in which it is separated from chemical precursors or other chemicals that are involved in its synthesis. In one embodiment, the language “substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals” includes preparations of the polypeptide having less than about 30% (by dry weight) chemical precursors or other chemicals, less than about 20% chemical precursors or other chemicals, less than about 10% chemical precursors or other chemicals, or less than about 5% chemical precursors or other chemicals.

[0952] In one embodiment, the receptor polypeptide comprises the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 13. However, the invention also encompasses sequence variants. Variants include a substantially homologous protein encoded by the same genetic locus in an organism, i.e., an allelic variant. The 23992 receptor has been mapped to chromosome 7, in proximity to the SHGC-34866 marker. Variants also encompass proteins derived from other genetic loci in an organism, but having substantial homology to the 23992 receptor protein of SEQ ID NO: 13. Variants also include proteins substantially homologous to the 23992 receptor protein but derived from another organism, i.e., an ortholog. Variants also include proteins that are substantially homologous to the 23992 receptor protein that are produced by chemical synthesis. Variants also include proteins that are substantially homologous to the 23992 receptor protein that are produced by recombinant methods. It is understood, however, that variants exclude any amino acid sequences disclosed prior to the invention.

[0953] As used herein, two proteins (or a region of the proteins) are substantially homologous when the amino acid sequences are at least about 55-60%, typically at least about 70-75%, more typically at least about 80-85%, and most typically at least about 90-95% or more homologous. A substantially homologous amino acid sequence, according to the present invention, will be encoded by a nucleic acid sequence hybridizing to the nucleic acid sequence, or portion thereof, of the sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 14 under stringent conditions as more fully described below.

[0954] To determine the percent identity of two amino acid sequences or of two nucleic acid sequences, the sequences are aligned for optimal comparison purposes (e.g., gaps can be introduced in one or both of a first and a second amino acid or nucleic acid sequence for optimal alignment and non-homologous sequences can be disregarded for comparison purposes). In a preferred embodiment, the length of a reference sequence aligned for comparison purposes is at least 30%, preferably at least 40%, more preferably at least 50%, even more preferably at least 60%, and even more preferably at least 70%, 80%, or 90% of the length of the reference sequence having 333 amino acid residues. The amino acid residues or nucleotides at corresponding amino acid positions or nucleotide positions are then compared. When a position in the first sequence is occupied by the same amino acid residue or nucleotide as the corresponding position in the second sequence, then the molecules are identical at that position (as used herein amino acid or nucleic acid “identity” is equivalent to amino acid or nucleic acid “homology”). The percent identity between the two sequences is a function of the number of identical positions shared by the sequences, taking into account the number of gaps, and the length of each gap, which need to be introduced for optimal alignment of the two sequences.

[0955] The invention also encompasses polypeptides having a lower degree of identity but having sufficient similarity so as to perform one or more of the same functions performed by the 23992 polypeptide. Similarity is determined by conserved amino acid substitution. Such substitutions are those that substitute a given amino acid in a polypeptide by another amino acid of like characteristics. Conservative substitutions are likely to be phenotypically silent. Typically seen as conservative substitutions are the replacements, one for another, among the aliphatic amino acids Ala, Val, Leu, and Ile; interchange of the hydroxyl residues Ser and Thr, exchange of the acidic residues Asp and Glu, substitution between the amide residues Asn and Gln, exchange of the basic residues Lys and Arg and replacements among the aromatic residues Phe, Tyr. Guidance concerning which amino acid changes are likely to be phenotypically silent are found in Bowie et al., Science 247:1306-1310 (1990).

5TABLE 1Conservative Amino Acid Substitutions.AromaticPhenylalanineTryptophanTyrosineHydrophobicLeucineIsoleucineValinePolarGlutamineAsparagineBasicArginineLysineHistidineAcidicAspartic AcidGlutamic AcidSmallAlanineSerineThreonineMethionineGlycine

[0956] The comparison of sequences and determination of percent identity and similarity between two sequences can be accomplished using a mathematical algorithm. (Computational Molecular Biology, Lesk, A. M., ed., Oxford University Press, New York, 1988; Biocomputing: Informatics and Genome Projects, Smith, D. W., ed., Academic Press, New York, 1993; Computer Analysis of Sequence Data, Part 1, Griffin, A. M., and Griffin, H. G., eds., Humana Press, New Jersey, 1994; Sequence Analysis in Molecular Biology, von Heinje, G., Academic Press, 1987; and Sequence Analysis Primer, Gribskov, M. and Devereux, J., eds., M Stockton Press, New York, 1991). A preferred, non-limiting example of such a mathematical algorithm is described in Karlin et al. (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-5877. Such an algorithm is incorporated into the NBLAST and XBLAST programs (version 2.0) as described in Altschul et al. (1997) Nucleic Acids Res. 25:3389-3402. When utilizing BLAST and Gapped BLAST programs, the default parameters of the respective programs (e.g., NBLAST) can be used. See www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov. In one embodiment, parameters for sequence comparison can be set at score=100, wordlength=12, or can be varied (e.g., W=5 or W=20).

[0957] In a preferred embodiment, the percent identity between two amino acid sequences is determined using the Needleman et al. (1970) (J Mol. Biol. 48:444-453) algorithm which has been incorporated into the GAP program in the GCG software package (available at www.gcg.com), using either a BLOSUM 62 matrix or a PAM250 matrix, and a gap weight of 16, 14, 12, 10, 8, 6, or 4 and a length weight of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In yet another preferred embodiment, the percent identity between two nucleotide sequences is determined using the GAP program in the GCG software package (Devereux et al. (1984) Nucleic Acids Res. 12(1): 387) (available at www.gcg.com), using a NWSgapdna.CMP matrix and a gap weight of 40, 50, 60, 70, or 80 and a length weight of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

[0958] Another preferred, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for the comparison of sequences is the algorithm of Myers and Miller, CABIOS (1989). Such an algorithm is incorporated into the ALIGN program (version 2.0) which is part of the CGC sequence alignment software package. When utilizing the ALIGN program for comparing amino acid sequences, a PAM120 weight residue table, a gap length penalty of 12, and a gap penalty of 4 can be used. Additional algorithms for sequence analysis are known in the art and include ADVANCE and ADAM as described in Torellis et al (1994) Comput. Appl. Biosci. 10:3-5; and FASTA described in Pearson et al. (1988) PNAS 85:2444-8.

[0959] The protein sequence of the present invention can be used as a “query sequence” to perform a search against public databases to, for example, identify other family members or related sequences. Such searches can be performed using the NBLAST and XBLAST programs (version 2.0) of Altschul, et al. (1990) J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-10. BLAST nucleotide searches can be performed with the NBLAST program, score=100, wordlength=12 to obtain nucleotide sequences homologous to the nucleic acid molecules of the invention. BLAST protein searches can be performed with the XBLAST program, score=50, wordlength=3 to obtain amino acid sequences homologous to the proteins of the invention. To obtain gapped alignments for comparison purposes, Gapped BLAST can be utilized as described in Altschul et al., (1997) Nucleic Acids Res. 25(17): 3389-3402. When utilizing BLAST and Gapped BLAST programs, the default parameters of the respective programs (e.g., XBLAST and NBLAST) can be used. See www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov.

[0960] A variant polypeptide can differ in amino acid sequence by one or more substitutions, deletions, insertions, inversions, fusions, and truncations or a combination of any of these.

[0961] Variant polypeptides can be fully functional or can lack function in one or more activities. Thus, in the present case, variations can affect the function, for example, of one or more of the regions corresponding to ligand binding, membrane association, G-protein binding and signal transduction.

[0962] Fully functional variants typically contain only conservative variation or variation in non-critical residues or in non-critical regions. Functional variants can also contain substitution of similar amino acids which result in no change or an insignificant change in function. Alternatively, such substitutions may positively or negatively affect function to some degree.

[0963] Non-functional variants typically contain one or more non-conservative amino acid substitutions, deletions, insertions, inversions, or truncation or a substitution, insertion, inversion, or deletion in a critical residue or critical region.

[0964] As indicated, variants can be naturally-occurring or can be made by recombinant means or chemical synthesis to provide useful and novel characteristics for the receptor polypeptide. This includes preventing immunogenicity from pharmaceutical formulations by preventing protein aggregation.

[0965] Useful variations further include alteration of ligand binding characteristics. For example, one embodiment involves a variation at the binding site that results in binding but not release, or slower release, of ligand. A further useful variation at the same sites can result in a higher affinity for ligand. Useful variations also include changes that provide for affinity for another ligand. Another useful variation includes one that allows binding but which prevents activation by the ligand. Another useful variation includes variation in the transmembrane G-protein-binding/signal transduction domain that provides for reduced or increased binding by the appropriate G-protein or for binding by a different G-protein than the one with which the receptor is normally associated. Another useful variation provides a fusion protein in which one or more domains or subregions is operationally fused to one or more domains or subregions from another G-protein coupled receptor.

[0966] Amino acids that are essential for function can be identified by methods known in the art, such as site-directed mutagenesis or alanine-scanning mutagenesis (Cunningham et al., Science 244:1081-1085 (1989)). The latter procedure introduces single alanine mutations at every residue in the molecule. The resulting mutant molecules are then tested for biological activity such as receptor binding or in vitro, or in vitro proliferative activity. Sites that are critical for ligand-receptor binding can also be determined by structural analysis such as crystallization, nuclear magnetic resonance or photoaffinity labeling (Smith et al., J. Mol. Biol. 224:899-904 (1992); de Vos et al. Science 255:306-312 (1992)).

[0967] Substantial homology can be to the entire nucleic acid or amino acid sequence or to fragments of these sequences.

[0968] The invention thus also includes polypeptide fragments of the 23992 receptor protein. Fragments can be derived from the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 13. However, the invention also encompasses fragments of the variants of the 23992 receptor protein as described herein.

[0969] The fragments to which the invention pertains, however, are not to be construed as encompassing fragments that may be disclosed prior to the present invention.

[0970] As used herein, a fragment comprises at least 6 contiguous amino acids. Fragments can retain one or more of the biological activities of the protein, for example the ability to bind to a G-protein or ligand, as well as fragments that can be used as an immunogen to generate receptor antibodies.

[0971] Biologically active fragments (peptides which are, for example, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 50, 100 or more amino acids in length) can comprise a domain or motif, e.g., an extracellular or intracellular domain or loop, one or more transmembrane segments, or parts thereof, G-protein binding site, or GPCR signature, glycosylation sites, phosphorylation sites, and myristoylation sites. Such domains or motifs can be identified by means of routine computerized homology searching procedures.

[0972] Possible fragments include, but are not limited to: 1) soluble peptides comprising the entire amino terminal extracellular domain from amino acid 1 to about amino acid 25 of SEQ ID NO: 13 or parts thereof; 2) peptides comprising the entire carboxy terminal intracellular domain from about amino acid 297 to amino acid 333 of SEQ ID NO: 13 or parts thereof; 3) peptides comprising the region spanning the entire transmembrane domain from about amino acid 26 to amino acid 296; 4) any of the specific transmembrane segments, or parts thereof; 5) any of the three intracellular or three extracellular loops, or parts thereof

[0973] Fragments further include combinations of the above fragments, such as an amino terminal domain combined with one or more transmembrane segments and the attendant extra or intracellular loops or one or more transmembrane segments, and the attendant intra or extracellular loops, plus the carboxy terminal domain. Thus, any of the above fragments can be combined. Other fragments include the mature protein from about amino acid 6 to 333. Other fragments contain the various functional sites described herein and the sequence containing the GPCR signature sequence. Fragments, for example, can extend in one or both directions from the functional site to encompass 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, or up to 100 amino acids. Further, fragments can include sub-fragments of the specific domains mentioned above, which sub-fragments retain the function of the domain from which they are derived.

[0974] These regions can be identified by well-known methods involving computerized homology analysis.

[0975] Fragments also include antigenic fragments and specifically those shown to have a high antigenic index in FIG. 23.

[0976] Further possible fragments include but are not limited to fragments defining a ligand-binding site, fragments defining membrane association, fragments defining interaction with G proteins and signal transduction. By this is intended a discrete fragment that provides the relevant function or allows the relevant function to be identified. In a preferred embodiment, the fragment contains the ligand-binding site.

[0977] The invention also provides fragments with immunogenic properties. These contain an epitope-bearing portion of the 23992 receptor protein and variants. These epitope-bearing peptides are useful to raise antibodies that bind specifically to a receptor polypeptide or region or fragment. These peptides can contain at least 6, 10, 12, at least 14, or between at least about 15 to about 30 amino acids.

[0978] Non-limiting examples of antigenic polypeptides that can be used to generate antibodies include peptides derived from the amino terminal extracellular domain or any of the extracellular loops. Regions having a high antigenicity index are shown in FIG. 23. However, intracellularly-made antibodies (“intrabodies”) are also encompassed, which would recognize intracellular receptor peptide regions.

[0979] The receptor polypeptides (including variants and fragments which may have been disclosed prior to the present invention) are useful for biological assays related to GPCRs. Such assays involve any of the known GPCR functions or activities or properties useful for diagnosis and treatment of GPCR-related conditions, especially diseases involving the tissues in which the receptor is expressed as disclosed herein.

[0980] The epitope-bearing receptor and polypeptides may be produced by any conventional means (Houghten, R. A., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:5131-5135 (1985)). Simultaneous multiple peptide synthesis is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,631,211.

[0981] Fragments can be discrete (not fused to other amino acids or polypeptides) or can be within a larger polypeptide. Further, several fragments can be comprised within a single larger polypeptide. In one embodiment a fragment designed for expression in a host can have heterologous pre- and pro-polypeptide regions fused to the amino terminus of the receptor fragment and an additional region fused to the carboxyl terminus of the fragment.

[0982] The invention thus provides chimeric or fusion proteins. These comprise a receptor protein operatively linked to a heterologous protein having an amino acid sequence not substantially homologous to the receptor protein. “Operatively linked” indicates that the receptor protein and the heterologous protein are fused in-frame. The heterologous protein can be fused to the N-terminus or C-terminus of the receptor protein.

[0983] In one embodiment the fusion protein does not affect receptor function per se. For example, the fusion protein can be a GST-fusion protein in which the receptor sequences are fused to the C-terminus of the GST sequences. Other types of fusion proteins include, but are not limited to, enzymatic fusion proteins, for example beta-galactosidase fusions, yeast two-hybrid GAL fusions, poly-His fusions and Ig fusions. Such fusion proteins, particularly poly-His fusions, can facilitate the purification of recombinant receptor protein. In certain host cells (e.g., mammalian host cells), expression and/or secretion of a protein can be increased by using a heterologous signal sequence. Therefore, in another embodiment, the fusion protein contains a heterologous signal sequence at its N-terminus.

[0984] EP-A-O 464 533 discloses fusion proteins comprising various portions of immunoglobulin constant regions. The Fc is useful in therapy and diagnosis and thus results, for example, in improved pharmacokinetic properties (EP-A 0232 262). In drug discovery, for example, human proteins have been fused with Fc portions for the purpose of high-throughput screening assays to identify antagonists. Bennett et al. (J. Mol. Recog. 8:52-58 (1995)) and Johanson et al. (J. Biol. Chem. 270, 16:9459-9471 (1995)). Thus, this invention also encompasses soluble fusion proteins containing a receptor polypeptide and various portions of the constant regions of heavy or light chains of immunoglobulins of various subclass (IgG, IgM, IgA, IgE). Preferred as immunoglobulin is the constant part of the heavy chain of human IgG, particularly IgG1, where fusion takes place at the hinge region. For some uses it is desirable to remove the Fc after the fusion protein has been used for its intended purpose, for example when the fusion protein is to be used as antigen for immunizations. In a particular embodiment, the Fc part can be removed in a simple way by a cleavage sequence which is also incorporated and can be cleaved with factor Xa.

[0985] A chimeric or fusion protein can be produced by standard recombinant DNA techniques. For example, DNA fragments coding for the different protein sequences are ligated together in-frame in accordance with conventional techniques. In another embodiment, the fusion gene can be synthesized by conventional techniques including automated DNA synthesizers. Alternatively, PCR amplification of gene fragments can be carried out using anchor primers which give rise to complementary overhangs between two consecutive gene fragments which can subsequently be annealed and re-arnplified to generate a chimeric gene sequence (see Ausubel et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, 1992). Moreover, many expression vectors are commercially available that already encode a fusion moiety (e.g., a GST protein). A receptor protein-encoding nucleic acid can be cloned into such an expression vector such that the fusion moiety is linked in-frame to the receptor protein.

[0986] Another form of fusion protein is one that directly affects receptor functions. Accordingly, a receptor polypeptide is encompassed by the present invention in which one or more of the receptor domains (or parts thereof) has been replaced by homologous domains (or parts thereof) from another G-protein coupled receptor or other type of receptor. Accordingly, various permutations are possible. The amino terminal extracellular domain, or subregion thereof, (for example, ligand-binding) can be replaced with the domain or subregion from another ligand-binding receptor protein. Alternatively, the entire transmembrane domain, or any of the seven segments or loops, or parts thereof, for example, G-protein-binding/signal transduction, can be replaced. Finally, the carboxy terminal intracellular domain or subregion can be replaced. Thus, chimeric receptors can be formed in which one or more of the native domains or subregions has been replaced.

[0987] The isolated receptor protein can be purified from cells that naturally express it, such as from lung, uterus, and particularly pregnant uterus, colon, liver, spleen, heart, and adenocarcinoma, and particularly poorly differentiated adenocarcinoma with signet ring features, purified from cells that have been altered to express it (recombinant), or synthesized using known protein synthesis methods.

[0988] In one embodiment, the protein is produced by recombinant DNA techniques. For example, a nucleic acid molecule encoding the receptor polypeptide is cloned into an expression vector, the expression vector introduced into a host cell and the protein expressed in the host cell. The protein can then be isolated from the cells by an appropriate purification scheme using standard protein purification techniques. Polypeptides often contain amino acids other than the 20 amino acids commonly referred to as the 20 naturally-occurring amino acids. Further, many amino acids, including the terminal amino acids, may be modified by natural processes, such as processing and other post-translational modifications, or by chemical modification techniques well known in the art. Common modifications that occur naturally in polypeptides are described in basic texts, detailed monographs, and the research literature, and they are well known to those of skill in the art.

[0989] Accordingly, the polypeptides also encompass derivatives or analogs in which a substituted amino acid residue is not one encoded by the genetic code, in which a substituent group is included, in which the mature polypeptide is fused with another compound, such as a compound to increase the half-life of the polypeptide (for example, polyethylene glycol), or in which the additional amino acids are fused to the mature polypeptide, such as a leader or secretory sequence or a sequence for purification of the mature polypeptide or a pro-protein sequence.

[0990] Known modifications include, but are not limited to, acetylation, acylation, ADP-ribosylation, amidation, covalent attachment of flavin, covalent attachment of a heme moiety, covalent attachment of a nucleotide or nucleotide derivative, covalent attachment of a lipid or lipid derivative, covalent attachment of phosphatidylinositol, cross-linking, cyclization, disulfide bond formation, demethylation, formation of covalent crosslinks, formation of cystine, formation of pyroglutamate, formylation, gamma carboxylation, glycosylation, GPI anchor formation, hydroxylation, iodination, methylation, myristoylation, oxidation, proteolytic processing, phosphorylation, prenylation, racemization, selenoylation, sulfation, transfer-RNA mediated addition of amino acids to proteins such as arginylation, and ubiquitination.

[0991] Such modifications are well known to those of skill in the art and have been described in great detail in the scientific literature. Several particularly common modifications, glycosylation, lipid attachment, sulfation, gamma-carboxylation of glutamic acid residues, hydroxylation and ADP-ribosylation, for instance, are described in most basic texts, such as Proteins—Structure and Molecular Properties, 2nd Ed., T. E. Creighton, W. H. Freeman and Company, New York (1993). Many detailed reviews are available on this subject, such as by Wold, F., Posttranslational Covalent Modification of Proteins, B. C. Johnson, Ed., Academic Press, New York 1-12 (1983); Seifter et al. (Meth. Enzymol. 182: 626-646 (1990)) and Rattan et al. (Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci. 663:48-62 (1992)).

[0992] As is also well known, polypeptides are not always entirely linear. For instance, polypeptides may be branched as a result of ubiquitination, and they may be circular, with or without branching, generally as a result of post-translation events, including natural processing event and events brought about by human manipulation which do not occur naturally. Circular, branched and branched circular polypeptides may be synthesized by non-translational natural processes and by synthetic methods.

[0993] Modifications can occur anywhere in a polypeptide, including the peptide backbone, the amino acid side-chains and the amino or carboxyl termini. Blockage of the amino or carboxyl group in a polypeptide, or both, by a covalent modification, is common in naturally-occurring and synthetic polypeptides. For instance, the amino terminal residue of polypeptides made in E. coli, prior to proteolytic processing, almost invariably will be N-formylmethionine.

[0994] The modifications can be a function of how the protein is made. For recombinant polypeptides, for example, the modifications will be determined by the host cell posttranslational modification capacity and the modification signals in the polypeptide amino acid sequence. Accordingly, when glycosylation is desired, a polypeptide should be expressed in a glycosylating host, generally a eukaryotic cell. Insect cells often carry out the same posttranslational glycosylations as mammalian cells and, for this reason, insect cell expression systems have been developed to efficiently express mammalian proteins having native patterns of glycosylation. Similar considerations apply to other modifications.

[0995] The same type of modification may be present in the same or varying degree at several sites in a given polypeptide. Also, a given polypeptide may contain more than one type of modification.

[0996] Polypeptide Uses

[0997] The receptor polypeptides are useful for producing antibodies specific for the 23992 receptor protein, regions, or fragments. Regions having a high antigenicity index score are shown in FIG. 23.

[0998] The receptor polypeptides (including variants and fragments which may have been disclosed prior to the present invention) are useful for biological assays related to GPCR. Such assays involve any of the known GPCR functions or activities or properties useful for diagnosis and treatment of GPCR-related conditions.

[0999] The receptor polypeptides are also useful in drug screening assays, in cell-based or cell-free systems. Cell-based systems can be native, i.e., cells that normally express the receptor protein, as a biopsy or expanded in cell culture. In one embodiment, however, cell-based assays involve recombinant host cells expressing the receptor protein.

[1000] Determining the ability of the test compound to interact with the polypeptide can also comprise determining the ability of the test compound to preferentially bind to the polypeptide as compared to the ability of the ligand, or a biologically active portion thereof, to bind to the polypeptide.

[1001] The polypeptides can be used to identify compounds that modulate receptor activity. Such compounds, for example, can increase or decrease affinity or rate of binding to a known ligand, compete with ligand for binding to the receptor, or displace ligand bound to the receptor. Both 23992 protein and appropriate variants and fragments can be used in high-throughput screens to assay candidate compounds for the ability to bind to the receptor. These compounds can be further screened against a functional receptor to determine the effect of the compound on the receptor activity. Compounds can be identified that activate (agonist) or inactivate (antagonist) the receptor to a desired degree. Modulatory methods can be performed in vitro (e.g., by culturing the cell with the agent) or, alternatively, in vivo (e.g., by administering the agent to a subject).

[1002] The receptor polypeptides can be used to screen a compound for the ability to stimulate or inhibit interaction between the receptor protein and a target molecule that normally interacts with the receptor protein. The target can be ligand or a component of the signal pathway with which the receptor protein normally interacts (for example, a G-protein or other interactor involved in cAMP or phosphatidylinositol turnover and/or adenylate cyclase, or phospholipase C activation). The assay includes the steps of combining the receptor protein with a candidate compound under conditions that allow the receptor protein or fragment to interact with the target molecule, and to detect the formation of a complex between the protein and the target or to detect the biochemical consequence of the interaction with the receptor protein and the target, such as any of the associated effects of signal transduction such as G-protein phosphorylation, cyclic AMP or phosphatidylinositol turnover, and adenylate cyclase or phospholipase C activation.

[1003] Determining the ability of the protein to bind to a target molecule can also be accomplished using a technology such as real-time Bimolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA). Sjolander, S. and Urbaniczky, C. (1991) Anal. Chem. 63:2338-2345 and Szabo et al. (1995) Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 5:699-705. As used herein, “BIA” is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any of the interactants (e.g., BIAcore™). Changes in the optical phenomenon surface plasmon resonance (SPR) can be used as an indication of real-time reactions between biological molecules.

[1004] The test compounds of the present invention can be obtained using any of the numerous approaches in combinatorial library methods known in the art, including: biological libraries; spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries; synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution; the ‘one-bead one-compound’ library method; and synthetic library methods using affinity chromatography selection. The biological library approach is limited to polypeptide libraries, while the other four approaches are applicable to polypeptide, non-peptide oligomer or small molecule libraries of compounds (Lam, K. S. (1997)Anticancer Drug Des. 12:145).

[1005] Examples of methods for the synthesis of molecular libraries can be found in the art, for example in DeWitt et al. (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:6909; Erb et al. (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:11422; Zuckermann et al. (1994). J. Med. Chem. 37:2678; Cho et al. (1993) Science 261:1303; Carell et al. (1994) Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 33:2059; Carell et al. (1994) Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 33:2061; and in Gallop et al. (1994) J. Med. Chem. 37:1233. Libraries of compounds maybe presented in solution (e.g., Houghten (1992) Biotechniques 13:412-421), or on beads (Lam (1991) Nature 354:82-84), chips (Fodor (1993) Nature 364:555-556), bacteria (Ladner U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,409), spores (Ladner U.S. Pat. No. 409), plasmids (Cull et al. (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:1865-1869) or on phage (Scott and Smith (1990) Science 249:386-390); (Devlin (1990) Science 249:404-406); (Cwirla et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 97:6378-6382); (Felici (1991) J. Mol. Biol. 222:301-310); (Ladner supra).

[1006] Candidate compounds include, for example, 1) peptides such as soluble peptides, including Ig-tailed fusion peptides and members of random peptide libraries (see, e.g., Lam et al., Nature 354:82-84 (1991); Houghten et al., Nature 354:84-86 (1991)) and combinatorial chemistry-derived molecular libraries made of D- and/or L-configuration amino acids; 2) phosphopeptides (e.g., members of random and partially degenerate, directed phosphopeptide libraries, see, e.g., Songyang et al., Cell 72:767-778 (1993)); 3) antibodies (e.g., polyclonal, monoclonal, humanized, anti-idiotypic, chimeric, and single chain antibodies as well as Fab, F(ab′)2, Fab expression library fragments, and epitope-binding fragments of antibodies); and 4) small organic and inorganic molecules (e.g., molecules obtained from combinatorial and natural product libraries).

[1007] One candidate compound is a soluble full-length receptor or fragment that competes for ligand binding. Other candidate compounds include mutant receptors or appropriate fragments containing mutations that affect receptor function and thus compete for ligand. Accordingly, a fragment that competes for ligand, for example with a higher affinity, or a fragment that binds ligand but does not allow release, is encompassed by the invention.

[1008] The invention provides other end points to identify compounds that modulate (stimulate or inhibit) receptor activity. The assays typically involve an assay of events in the signal transduction pathway that indicate receptor activity. Thus, the expression of genes that are up- or down-regulated in response to the receptor protein dependent signal cascade can be assayed. In one embodiment, the regulatory region of such genes can be operably linked to a marker that is easily detectable, such as luciferase. Alternatively, phosphorylation of the receptor protein, or a receptor protein target, could also be measured.

[1009] Any of the biological or biochemical functions mediated by the receptor can be used as an endpoint assay. These include all of the biochemical or biochemical/biological events described herein, in the references cited herein, incorporated by reference for these endpoint assay targets, and other functions known to those of ordinary skill in the art.

[1010] Binding and/or activating compounds can also be screened by using chimeric receptor proteins in which the amino terminal extracellular domain, or parts thereof, the entire transmembrane domain or subregions, such as any of the seven transmembrane segments or any of the intracellular or extracellular loops and the carboxy terminal intracellular domain, or parts thereof, can be replaced by heterologous domains or subregions. For example, a G-protein-binding region can be used that interacts with a different G-protein than that which is recognized by the native receptor. Accordingly, a different set of signal transduction components is available as an end-point assay for activation. Alternatively, the entire transmembrane portion or subregions (such as transmembrane segments or intracellular or extracellular loops) can be replaced with the entire transmembrane portion or subregions specific to a host cell that is different from the host cell from which the amino terminal extracellular domain and/or the G-protein-binding region are derived. This allows for assays to be performed in other than the specific host cell from which the receptor is derived. Alternatively, the amino terminal extracellular domain (and/or other ligand-binding regions) could be replaced by a domain (and/or other binding region) binding a different ligand, thus, providing an assay for test compounds that interact with the heterologous amino terminal extracellular domain (or region) but still cause signal transduction. Finally, activation can be detected by a reporter gene containing an easily detectable coding region operably linked to a transcriptional regulatory sequence that is part of the native signal transduction pathway.

[1011] The receptor polypeptides are also useful in competition binding assays in methods designed to discover compounds that interact with the receptor. Thus, a compound is exposed to a receptor polypeptide under conditions that allow the compound to bind or to otherwise interact with the polypeptide. Soluble receptor polypeptide is also added to the mixture. If the test compound interacts with the soluble receptor polypeptide, it decreases the amount of complex formed or activity from the receptor target. This type of assay is particularly useful in cases in which compounds are sought that interact with specific regions of the receptor. Thus, the soluble polypeptide that competes with the target receptor region is designed to contain peptide sequences corresponding to the region of interest.

[1012] To perform cell free drug screening assays, it is desirable to immobilize either the receptor protein, or fragment, or its target molecule to facilitate separation of complexes from uncomplexed forms of one or both of the proteins, as well as to accommodate automation of the assay.

[1013] Techniques for immobilizing proteins on matrices can be used in the drug screening assays. In one embodiment, a fusion protein can be provided which adds a domain that allows the protein to be bound to a matrix. For example, glutathione-S-transferase/23992 fusion proteins can be adsorbed onto glutathione sepharose beads (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, Mo.) or glutathione derivatized microtitre plates, which are then combined with the cell lysates (e.g., 35S-labeled) and the candidate compound, and the mixture incubated under conditions conducive to complex formation (e.g., at physiological conditions for salt and pH). Following incubation, the beads are washed to remove any unbound label, and the matrix immobilized and radiolabel determined directly, or in the supernatant after the complexes are dissociated. Alternatively, the complexes can be dissociated from the matrix, separated by SDS-PAGE, and the level of receptor-binding protein found in the bead fraction quantitated from the gel using standard electrophoretic techniques. For example, either the polypeptide or its target molecule can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin using techniques well known in the art. Alternatively, antibodies reactive with the protein but which do not interfere with binding of the protein to its target molecule can be derivatized to the wells of the plate, and the protein trapped in the wells by antibody conjugation. Preparations of a receptor-binding protein and a candidate compound are incubated in the receptor protein-presenting wells and the amount of complex trapped in the well can be quantitated. Methods for detecting such complexes, in addition to those described above for the GST-immobilized complexes, include immunodetection of complexes using antibodies reactive with the receptor protein target molecule, or which are reactive with receptor protein and compete with the target molecule; as well as enzyme-linked assays which rely on detecting an enzymatic activity associated with the target molecule.

[1014] Modulators of receptor protein activity identified according to these drug screening assays can be used to treat a subject with a disorder mediated by the receptor pathway, by treating cells that express the 23992 protein, such as those disclosed herein.

[1015] Disorders involving the spleen include, but are not limited to, splenomegaly, including nonspecific acute splenitis, congestive spenomegaly, and spenic infarcts; neoplasms, congenital anomalies, and rupture. Disorders associated with splenomegaly include infections, such as nonspecific splenitis, infectious mononucleosis, tuberculosis, typhoid fever, brucellosis, cytomegalovirus, syphilis, malaria, histoplasmosis, toxoplasmosis, kala-azar, trypanosomiasis, schistosomiasis, leishmaniasis, and echinococcosis; congestive states related to partial hypertension, such as cirrhosis of the liver, portal or splenic vein thrombosis, and cardiac failure; lymphohematogenous disorders, such as Hodgkin disease, non-Hodgkin lymphomas/leukemia, multiple myeloma, myeloproliferative disorders, hemolytic anemias, and thrombocytopenic purpura; immunologic-inflammatory conditions, such as rheumatoid arthritis and systemic lupus erythematosus; storage diseases such as Gaucher disease, Niemann-Pick disease, and mucopolysaccharidoses; and other conditions, such as amyloidosis, primary neoplasms and cysts, and secondary neoplasms.

[1016] Disorders involving the lung include, but are not limited to, congenital anomalies; atelectasis; diseases of vascular origin, such as pulmonary congestion and edema, including hemodynamic pulmonary edema and edema caused by microvascular injury, adult respiratory distress syndrome (diffuse alveolar damage), pulmonary embolism, hemorrhage, and infarction, and pulmonary hypertension and vascular sclerosis; chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, such as emphysema, chronic bronchitis, bronchial asthma, and bronchiectasis; diffuse interstitial (infiltrative, restrictive) diseases, such as pneumoconioses, sarcoidosis, idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis, desquamative interstitial pneumonitis, hypersensitivity pneumonitis, pulmonary eosinophilia (pulmonary infiltration with eosinophilia), Bronchiolitis obliterans-organizing pneumonia, diffuse pulmonary hemorrhage syndromes, including Goodpasture syndrome, idiopathic pulmonary hemosiderosis and other hemorrhagic syndromes, pulmonary involvement in collagen vascular disorders, and pulmonary alveolar proteinosis; complications of therapies, such as drug-induced lung disease, radiation-induced lung disease, and lung transplantation; tumors, such as bronchogenic carcinoma, including paraneoplastic syndromes, bronchioloalveolar carcinoma, neuroendocrine tumors, such as bronchial carcinoid, miscellaneous tumors, and metastatic tumors; pathologies of the pleura, including inflammatory pleural effusions, noninflammatory pleural effusions, pneumothorax, and pleural tumors, including solitary fibrous tumors (pleural fibroma) and malignant mesothelioma.

[1017] Disorders involving the colon include, but are not limited to, congenital anomalies, such as atresia and stenosis, Meckel diverticulum, congenital aganglionic megacolon-Hirschsprung disease; enterocolitis, such as diarrhea and dysentery, infectious enterocolitis, including viral gastroenteritis, bacterial enterocolitis, necrotizing enterocolitis, antibiotic-associated colitis (pseudomembranous colitis), and collagenous and lymphocytic colitis, miscellaneous intestinal inflammatory disorders, including parasites and protozoa, acquired immunodeficiency syndrome, transplantation, drug-induced intestinal injury, radiation enterocolitis, neutropenic colitis (typhlitis), and diversion colitis; idiopathic inflammatory bowel disease, such as Crohn disease and ulcerative colitis; tumors of the colon, such as non-neoplastic polyps, adenomas, familial syndromes, colorectal carcinogenesis, colorectal carcinoma, and carcinoid tumors.

[1018] Disorders involving the liver include, but are not limited to, hepatic injury; jaundice and cholestasis, such as bilirubin and bile formation; hepatic failure and cirrhosis, such as cirrhosis, portal hypertension, including ascites, portosystemic shunts, and splenomegaly; infectious disorders, such as viral hepatitis, including hepatitis A-E infection and infection by other hepatitis viruses, clinicopathologic syndromes, such as the carrier state, asymptomatic infection, acute viral hepatitis, chronic viral hepatitis, and fulminant hepatitis; autoimmune hepatitis; drug- and toxin-induced liver disease, such as alcoholic liver disease; inborn errors of metabolism and pediatric liver disease, such as hemochromatosis, Wilson disease, α1-antitrypsin deficiency, and neonatal hepatitis; intrahepatic biliary tract disease, such as secondary biliary cirrhosis, primary biliary cirrhosis, primary sclerosing cholangitis, and anomalies of the biliary tree; circulatory disorders, such as impaired blood flow into the liver, including hepatic artery compromise and portal vein obstruction and thrombosis, impaired blood flow through the liver, including passive congestion and centrilobular necrosis and peliosis hepatis, hepatic vein outflow obstruction, including hepatic vein thrombosis (Budd-Chiari syndrome) and veno-occlusive disease; hepatic disease associated with pregnancy, such as preeclampsia and eclampsia, acute fatty liver of pregnancy, and intrehepatic cholestasis of pregnancy; hepatic complications of organ or bone marrow transplantation, such as drug toxicity after bone marrow transplantation, graft-versus-host disease and liver rejection, and nonimmunologic damage to liver allografts; tumors and tumorous conditions, such as nodular hyperplasias, adenomas, and malignant tumors, including primary carcinoma of the liver and metastatic tumors.

[1019] Disorders involving the uterus and endometrium include, but are not limited to, endometrial histology in the menstrual cycle; functional endometrial disorders, such as anovulatory cycle, inadequate luteal phase, oral contraceptives and induced endometrial changes, and menopausal and postmenopausal changes; inflammations, such as chronic endometritis; adenomyosis; endometriosis; endometrial polyps; endometrial hyperplasia; malignant tumors, such as carcinoma of the endometrium; mixed Müllerian and mesenchymal tumors, such as malignant mixed Müllerian tumors; tumors of the myometrium, including leiomyomas, leiomyosarcomas, and endometrial stromal tumors.

[1020] Disorders involving the heart, include but are not limited to, heart failure, including but not limited to, cardiac hypertrophy, left-sided heart failure, and right-sided heart failure; ischemic heart disease, including but not limited to angina pectoris, myocardial infarction, chronic ischemic heart disease, and sudden cardiac death; hypertensive heart disease, including but not limited to, systemic (left-sided) hypertensive heart disease and pulmonary (right-sided) hypertensive heart disease; valvular heart disease, including but not limited to, valvular degeneration caused by calcification, such as calcific aortic stenosis, calcification of a congenitally bicuspid aortic valve, and mitral annular calcification, and myxomatous degeneration of the mitral valve (mitral valve prolapse), rheumatic fever and rheumatic heart disease, infective endocarditis, and noninfected vegetations, such as nonbacterial thrombotic endocarditis and endocarditis of systemic lupus erythematosus (Libman-Sacks disease), carcinoid heart disease, and complications of artificial valves; myocardial disease, including but not limited to dilated cardiomyopathy, hypertrophic cardiomyopathy, restrictive cardiomyopathy, and myocarditis; pericardial disease, including but not limited to, pericardial effusion and hemopericardium and pericarditis, including acute pericarditis and healed pericarditis, and rheumatoid heart disease; neoplastic heart disease, including but not limited to, primary cardiac tumors, such as myxoma, lipoma, papillary fibroelastoma, rhabdomyoma, and sarcoma, and cardiac effects of noncardiac neoplasms; congenital heart disease, including but not limited to, left-to-right shunts—late cyanosis, such as atrial septal defect, ventricular septal defect, patent ductus arteriosus, and atrioventricular septal defect, right-to-left shunts—early cyanosis, such as tetralogy of fallot, transposition of great arteries, truncus arteriosus, tricuspid atresia, and total anomalous pulmonary venous connection, obstructive congenital anomalies, such as coarctation of aorta, pulmonary stenosis and atresia, and aortic stenosis and atresia, and disorders involving cardiac transplantation.

[1021] Preferred disorders include lung disorders, cardiovascular disorders and liver fibrosis.

[1022] These methods of treatment include the steps of administering the modulators of protein activity in a pharmaceutical composition as described herein, to a subject in need of such treatment.

[1023] The receptor polypeptides are thus useful for treating an receptor-associated disorder characterized by aberrant expression or activity of an receptor protein. In one embodiment, the method involves administering an agent (e.g., an agent identified by a screening assay described herein), or combination of agents that modulates (e.g., upregulates or downregulates) expression or activity of the protein. In another embodiment, the method involves administering a protein as therapy to compensate for reduced or aberrant expression or activity of the protein.

[1024] Stimulation of protein activity is desirable in situations in which the protein is abnormally downregulated and/or in which increased protein activity is likely to have a beneficial effect. Likewise, inhibition of protein activity is desirable in situations in which the protein is abnormally upregulated and/or in which decreased protein activity is likely to have a beneficial effect. In one example of such a situation, a subject has a disorder characterized by aberrant development or cellular differentiation. In another example of such a situation, the subject has a proliferative disease (e.g., cancer) or a disorder characterized by an aberrant hematopoietic response. In another example of such a situation, it is desirable to achieve tissue regeneration in a subject (e.g., where a subject has undergone brain or spinal cord injury and it is desirable to regenerate neuronal tissue in a regulated manner).

[1025] In yet another aspect of the invention, the proteins of the invention can be used as “bait proteins” in a two-hybrid assay or three-hybrid assay (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,283,317; Zervos et al. (1993) Cell 72:223-232; Madura et al. (1993) J. Biol. Chem. 268:12046-12054; Bartel et al. (1993) Biotechniques 14:920-924; Iwabuchi et al. (1993) Oncogene 8:1693-1696; and Brent WO 94/10300), to identify other proteins (captured proteins) which bind to or interact with the proteins of the invention and modulate their activity.

[1026] The receptor polypeptides also are useful to provide a target for diagnosing a disease or predisposition to disease mediated by the receptor protein, especially in diseases involving the tissues in which the receptor is expressed as disclosed herein. Accordingly, methods are provided for detecting the presence, or levels of, the receptor protein in a cell, tissue, or organism. The method involves contacting a biological sample with a compound capable of interacting with the receptor protein such that the interaction can be detected.

[1027] One agent for detecting receptor protein is an antibody capable of selectively binding to receptor protein. A biological sample includes tissues, cells and biological fluids isolated from a subject, as well as tissues, cells and fluids present within a subject.

[1028] The receptor protein also provides a target for diagnosing active disease, or predisposition to disease, in a patient having a variant receptor protein. Thus, receptor protein can be isolated from a biological sample, assayed for the presence of a genetic mutation that results in aberrant receptor protein. This includes amino acid substitution, deletion, insertion, rearrangement, (as the result of aberrant splicing events), and inappropriate post-translational modification. Analytic methods include altered electrophoretic mobility, altered tryptic peptide digest, altered receptor activity in cell-based or cell-free assay, alteration in ligand or antibody-binding pattern, altered isoelectric point, direct amino acid sequencing, and any other of the known assay techniques useful for detecting mutations in a protein.

[1029] In vitro techniques for detection of receptor protein include enzyme linked immunosorbent assays (ELISAs), Western blots, immunoprecipitations and immunofluorescence. Alternatively, the protein can be detected in vivo in a subject by introducing into the subject a labeled anti-receptor antibody. For example, the antibody can be labeled with a radioactive marker whose presence and location in a subject can be detected by standard imaging techniques. Particularly useful are methods which detect the allelic variant of a receptor protein expressed in a subject and methods which detect fragments of a receptor protein in a sample.

[1030] The receptor polypeptides are also useful in pharmacogenomic analysis. Pharmacogenomics deal with clinically significant hereditary variations in the response to drugs due to altered drug disposition and abnormal action in affected persons. See, e.g., Eichelbaum, M., Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Physiol. 23(10-11) : 983-985 (1996), and Linder, M. W., Clin. Chem. 43(2): 254-266 (1997). The clinical outcomes of these variations result in severe toxicity of therapeutic drugs in certain individuals or therapeutic failure of drugs in certain individuals as a result of individual variation in metabolism. Thus, the genotype of the individual can determine the way a therapeutic compound acts on the body or the way the body metabolizes the compound. Further, the activity of drug metabolizing enzymes effects both the intensity and duration of drug action. Thus, the pharmacogenomics of the individual permit the selection of effective compounds and effective dosages of such compounds for prophylactic or therapeutic treatment based on the individual's genotype. The discovery of genetic polymorphisms in some drug metabolizing enzymes has explained why some patients do not obtain the expected drug effects, show an exaggerated drug effect, or experience serious toxicity from standard drug dosages. Polymorphisms can be expressed in the phenotype of the extensive metabolizer and the phenotype of the poor metabolizer. Accordingly, genetic polymorphism may lead to allelic protein variants of the receptor protein in which one or more of the receptor functions in one population is different from those in another population. The polypeptides thus allow a target to ascertain a genetic predisposition that can affect treatment modality. Thus, in a ligand-based treatment, polymorphism may give rise to amino terminal extracellular domains and/or other ligand-binding regions that are more or less active in ligand binding, and receptor activation. Accordingly, ligand dosage would necessarily be modified to maximize the therapeutic effect within a given population containing a polymorphism. As an alternative to genotyping, specific polymorphic polypeptides could be identified.

[1031] The receptor polypeptides are also useful for monitoring therapeutic effects during clinical trials and other treatment. Thus, the therapeutic effectiveness of an agent that is designed to increase or decrease gene expression, protein levels or receptor activity can be monitored over the course of treatment using the receptor polypeptides as an end-point target. The monitoring can be, for example, as follows: (i) obtaining a pre-administration sample from a subject prior to administration of the agent; (ii) detecting the level of expression or activity of a specified protein in the pre-administration sample; (iii) obtaining one or more post-administration samples from the subject; (iv) detecting the level of expression or activity of the protein in the post-administration samples; (v) comparing the level of expression or activity of the protein in the pre-administration sample with the protein in the post-administration sample or samples; and (vi) increasing or decreasing the administration of the agent to the subject accordingly.

[1032] The receptor polypeptides are also useful for treating a receptor-associated disorder. Accordingly, methods for treatment include the use of soluble receptor or fragments of the receptor protein that compete for ligand binding. These receptors or fragments can have a higher affinity for the ligand so as to provide effective competition.

[1033] Antibodies

[1034] The invention also provides antibodies that selectively bind to the 23992 receptor protein and its variants and fragments. An antibody is considered to selectively bind, even if it also binds to other proteins that are not substantially homologous with the receptor protein. These other proteins share homology with a fragment or domain of the receptor protein. This conservation in specific regions gives rise to antibodies that bind to both proteins by virtue of the homologous sequence. In this case, it would be understood that antibody binding to the receptor protein is still selective.

[1035] To generate antibodies, an isolated receptor polypeptide is used as an immunogen to generate antibodies using standard techniques for polyclonal and monoclonal antibody preparation. Either the full-length protein or antigenic peptide fragment can be used. Regions having a high antigenicity index are shown in FIG. 23.

[1036] Antibodies are preferably prepared from these regions or from discrete fragments in these regions. However, antibodies can be prepared from any region of the peptide as described herein. A preferred fragment produces an antibody that diminishes or completely prevents ligand-binding. Antibodies can be developed against the entire receptor or portions of the receptor, for example, the intracellular carboxy terminal domain, the amino terminal extracellular domain, the entire transmembrane domain or specific segments, any of the intra or extracellular loops, or any portions of the above. Antibodies may also be developed against specific functional sites, such as the site of ligand-binding, the site of G protein coupling, or sites that are phosphorylated, myristoylated, or glycosylated.

[1037] An antigenic fragment will typically comprise at least 6 contiguous amino acid residues. The antigenic peptide can comprise a contiguous sequence of at least 12, at least 14 amino acid residues, at least 15 amino acid residues, at least 20 amino acid residues, or at least 30 amino acid residues. In one embodiment, fragments correspond to regions that are located on the surface of the protein, e.g., hydrophilic regions. These fragments are not to be construed, however, as encompassing any fragments which may be disclosed prior to the invention.

[1038] Antibodies can be polyclonal or monoclonal. An intact antibody, or a fragment thereof (e.g. Fab or F(ab′)2) can be used.

[1039] Detection can be facilitated by coupling (i.e., physically linking) the antibody to a detectable substance. Examples of detectable substances include various enzymes, prosthetic groups, fluorescent materials, luminescent materials, bioluminescent materials, and radioactive materials. Examples of suitable enzymes include horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, β-galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase; examples of suitable prosthetic group complexes include streptavidin/biotin and avidin/biotin; examples of suitable fluorescent materials include umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride or phycoerythrin; an example of a luminescent material includes luminol; examples of bioluminescent materials include luciferase, luciferin, and aequorin, and examples of suitable radioactive material include 125I, 131I, 35S or 3H.

[1040] An appropriate immunogenic preparation can be derived from native, recombinantly expressed, protein or chemically synthesized peptides.

[1041] Antibody Uses

[1042] The antibodies can be used to isolate a receptor protein by standard techniques, such as affinity chromatography or immunoprecipitation. The antibodies can facilitate the purification of the natural receptor protein from cells and recombinantly produced receptor protein expressed in host cells.

[1043] The antibodies are useful to detect the presence of receptor protein in cells or tissues to determine the pattern of expression of the receptor among various tissues in an organism and over the course of normal development.

[1044] The antibodies can be used to detect receptor protein in situ, in vitro, or in a cell lysate or supernatant in order to evaluate the abundance and pattern of expression.

[1045] The antibodies can be used to assess abnormal tissue distribution or abnormal expression during development.

[1046] Antibody detection of circulating fragments of the full length receptor protein can be used to identify receptor turnover.

[1047] Further, the antibodies can be used to assess receptor expression in disease states such as in active stages of the disease or in an individual with a predisposition toward disease related to receptor function. When a disorder is caused by an inappropriate tissue distribution, developmental expression, or level of expression of the receptor protein, the antibody can be prepared against the normal receptor protein. If a disorder is characterized by a specific mutation in the receptor protein, antibodies specific for this mutant protein can be used to assay for the presence of the specific mutant receptor protein. However, intracellularly-made antibodies (“intrabodies”) are also encompassed, which would recognize intracellular receptor peptide regions.

[1048] The antibodies can also be used to assess normal and aberrant subcellular localization of cells in the various tissues in an organism. Antibodies can be developed against the whole receptor or portions of the receptor, for example, portions of the amino terminal extracellular domain or extracellular loops.

[1049] The diagnostic uses can be applied, not only in genetic testing, but also in monitoring a treatment modality. Accordingly, where treatment is ultimately aimed at correcting receptor expression level or the presence of aberrant receptors and aberrant tissue distribution or developmental expression, antibodies directed against the receptor or relevant fragments can be used to monitor therapeutic efficacy. Antibodies accordingly can be used diagnostically to monitor protein levels in tissue as part of a clinical testing procedure, e.g., to, for example, determine the efficacy of a given treatment regimen.

[1050] Additionally, antibodies are useful in pharmacogenomic analysis. Thus, antibodies prepared against polymorphic receptor proteins can be used to identify individuals that require modified treatment modalities.

[1051] The antibodies are also useful as diagnostic tools as an immunological marker for aberrant receptor protein analyzed by electrophoretic mobility, isoelectric point, tryptic peptide digest, and other physical assays known to those in the art.

[1052] The antibodies are also useful for tissue typing. Thus, where a specific receptor protein has been correlated with expression in a specific tissue, antibodies that are specific for this receptor protein can be used to identify a tissue type.

[1053] The antibodies are also useful in forensic identification. Accordingly, where an individual has been correlated with a specific genetic polymorphism resulting in a specific polymorphic protein, an antibody specific for the polymorphic protein can be used as an aid in identification.

[1054] The antibodies are also useful for inhibiting receptor function, for example, blocking ligand binding.

[1055] These uses can also be applied in a therapeutic context in which treatment involves inhibiting receptor function. An antibody can be used, for example, to block ligand binding. Antibodies can be prepared against specific fragments containing sites required for function or against intact receptor associated with a cell.

[1056] Completely human antibodies are particularly desirable for therapeutic treatment of human patients. For an overview of this technology for producing human antibodies, see Lonberg and Huszar (1995, Int. Rev. Immunol. 13:65-93). For a detailed discussion of this technology for producing human antibodies and human monoclonal antibodies and protocols for producing such antibodies, see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,625,126; 5,633,425; 5,569,825; 5,661,016; and 5,545,806.

[1057] The invention also encompasses kits for using antibodies to detect the presence of a receptor protein in a biological sample. The kit can comprise antibodies such as a labeled or labelable antibody and a compound or agent for detecting receptor protein in a biological sample; means for determining the amount of receptor protein in the sample; and means for comparing the amount of receptor protein in the sample with a standard. The compound or agent can be packaged in a suitable container. The kit can further comprise instructions for using the kit to detect receptor protein.

[1058] Polynucleotides

[1059] The nucleotide sequence in SEQ ID NO: 14 was obtained by sequencing the deposited human full length cDNA. Accordingly, the sequence of the deposited clone is controlling as to any discrepancies between the two and any reference to the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 14 includes reference to the sequence of the deposited cDNA.

[1060] The specifically disclosed cDNA comprises the coding region and 5′ and 3′ untranslated sequences (SEQ ID NO: 14).

[1061] The human 23992 receptor cDNA is approximately 1928 nucleotides in length and encodes a full length protein that is approximately 333 amino acid residues in length. The nucleic acid is expressed in lung, uterus, and particularly pregnant uterus, colon, liver, spleen, and adenocarcinoma, particularly poorly differentiated adenocarcinoma with signet ring cell features. Structural analysis of the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 13 is provided in FIG. 23, a hydropathy plot. The figure shows the putative structure of the seven transmembrane segments, the amino terminal extracellular domain and the carboxy terminal intracellular domain.

[1062] As used herein, the term “transmembrane segment” refers to a structural amino acid motif which includes a hydrophobic helix that spans the plasma membrane.

[1063] The invention provides isolated polynucleotides encoding a 23992 receptor protein. The term “23992 polynucleotide” or “23992 nucleic acid” refers to the sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 14 or in the deposited cDNA. The term “receptor polynucleotide” or “receptor nucleic acid” further includes variants and fragments of the 23992 polynucleotide.

[1064] An “isolated” receptor nucleic acid is one that is separated from other nucleic acid present in the natural source of the receptor nucleic acid. Preferably, an “isolated” nucleic acid is free of sequences which naturally flank the nucleic acid (i.e., sequences located at the 5′ and 3′ ends of the nucleic acid) in the genomic DNA of the organism from which the nucleic acid is derived. However, there can be some flanking nucleotide sequences, for example up to about 5KB. The important point is that the nucleic acid is isolated from flanking sequences such that it can be subjected to the specific manipulations described herein such as recombinant expression, preparation of probes and primers, and other uses specific to the receptor nucleic acid sequences.

[1065] Moreover, an “isolated” nucleic acid molecule, such as a cDNA or RNA molecule, can be substantially free of other cellular material, or culture medium when produced by recombinant techniques, or chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized. However, the nucleic acid molecule can be fused to other coding or regulatory sequences and still be considered isolated.

[1066] For example, recombinant DNA molecules contained in a vector are considered isolated. Further examples of isolated DNA molecules include recombinant DNA molecules maintained in heterologous host cells or purified (partially or substantially) DNA molecules in solution. Isolated RNA molecules include in vivo or in vitro RNA transcripts of the isolated DNA molecules of the present invention. Isolated nucleic acid molecules according to the present invention further include such molecules produced synthetically.

[1067] In some instances, the isolated material will form part of a composition (for example, a crude extract containing other substances), buffer system or reagent mix. In other circumstances, the material may be purified to essential homogeneity, for example as determined by PAGE or column chromatography such as HPLC. Preferably, an isolated nucleic acid comprises at least about 50, 80 or 90% (on a molar basis) of all macromolecular species present.

[1068] The receptor polynucleotides can encode the mature protein plus additional amino or carboxyl-terminal amino acids, or amino acids interior to the mature polypeptide (when the mature form has more than one polypeptide chain, for instance). Such sequences may play a role in processing of a protein from precursor to a mature form, facilitate protein trafficking, prolong or shorten protein half-life or facilitate manipulation of a protein for assay or production, among other things. As generally is the case in situ, the additional amino acids may be processed away from the mature protein by cellular enzymes.

[1069] The receptor polynucleotides include, but are not limited to, the sequence encoding the mature polypeptide alone, the sequence encoding the mature polypeptide and additional coding sequences, such as a leader or secretory sequence (e.g., a pre-pro or pro-protein sequence), the sequence encoding the mature polypeptide, with or without the additional coding sequences, plus additional non-coding sequences, for example introns and non-coding 5′ and 3′ sequences such as transcribed but non-translated sequences that play a role in transcription, mRNA processing (including splicing and polyadenylation signals), ribosome binding and stability of mRNA. In addition, the polynucleotide may be fused to a marker sequence encoding, for example, a peptide that facilitates purification.

[1070] Receptor polynucleotides can be in the form of RNA, such as mRNA, or in the form DNA, including cDNA and genomic DNA obtained by cloning or produced by chemical synthetic techniques or by a combination thereof. The nucleic acid, especially DNA, can be double-stranded or single-stranded. Single-stranded nucleic acid can be the coding strand (sense strand) or the non-coding strand (anti-sense strand).

[1071] One receptor nucleic acid comprises the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 14, corresponding to human lung cDNA.

[1072] In one embodiment, the receptor nucleic acid comprises only the coding region.

[1073] The invention further provides variant receptor polynucleotides, and fragments thereof, that differ from the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 14 due to degeneracy of the genetic code and thus encode the same protein as that encoded by the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 14.

[1074] The invention also provides receptor nucleic acid molecules encoding the variant polypeptides described herein. Such polynucleotides may be naturally occurring, such as allelic variants (same locus) (maps to chromosome 7, SHGC-34866), homologs (different locus), and orthologs (different organism), or may be constructed by recombinant DNA methods or by chemical synthesis. Such non-naturally occurring variants may be made by mutagenesis techniques, including those applied to polynucleotides, cells, or organisms. Accordingly, as discussed above, the variants can contain nucleotide substitutions, deletions, inversions and insertions.

[1075] Variation can occur in either or both the coding and non-coding regions. The variations can produce both conservative and non-conservative amino acid substitutions.

[1076] Typically, variants have a substantial identity with the nucleic acid molecule of SEQ ID NO: 14 and the complements thereof.

[1077] Orthologs, homologs, and allelic variants can be identified using methods well known in the art. These variants comprise a nucleotide sequence encoding a receptor that is at least about 55%, typically at least about 70-75%, more typically at least about 80-85%, and most typically at least about 90-95% or more homologous to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 14 or a fragment of this sequence. Such nucleic acid molecules can readily be identified as being able to hybridize under stringent conditions, to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 14 or a fragment of the sequence. It is understood that stringent hybridization does not indicate substantial homology where it is due to general homology, such as poly A sequences, or sequences common to all or most proteins, all GPCRs, or all family I GPCRs or even all chemokine receptors. Moreover, it is understood that variants do not include any of the nucleic acid sequences that may have been disclosed prior to the invention.

[1078] As used herein, the term “hybridizes under stringent conditions” is intended to describe conditions for hybridization and washing under which nucleotide sequences encoding a receptor polypeptide at least 50-55%, 55% homologous to each other typically remain hybridized to each other. The conditions can be such that sequences at least about 65%, at least about 70%, at least about 75%, at least about 80%, at least about 90%, at least about 95% or more identical to each other remain hybridized to one another. Such stringent conditions are known to those skilled in the art and can be found in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, N.Y. (1989), 6.3.1-6.3.6, incorporated by reference. One example of stringent hybridization conditions are hybridization in 6× sodium chloride/sodium citrate (SSC) at about 45° C., followed by one or more washes in 0.2×SSC, 0.1% SDS at 50-65° C. In another non-limiting example, nucleic acid molecules are allowed to hybridize in 6× sodium chloride/sodium citrate (SSC) at about 45° C., followed by one or more low stringency washes in 0.2×SSC/0.1% SDS at room temperature, or by one or more moderate stringency washes in 0.2×SSC/0.1% SDS at 42° C., or washed in 0.2×SSC/0.1% SDS at 65° C. for high stringency. In one embodiment, an isolated receptor nucleic acid molecule that hybridizes under stringent conditions to the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 14 corresponds to a naturally-occurring nucleic acid molecule. As used herein, a “naturally-occurring” nucleic acid molecule refers to an RNA or DNA molecule having a nucleotide sequence that occurs in nature (e.g., encodes a natural protein).

[1079] As understood by those of ordinary skill, the exact conditions can be determined empirically and depend on ionic strength, temperature and the concentration of destabilizing agents such as formamide or denaturing agents such as SDS. Other factors considered in determining the desired hybridization conditions include the length of the nucleic acid sequences, base composition, percent mismatch between the hybridizing sequences and the frequency of occurrence of subsets of the sequences within other non-identical sequences. Thus, equivalent conditions can be determined by varying one or more of these parameters while maintaining a similar degree of identity or similarity between the two nucleic acid molecules.

[1080] The present invention also provides isolated nucleic acids that contain a single or double stranded fragment or portion that hybridizes under stringent conditions to the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO: 14 and the complements of SEQ ID NO: 14. In one embodiment, the nucleic acid consists of a portion of the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO: 14 and the complements SEQ ID NO: 14. The nucleic acid fragments of the invention are at least about 15, preferably at least about 18, 20, 23 or 25 nucleotides, and can be 30, 40, 50, 100, 200 or more nucleotides in length. Longer fragments, for example, 30 or more nucleotides in length, which encode antigenic proteins or polypeptides described herein are useful.

[1081] Furthermore, the invention provides polynucleotides that comprise a fragment of the fall length receptor polynucleotides. The fragment can be single or double stranded and can comprise DNA or RNA. The fragment can be derived from either the coding or the non-coding sequence.

[1082] In one embodiment, an isolated receptor nucleic acid fragment is derived from nucleotides 1-565 and includes fragments that are at least about 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 35 nucleotides in length and hybridize under stringent conditions to the nucleic acid molecule comprising the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO: 14. In other embodiments the fragment is derived from about nucleotides 565-918 and includes nucleotide fragments that are at least 30 nucleotides in length. In further embodiments the fragment is derived from about nucleotides 918-1067 and includes fragments that are at least 14 nucleotides in length. In further embodiments the nucleic acid fragment is derived from about nucleotide 1067-1356 and includes fragments that are at least 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, and 35 nucleotides in length. In other embodiments, the nucleic acid is at least about 40, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400 or 500 nucleotides in length or greater.

[1083] In another embodiment an isolated receptor nucleic acid encodes the entire coding region from amino acid 1 to amino acid 333. In another embodiment the isolated receptor nucleic acid encodes a sequence corresponding to the mature protein from about amino acid 6 to amino acid 333. Other fragments include nucleotide sequences encoding the amino acid fragments described herein. Further fragments can include subfragments of the specific domains or sites described herein. Fragments also include nucleic acid sequences corresponding to specific amino acid sequences described above or fragments thereof. Nucleic acid fragments, according to the present invention, are not to be construed as encompassing those fragments that may have been disclosed prior to the invention.

[1084] Receptor nucleic acid fragments further include sequences corresponding to the domains described herein, subregions also described, and specific functional sites. Receptor nucleic acid fragments also include combinations of the domains, segments, loops, and other functional sites described above. Thus, for example, a receptor nucleic acid could include sequences corresponding to the amino terminal extracellular domain and one transmembrane fragment. A person of ordinary skill in the art would be aware of the many permutations that are possible.

[1085] Where the location of the domains or sites have been predicted by computer analysis, one of ordinary skill would appreciate that the amino acid residues constituting these domains can vary depending on the criteria used to define the domains.

[1086] However, it is understood that a receptor fragment includes any nucleic acid sequence that does not include the entire gene.

[1087] Receptor nucleic acid fragments thus include nucleic acid molecules encoding a polypeptide comprising the amino terminal extracellular domain, a polypeptide comprising the region spanning the transmembrane domain, a polypeptide comprising the carboxy terminal intracellular domain, and a polypeptide encoding the G-protein receptor signature, nucleic acid molecules encoding any of the seven transmembrane segments, extracellular or intracellular loops, or any of the functional sites disclosed herein, such as glycosylation, phosphorylation, or myristoylation sites. Where the location of the domains have been predicted by computer analysis, one of ordinary skill would appreciate that the amino acid residues constituting these domains can vary depending on the criteria used to define the domains.

[1088] The invention also provides receptor nucleic acid fragments that encode epitope bearing regions of the receptor proteins described herein.

[1089] The isolated receptor polynucleotide sequences, and especially fragments, are useful as DNA probes and primers.

[1090] For example, the coding region of a receptor gene can be isolated using the known nucleotide sequence to synthesize an oligonucleotide probe. A labeled probe can then be used to screen a cDNA library, genomic DNA library, or mRNA to isolate nucleic acid corresponding to the coding region. Further, primers can be used in PCR reactions to clone specific regions of receptor genes.

[1091] A probe/primer typically comprises substantially purified oligonucleotide. The oligonucleotide typically comprises a region of nucleotide sequence that hybridizes under stringent conditions to at least about 5, 10, 12, typically about 25, more typically about 40, 50 or 75 consecutive nucleotides of SEQ ID NO: 14 sense or anti-sense strand or other receptor polynucleotides. A probe further comprises a label, e.g., radioisotope, fluorescent compound, enzyme, or enzyme co-factor.

[1092] Polynucleotide Uses

[1093] The nucleic acid sequences of the present invention can be used as a “query sequence” to perform a search against public databases to, for example, identify other family members or related sequences. Such searches can be performed using the NBLAST and XBLAST programs (version 2.0) of Altschul et al. (1990) J. Mol Biol. 215:403-10. BLAST nucleotide searches can be performed with the NBLAST program, score=100, wordlength=12 to obtain nucleotide sequences homologous to the nucleic acid molecules of the invention. To obtain gapped alignments for comparison purposes, Gapped BLAST can be utilized as described in Altschul et al. (1997) Nucleic Acids Res. 25(17): 3389-3402. When utilizing BLAST and Gapped BLAST programs, the default parameters of the respective programs (e.g., XBLAST and NBLAST) can be used. See www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov.

[1094] The nucleic acid fragments of the invention provide probes or primers in assays such as those described below. “Probes” are oligonucleotides that hybridize in a base-specific manner to a complementary strand of nucleic acid. Such probes include polypeptide nucleic acids, as described in Nielsen et al. (1991) Science 254:1497-1500. Typically, a probe comprises a region of nucleotide sequence that hybridizes under highly stringent conditions to at least about 15, typically about 20-25, and more typically about 40, 50 or 75 consecutive nucleotides of the nucleic acid of SEQ ID NO: 14 and the complements thereof. More typically, the probe further comprises a label, e.g., radioisotope, fluorescent compound, enzyme, or enzyme co-factor.

[1095] As used herein, the term “primer” refers to a single-stranded oligonucleotide which acts as a point of initiation of template-directed DNA synthesis using well-known methods (e.g., PCR, LCR) including, but not limited to those described herein. The appropriate length of the primer depends on the particular use, but typically ranges from about 15 to 30 nucleotides. The term “primer site” refers to the area of the target DNA to which a primer hybridizes. The term “primer pair” refers to a set of primers including a 5′ (upstream) primer that hybridizes with the 5′ end of the nucleic acid sequence to be amplified and a 3′ (downstream) primer that hybridizes with the complement of the sequence to be amplified.

[1096] The receptor polynucleotides are useful for probes, primers, and in biological assays.

[1097] Where the polynucleotides are used to assess GPCR properties or functions, such as in the assays described herein, all or less than all of the entire cDNA can be useful. In this case, even fragments that may have been known prior to the invention are encompassed. Thus, for example, assays specifically directed to GPCR functions, such as assessing agonist or antagonist activity, encompass the use of known fragments. Further, diagnostic methods for assessing receptor function can also be practiced with any fragment, including those fragments that may have been known prior to the invention. Similarly, in methods involving treatment of receptor dysfunction, all fragments are encompassed including those which may have been known in the art.

[1098] The receptor polynucleotides are useful as a hybridization probe for cDNA and genomic DNA to isolate a full-length cDNA and genomic clones encoding the polypeptide described in SEQ ID NO: 13 and to isolate cDNA and genomic clones that correspond to variants producing the same polypeptide shown in SEQ ID NO: 13 or the other variants described herein. Variants can be isolated from the same tissue and organism from which the polypeptide shown in SEQ ID NO: 13 was isolated, different tissues from the same organism, or from different organisms. This method is useful for isolating genes and cDNA that are developmentally-controlled and therefore may be expressed in the same tissue or different tissues at different points in the development of an organism.

[1099] The probe can correspond to any sequence along the entire length of the gene encoding the receptor. Accordingly, it could be derived from 5′ noncoding regions, the coding region, and 3′ noncoding regions. It is understood, however, as discussed herein, that fragments corresponding to the probe do not include those fragments that may have been disclosed prior to the present invention.

[1100] The nucleic acid probe can be, for example, the full-length cDNA of SEQ ID NO: 13, or a fragment thereof, such as an oligonucleotide of at least 5, 10, 12, 15, 30, 50, 100, 250 or 500 nucleotides in length and sufficient to specifically hybridize under stringent conditions to mRNA or DNA.

[1101] Fragments of the polynucleotides described herein are also useful to synthesize larger fragments or full-length polynucleotides described herein. For example, a fragment can be hybridized to any portion of an mRNA and a larger or full-length cDNA can be produced.

[1102] The fragments are also useful to synthesize antisense molecules of desired length and sequence.

[1103] Antisense nucleic acids of the invention can be designed using the nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID NO: 14, and constructed using chemical synthesis and enzymatic ligation reactions using procedures known in the art. For example, an antisense nucleic acid (e.g., an antisense oligonucleotide) can be chemically synthesized using naturally occurring nucleotides or variously modified nucleotides designed to increase the biological stability of the molecules or to increase the physical stability of the duplex formed between the antisense and sense nucleic acids, e.g., phosphorothioate derivatives and acridine substituted nucleotides can be used. Examples of modified nucleotides which can be used to generate the antisense nucleic acid include 5-fluorouracil, 5-bromouracil, 5-chlorouracil, 5-iodouracil, hypoxanthine, xanthine, 4-acetylcytosine, 5-(carboxyhydroxylmethyl) uracil, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouridine, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyluracil, dihydrouracil, beta-D-galactosylqueosine, inosine, N6-isopentenyladenine, 1-methylguanine, 1-methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanine, 2-methyladenine, 2-methylguanine, 3-methylcytosine, 5-methylcytosine, N6-adenine, 7-methylguanine, 5-methylaminomethyluracil, 5-methoxyaminomethyl-2-thiouracil, beta-D-mannosylqueosine, 5′-methoxycarboxymethyluracil, 5-methoxynracil, 2-methylthio-N6-isopentenyladenine, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v), wybutoxosine, pseudouracil, queosine, 2-thiocytosine, 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 2-thiouracil, 4-thiouracil, 5-methyluracil, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid methylester, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v), 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 3-(3-amino-3-N-2-carboxypropyl) uracil, (acp3)w, and 2,6-diaminopurine. Alternatively, the antisense nucleic acid can be produced biologically using an expression vector into which a nucleic acid has been subcloned in an antisense orientation (i.e., RNA transcribed from the inserted nucleic acid will be of an antisense orientation to a target nucleic acid of interest.

[1104] Additionally, the nucleic acid molecules of the invention can be modified at the base moiety, sugar moiety or phosphate backbone to improve, e.g., the stability, hybridization, or solubility of the molecule. For example, the deoxyribose phosphate backbone of the nucleic acids can be modified to generate peptide nucleic acids (see Hyrup et al. (1996) Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry 4:5). As used herein, the terms “peptide nucleic acids” or “PNAs” refer to nucleic acid mimics, e.g., DNA mimics, in which the deoxyribose phosphate backbone is replaced by a pseudopeptide backbone and only the four natural nucleobases are retained. The neutral backbone of PNAs has been shown to allow for specific hybridization to DNA and RNA under conditions of low ionic strength. The synthesis of PNA oligomers can be performed using standard solid phase peptide synthesis protocols as described in Hyrup et al. (1996), supra; Perry-O'Keefe et al. (1996) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 93:14670. PNAs can be further modified, e.g., to enhance their stability, specificity or cellular uptake, by attaching lipophilic or other helper groups to PNA, by the formation of PNA-DNA chimeras, or by the use of liposomes or other techniques of drug delivery known in the art. The synthesis of PNA-DNA chimeras can be performed as described in Hyrup (1996), supra, Finn et al. (1996) Nucleic Acids Res. 24(17): 3357-63, Mag et al. (1989) Nucleic Acids Res. 1 7:5973, and Peterser et al. (1975) Bioorganic Med. Chem. Lett. 5:1119.

[1105] The nucleic acid molecules and fragments of the invention can also include other appended groups such as peptides (e.g., for targeting host cell ion channels in vivo), or agents facilitating transport across the cell membrane (see, e.g., Letsinger et al. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:6553-6556; Lemaitre et al. (1987) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:648-652; PCT Publication No. WO 88/0918) or the blood brain barrier (see, e.g., PCT Publication No. WO 89/10134). In addition, oligonucleotides can be modified with hybridization-triggered cleavage agents (see, e.g., Krol et al. (1988) Bio-Techniques 6:958-976) or intercalating agents (see, e.g., Zon (1988) Pharm Res. 5:539-549).

[1106] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful as primers for PCR to amplify any given region of a receptor polynucleotide.

[1107] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for constructing recombinant vectors. Such vectors include expression vectors that express a portion of, or all of, the receptor polypeptides. Vectors also include insertion vectors, used to integrate into another polynucleotide sequence, such as into the cellular genome, to alter in situ expression of receptor genes and gene products. For example, an endogenous receptor coding sequence can be replaced via homologous recombination with all or part of the coding region containing one or more specifically introduced mutations.

[1108] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for expressing antigenic portions of the receptor proteins.

[1109] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful as probes for determining the chromosomal positions of the receptor polynucleotides by means of in situ hybridization methods, such as FISH (For a review of this technique, see Verma et al. (1988) Human Chromosomes: A Manual of Basic Techniques (Pergamon Press, New York)), and PCR mapping of somatic cell hybrids. The mapping of the sequences to chromosomes is an important first step in correlating these sequences with genes associated with disease.

[1110] Reagents for chromosome mapping can be used individually to mark a single chromosome or a single site on that chromosome, or panels of reagents can be used for marking multiple sites and/or multiple chromosomes. Reagents corresponding to noncoding regions of the genes actually are preferred for mapping purposes. Coding sequences are more likely to be conserved within gene families, thus increasing the chance of cross hybridizations during chromosomal mapping.

[1111] Once a sequence has been mapped to a precise chromosomal location, the physical position of the sequence on the chromosome can be correlated with genetic map data. (Such data are found, for example, in V. McKusick, Mendelian Inheritance in Man, available on-line through Johns Hopkins University Welch Medical Library). The relationship between a gene and a disease, mapped to the same chromosomal region, can then be identified through linkage analysis (co-inheritance of physically adjacent genes), described in, for example, Egeland et al. (1987) Nature 325:783-787.

[1112] Moreover, differences in the DNA sequences between individuals affected and unaffected with a disease associated with a specified gene, can be determined. If a mutation is observed in some or all of the affected individuals but not in any unaffected individuals, then the mutation is likely to be the causative agent of the particular disease. Comparison of affected and unaffected individuals generally involves first looking for structural alterations in the chromosomes, such as deletions or translocations that are visible form chromosome spreads or detectable using PCR based on that DNA sequence. Ultimately, complete sequencing of genes from several individuals can be performed to confirm the presence of a mutation and to distinguish mutations from polymorphisms.

[1113] The receptor polynucleotide probes are also useful to determine patterns of the presence of the gene encoding the receptors and their variants with respect to tissue distribution, for example, whether gene duplication has occurred and whether the duplication occurs in all or only a subset of tissues. The genes can be naturally occurring or can have been introduced into a cell, tissue, or organism exogenously.

[1114] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for designing ribozymes corresponding to all, or a part, of the mRNA produced from genes encoding the polynucleotides described herein.

[1115] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for constructing host cells expressing a part, or all, of the receptor polynucleotides and polypeptides.

[1116] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for constructing transgenic animals expressing all, or a part, of the receptor polynucleotides and polypeptides.

[1117] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for making vectors that express part, or all, of the receptor polypeptides.

[1118] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful as hybridization probes for determining the level of receptor nucleic acid expression. Accordingly, the probes can be used to detect the presence of, or to determine levels of, receptor nucleic acid in cells, tissues, and in organisms. The nucleic acid whose level is determined can be DNA or RNA. Accordingly, probes corresponding to the polypeptides described herein can be used to assess gene copy number in a given cell, tissue, or organism. This is particularly relevant in cases in which there has been an amplification of the receptor genes.

[1119] Alternatively, the probe can be used in an in situ hybridization context to assess the position of extra copies of the receptor genes, as on extrachromosomal elements or as integrated into chromosomes in which the receptor gene is not normally found, for example as a homogeneously staining region.

[1120] These uses are relevant for diagnosis of disorders involving an increase or decrease in receptor expression relative to normal results, such as a proliferative disorder, a differentiative or developmental disorder, or a hematopoietic disorder.

[1121] Thus, the present invention provides a method for identifying a disease or disorder associated with aberrant expression or activity of receptor nucleic acid, in which a test sample is obtained from a subject and nucleic acid (e.g., mRNA, genomic DNA) is detected, wherein the presence of the nucleic acid is diagnostic for a subject having or at risk of developing a disease or disorder associated with aberrant expression or activity of the nucleic acid.

[1122] One aspect of the invention relates to diagnostic assays for determining nucleic acid expression as well as activity in the context of a biological sample (e.g., blood, serum, cells, tissue) to determine whether an individual has a disease or disorder, or is at risk of developing a disease or disorder, associated with aberrant nucleic acid expression or activity. Such assays can be used for prognostic or predictive purpose to thereby prophylactically treat an individual prior to the onset of a disorder characterized by or associated with expression or activity of the nucleic acid molecules.

[1123] In vitro techniques for detection of mRNA include Northern hybridizations and in situ hybridizations. In vitro techniques for detecting DNA includes Southern hybridizations and in situ hybridization.

[1124] Probes can be used as a part of a diagnostic test kit for identifying cells or tissues that express a receptor protein, such as by measuring a level of a receptor-encoding nucleic acid in a sample of cells from a subject e.g., mRNA or genomic DNA, or determining if a receptor gene has been mutated.

[1125] Nucleic acid expression assays are useful for drug screening to identify compounds that modulate receptor nucleic acid expression (e.g., antisense, polypeptides, peptidomimetics, small molecules or other drugs). A cell is contacted with a candidate compound and the expression of mRNA determined. The level of expression of receptor mRNA in the presence of the candidate compound is compared to the level of expression of receptor mRNA in the absence of the candidate compound. The candidate compound can then be identified as a modulator of nucleic acid expression based on this comparison and be used, for example to treat a disorder characterized by aberrant nucleic acid expression. The modulator can bind to the nucleic acid or indirectly modulate expression, such as by interacting with other cellular components that affect nucleic acid expression.

[1126] Modulatory methods can be performed in vitro (e.g., by culturing the cell with the agent) or, alternatively, in vivo (e.g., by administering the agent to a subject) in patients or in transgenic animals.

[1127] The invention thus provides a method for identifying a compound that can be used to treat a disorder associated with nucleic acid expression of the receptor gene. The method typically includes assaying the ability of the compound to modulate the expression of the receptor nucleic acid and thus identifying a compound that can be used to treat a disorder characterized by undesired receptor nucleic acid expression.

[1128] The assays can be performed in cell-based and cell-free systems. Cell-based assays include cells naturally expressing the receptor nucleic acid or recombinant cells genetically engineered to express specific nucleic acid sequences.

[1129] Alternatively, candidate compounds can be assayed in vivo in patients or in transgenic animals.

[1130] The assay for receptor nucleic acid expression can involve direct assay of nucleic acid levels, such as mRNA levels, or on collateral compounds involved in the signal pathway (such as cyclic AMP or phosphatidylinositol turnover). Further, the expression of genes that are up- or down-regulated in response to the receptor protein signal pathway can also be assayed. In this embodiment the regulatory regions of these genes can be operably linked to a reporter gene such as luciferase.

[1131] Thus, modulators of receptor gene expression can be identified in a method wherein a cell is contacted with a candidate compound and the expression of mRNA determined. The level of expression of receptor mRNA in the presence of the candidate compound is compared to the level of expression of receptor mRNA in the absence of the candidate compound. The candidate compound can then be identified as a modulator of nucleic acid expression based on this comparison and be used, for example to treat a disorder characterized by aberrant nucleic acid expression. When expression of mRNA is statistically significantly greater in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as a stimulator of nucleic acid expression. When nucleic acid expression is statistically significantly less in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as an inhibitor of nucleic acid expression.

[1132] Accordingly, the invention provides methods of treatment, with the nucleic acid as a target, using a compound identified through drug screening as a gene modulator to modulate receptor nucleic acid expression. Modulation includes both up-regulation (i.e. activation or agonization) or down-regulation (suppression or antagonization) or effects on nucleic acid activity (e.g. when nucleic acid is mutated or improperly modified) Treatment is of disorders characterized by aberrant expression or activity of the nucleic acid.

[1133] Alternatively, a modulator for receptor nucleic acid expression can be a small molecule or drug identified using the screening assays described herein as long as the drug or small molecule inhibits the receptor nucleic acid expression.

[1134] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for monitoring the effectiveness of modulating compounds on the expression or activity of the receptor gene in clinical trials or in a treatment regimen. Thus, the gene expression pattern can serve as a barometer for the continuing effectiveness of treatment with the compound, particularly with compounds to which a patient can develop resistance. The gene expression pattern can also serve as a marker indicative of a physiological response of the affected cells to the compound. Accordingly, such monitoring would allow either increased administration of the compound or the administration of alternative compounds to which the patient has not become resistant. Similarly, if the level of nucleic acid expression falls below a desirable level, administration of the compound could be commensurately decreased.

[1135] Monitoring can be, for example, as follows: (i) obtaining a pre-administration sample from a subject prior to administration of the agent; (ii) detecting the level of expression of a specified mRNA or genomic DNA of the invention in the pre-administration sample; (iii) obtaining one or more post-administration samples from the subject; (iv) detecting the level of expression or activity of the mRNA or genomic DNA in the post-administration samples; (v) comparing the level of expression or activity of the mRNA or genomic DNA in the pre-administration sample with the mRNA or genomic DNA in the post-administration sample or samples; and (vi) increasing or decreasing the administration of the agent to the subject accordingly.

[1136] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful in diagnostic assays for qualitative changes in receptor nucleic acid, and particularly in qualitative changes that lead to pathology. The polynucleotides can be used to detect mutations in receptor genes and gene expression products such as mRNA. The polynucleotides can be used as hybridization probes to detect naturally-occurring genetic mutations in the receptor gene and thereby to determine whether a subject with the mutation is at risk for a disorder caused by the mutation. Mutations include deletion, addition, or substitution of one or more nucleotides in the gene, chromosomal rearrangement, such as inversion or transposition, modification of genomic DNA, such as aberrant methylation patterns or changes in gene copy number, such as amplification. Detection of a mutated form of the receptor gene associated with a dysfunction provides a diagnostic tool for an active disease or susceptibility to disease when the disease results from overexpression, underexpression, or altered expression of a receptor protein.

[1137] Mutations in the receptor gene can be detected at the nucleic acid level by a variety of techniques. Genomic DNA can be analyzed directly or can be amplified by using PCR prior to analysis. RNA or cDNA can be used in the same way.

[1138] In certain embodiments, detection of the mutation involves the use of a probe/primer in a polymerase chain reaction (PCR) (see, e.g. U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,683,195 and 4,683,202), such as anchor PCR or RACE PCR, or, alternatively, in a ligation chain reaction (LCR) (see, e.g., Landegran et al., Science 241:1077-1080 (1988); and Nakazawa et al., PNAS 91:360-364 (1994)), the latter of which can be particularly useful for detecting point mutations in the gene (see Abravaya et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 23:675-682 (1995)). This method can include the steps of collecting a sample of cells from a patient, isolating nucleic acid (e.g., genomic, mRNA or both) from the cells of the sample, contacting the nucleic acid sample with one or more primers which specifically hybridize to a gene under conditions such that hybridization and amplification of the gene (if present) occurs, and detecting the presence or absence of an amplification product, or detecting the size of the amplification product and comparing the length to a control sample. Deletions and insertions can be detected by a change in size of the amplified product compared to the normal genotype. Point mutations can be identified by hybridizing amplified DNA to normal RNA or antisense DNA sequences.

[1139] It is anticipated that PCR and/or LCR may be desirable to use as a preliminary amplification step in conjunction with any of the techniques used for detecting mutations described herein.

[1140] Alternative amplification methods include: self sustained sequence replication (Guatelli et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:1874-1878), transcriptional amplification system (Kwoh et al. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:1173-1177), Q-Beta Replicase (Lizardi et al. (1988) Bio/Technology 6:1197), or any other nucleic acid amplification method, followed by the detection of the amplified molecules using techniques well-known to those of skill in the art. These detection schemes are especially useful for the detection of nucleic acid molecules if such molecules are present in very low numbers.

[1141] Alternatively, mutations in a receptor gene can be directly identified, for example, by alterations in restriction enzyme digestion patterns determined by gel electrophoresis.

[1142] Further, sequence-specific ribozymes (U.S. Pat. No. 5,498,531) can be used to score for the presence of specific mutations by development or loss of a ribozyme cleavage site.

[1143] Perfectly matched sequences can be distinguished from mismatched sequences by nuclease cleavage digestion assays or by differences in melting temperature.

[1144] Sequence changes at specific locations can also be assessed by nuclease protection assays such as RNase and S1 protection or the chemical cleavage method.

[1145] Furthermore, sequence differences between a mutant receptor gene and a wild-type gene can be determined by direct DNA sequencing. A variety of automated sequencing procedures can be utilized when performing the diagnostic assays ((1995) Biotechniques 19:448), including sequencing by mass spectrometry (see, e.g., PCT International Publication No. WO 94/16101; Cohen et al., Adv. Chromatogr. 36:127-162 (1996); and Griffin et al., Appl. Biochem. Biotechnol. 38:147-159 (1993)).

[1146] Other methods for detecting mutations in the gene include methods in which protection from cleavage agents is used to detect mismatched bases in RNA/RNA or RNA/DNA duplexes (Myers et al., Science 230:1242 (1985)); Cotton et al., PNAS 85:4397 (1988); Saleeba et al., Meth. Enzymol. 217:286-295 (1992)), electrophoretic mobility of mutant and wild type nucleic acid is compared (Orita et al., PNAS 86:2766 (1989); Cotton et al., Mutat. Res. 285:125-144 (1993); and Hayashi et al., Genet. Anal. Tech. Appl. 9:73-79 (1992)), and movement of mutant or wild-type fragments in polyacrylamide gels containing a gradient of denaturant is assayed using denaturing gradient gel electrophoresis (Myers et al., Nature 313:495 (1985)). The sensitivity of the assay may be enhanced by using RNA (rather than DNA), in which the secondary structure is more sensitive to a change in sequence. In one embodiment, the subject method utilizes heteroduplex analysis to separate double stranded heteroduplex molecules on the basis of changes in electrophoretic mobility (Keen et al. (1991) Trends Genet. 7:5). Examples of other techniques for detecting point mutations include, selective oligonucleotide hybridization, selective amplification, and selective primer extension.

[1147] In other embodiments, genetic mutations can be identified by hybridizing a sample and control nucleic acids, e.g., DNA or RNA, to high density arrays containing hundreds or thousands of oligonucleotide probes (Cronin et al. (1996) Human Mutation 7:244-255; Kozal et al. (1996) Nature Medicine 2:753-759). For example, genetic mutations can be identified in two dimensional arrays containing light-generated DNA probes as described in Cronin et al. supra. Briefly, a first hybridization array of probes can be used to scan through long stretches of DNA in a sample and control to identify base changes between the sequences by making linear arrays of sequential overlapping probes. This step allows the identification of point mutations. This step is followed by a second hybridization array that allows the characterization of specific mutations by using smaller, specialized probe arrays complementary to all variants or mutations detected. Each mutation array is composed of parallel probe sets, one complementary to the wild-type gene and the other complementary to the mutant gene.

[1148] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for testing an individual for a genotype that while not necessarily causing the disease, nevertheless affects the treatment modality. Thus, the polynucleotides can be used to study the relationship between an individual's genotype and the individual's response to a compound used for treatment (pharmacogenomic relationship). In the present case, for example, a mutation in the receptor gene that results in altered affinity for ligand could result in an excessive or decreased drug effect with standard concentrations of ligand that activates the receptor. Accordingly, the receptor polynucleotides described herein can be used to assess the mutation content of the receptor gene in an individual in order to select an appropriate compound or dosage regimen for treatment.

[1149] Thus polynucleotides displaying genetic variations that affect treatment provide a diagnostic target that can be used to tailor treatment in an individual. Accordingly, the production of recombinant cells and animals containing these polymorphisms allow effective clinical design of treatment compounds and dosage regimens.

[1150] The methods can involve obtaining a control biological sample from a control subject, contacting the control sample with a compound or agent capable of detecting mRNA, or genomic DNA, such that the presence of mRNA or genomic DNA is detected in the biological sample, and comparing the presence of mRNA or genomic DNA in the control sample with the presence of mRNA or genomic DNA in the test sample.

[1151] The receptor polynucleotides are also useful for chromosome identification when the sequence is identified with an individual chromosome and to a particular location on the chromosome. First, the DNA sequence is matched to the chromosome by in situ or other chromosome-specific hybridization. Sequences can also be correlated to specific chromosomes by preparing PCR primers that can be used for PCR screening of somatic cell hybrids containing individual chromosomes from the desired species. Only hybrids containing the chromosome containing the gene homologous to the primer will yield an amplified fragment. Sublocalization can be achieved using chromosomal fragments. Other strategies include prescreening with labeled flow-sorted chromosomes and preselection by hybridization to chromosome-specific libraries. Further mapping strategies include fluorescence in situ hybridization which allows hybridization with probes shorter than those traditionally used. Reagents for chromosome mapping can be used individually to mark a single chromosome or a single site on the chromosome, or panels of reagents can be used for marking multiple sites and/or multiple chromosomes. Reagents corresponding to noncoding regions of the genes actually are preferred for mapping purposes. Coding sequences are more likely to be conserved within gene families, thus increasing the chance of cross hybridizations during chromosomal mapping.

[1152] The receptor polynucleotides can also be used to identify individuals from small biological samples. This can be done for example using restriction fragment-length polymorphism (RFLP) to identify an individual. Thus, the polynucleotides described herein are useful as DNA markers for RFLP (See U.S. Pat. No. 5,272,057).

[1153] Furthermore, the receptor sequence can be used to provide an alternative technique which determines the actual DNA sequence of selected fragments in the genome of an individual. Thus, the receptor sequences described herein can be used to prepare two PCR primers from the 5′ and 3′ ends of the sequences. These primers can then be used to amplify DNA from an individual for subsequent sequencing.

[1154] Panels of corresponding DNA sequences from individuals prepared in this manner can provide unique individual identifications, as each individual will have a unique set of such DNA sequences. It is estimated that allelic variation in humans occurs with a frequency of about once per each 500 bases. Allelic variation occurs to some degree in the coding regions of these sequences, and to a greater degree in the noncoding regions. The receptor sequences can be used to obtain such identification sequences from individuals and from tissue. The sequences represent unique fragments of the human genome. Each of the sequences described herein can, to some degree, be used as a standard against which DNA from an individual can be compared for identification purposes.

[1155] If a panel of reagents from the sequences is used to generate a unique identification database for an individual, those same reagents can later be used to identify tissue from that individual. Using the unique identification database, positive identification of the individual, living or dead, can be made from extremely small tissue samples.

[1156] The receptor polynucleotides can also be used in forensic identification procedures. PCR technology can be used to amplify DNA sequences taken from very small biological samples, such as a single hair follicle, body fluids (eg. blood, saliva, or semen). The amplified sequence can then be compared to a standard allowing identification of the origin of the sample.

[1157] The receptor polynucleotides can thus be used to provide polynucleotide reagents, e.g., PCR primers, targeted to specific loci in the human genome, which can enhance the reliability of DNA-based forensic identifications by, for example, providing another “identification marker” (i.e. another DNA sequence that is unique to a particular individual). As described above, actual base sequence information can be used for identification as an accurate alternative to patterns formed by restriction enzyme generated fragments. Sequences targeted to the noncoding region are particularly useful since greater polymorphism occurs in the noncoding regions, making it easier to differentiate individuals using this technique.

[1158] The receptor polynucleotides can further be used to provide polynucleotide reagents, e.g., labeled or labelable probes which can be used in, for example, an in situ hybridization technique, to identify a specific tissue. This is useful in cases in which a forensic pathologist is presented with a tissue of unknown origin. Panels of receptor probes can be used to identify tissue by species and/or by organ type.

[1159] In a similar fashion, these primers and probes can be used to screen tissue culture for contamination (i.e. screen for the presence of a mixture of different types of cells in a culture).

[1160] Alternatively, the receptor polynucleotides can be used directly to block transcription or translation of receptor gene sequences by means of antisense or ribozyme constructs. Thus, in a disorder characterized by abnormally high or undesirable receptor gene expression, nucleic acids can be directly used for treatment.

[1161] The receptor polynucleotides are thus useful as antisense constructs to control receptor gene expression in cells, tissues, and organisms. A DNA antisense polynucleotide is designed to be complementary to a region of the gene involved in transcription, preventing transcription and hence production of receptor protein. An antisense RNA or DNA polynucleotide would hybridize to the mRNA and thus block translation of mRNA into receptor protein.

[1162] Examples of antisense molecules useful to inhibit nucleic acid expression include antisense molecules complementary to a fragment of the 5′ untranslated region of SEQ ID NO: 14 which also includes the start codon and antisense molecules which are complementary to a fragment of the 3′ untranslated region of SEQ ID NO: 14.

[1163] Alternatively, a class of antisense molecules can be used to inactivate mRNA in order to decrease expression of receptor nucleic acid. Accordingly, these molecules can treat a disorder characterized by abnormal or undesired receptor nucleic acid expression. This technique involves cleavage by means of ribozymes containing nucleotide sequences complementary to one or more regions in the mRNA that attenuate the ability of the mRNA to be translated. Possible regions include coding regions and particularly coding regions corresponding to the catalytic and other functional activities of the receptor protein, such as ligand binding. It is understood that these regions include any of those specific domains, sites, segments, loops, and the like that are disclosed as specific regions or sites herein.

[1164] The receptor polynucleotides also provide vectors for gene therapy in patients containing cells that are aberrant in receptor gene expression. Thus, recombinant cells, which include the patient's cells that have been engineered ex vivo and returned to the patient, are introduced into an individual where the cells produce the desired receptor protein to treat the individual.

[1165] The invention also encompasses kits for detecting the presence of a receptor nucleic acid in a biological sample. For example, the kit can comprise reagents such as a labeled or labelable nucleic acid or agent capable of detecting receptor nucleic acid in a biological sample; means for determining the amount of receptor nucleic acid in the sample; and means for comparing the amount of receptor nucleic acid in the sample with a standard. The compound or agent can be packaged in a suitable container. The kit can further comprise instructions for using the kit to detect receptor mRNA or DNA.

[1166] Computer Readable Means

[1167] The nucleotide or amino acid sequences of the invention are also provided in a variety of mediums to facilitate use thereof. As used herein, “provided” refers to a manufacture, other than an isolated nucleic acid or amino acid molecule, which contains a nucleotide or amino acid sequence of the present invention. Such a manufacture provides the nucleotide or amino acid sequences, or a subset thereof (e.g., a subset of open reading frames (ORFs)) in a form which allows a skilled artisan to examine the manufacture using means not directly applicable to examining the nucleotide or amino acid sequences, or a subset thereof, as they exists in nature or in purified form.

[1168] In one application of this embodiment, a nucleotide or amino acid sequence of the present invention can be recorded on computer readable media. As used herein, “computer readable media” refers to any medium that can be read and accessed directly by a computer. Such media include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage media, such as floppy discs, hard disc storage medium, and magnetic tape; optical storage media such as CD-ROM; electrical storage media such as RAM and ROM; and hybrids of these categories such as magnetic/optical storage media. The skilled artisan will readily appreciate how any of the presently known computer readable mediums can be used to create a manufacture comprising computer readable medium having recorded thereon a nucleotide or amino acid sequence of the present invention.

[1169] As used herein, “recorded” refers to a process for storing information on computer readable medium. The skilled artisan can readily adopt any of the presently known methods for recording information on computer readable medium to generate manufactures comprising the nucleotide or amino acid sequence information of the present invention.

[1170] A variety of data storage structures are available to a skilled artisan for creating a computer readable medium having recorded thereon a nucleotide or amino acid sequence of the present invention. The choice of the data storage structure will generally be based on the means chosen to access the stored information. In addition, a variety of data processor programs and formats can be used to store the nucleotide sequence information of the present invention on computer readable medium. The sequence information can be represented in a word processing text file, formatted in commercially-available software such as WordPerfect and MicroSoft Word, or represented in the form of an ASCII file, stored in a database application, such as DB2, Sybase, Oracle, or the like. The skilled artisan can readily adapt any number of dataprocessor structuring formats (e.g., text file or database) in order to obtain computer readable medium having recorded thereon the nucleotide sequence information of the present invention.

[1171] By providing the nucleotide or amino acid sequences of the invention in computer readable form, the skilled artisan can routinely access the sequence information for a variety of purposes. For example, one skilled in the art can use the nucleotide or amino acid sequences of the invention in computer readable form to compare a target sequence or target structural motif with the sequence information stored within the data storage means. Search means are used to identify fragments or regions of the sequences of the invention which match a particular target sequence or target motif.

[1172] As used herein, a “target sequence” can be any DNA or amino acid sequence of six or more nucleotides or two or more amino acids. A skilled artisan can readily recognize that the longer a target sequence is, the less likely a target sequence will be present as a random occurrence in the database. The most preferred sequence length of a target sequence is from about 10 to 100 amino acids or from about 30 to 300 nucleotide residues. However, it is well recognized that commercially important fragments, such as sequence fragments involved in gene expression and protein processing, may be of shorter length.

[1173] As used herein, “a target structural motif,” or “target motif,” refers to any rationally selected sequence or combination of sequences in which the sequence(s) are chosen based on a three-dimensional configuration which is formed upon the folding of the target motif. There are a variety of target motifs known in the art. Protein target motifs include, but are not limited to, enzyme active sites and signal sequences. Nucleic acid target motifs include, but are not limited to, promoter sequences, hairpin structures and inducible expression elements (protein binding sequences).

[1174] Computer software is publicly available which allows a skilled artisan to access sequence information provided in a computer readable medium for analysis and comparison to other sequences. A variety of known algorithms are disclosed publicly and a variety of commercially available software for conducting search means are and can be used in the computer-based systems of the present invention. Examples of such software includes, but is not limited to, MacPattern (EMBL), BLASTN and BLASTX (NCBIA).

[1175] For example, software which implements the BLAST (Altschul et al. (1990) J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410) and BLAZE (Brutlag et al. (1993) Comp. Chem. 17:203-207) search algorithms on a Sybase system can be used to identify open reading frames (ORFs) of the sequences of the invention which contain homology to ORFs or proteins from other libraries. Such ORFs are protein encoding fragments and are useful in producing commercially important proteins such as enzymes used in various reactions and in the production of commercially useful metabolites.

[1176] Vectors/Host Cells

[1177] The invention also provides vectors containing the receptor polynucleotides. The term “vector” refers to a vehicle, preferably a nucleic acid molecule, that can transport the receptor polynucleotides. When the vector is a nucleic acid molecule, the receptor polynucleotides are covalently linked to the vector nucleic acid. With this aspect of the invention, the vector includes a plasmid, single or double stranded phage, a single or double stranded RNA or DNA viral vector, or artificial chromosome, such as a BAC, PAC, YAC, OR MAC.

[1178] A vector can be maintained in the host cell as an extrachromosomal element where it replicates and produces additional copies of the receptor polynucleotides. Alternatively, the vector may integrate into the host cell genome and produce additional copies of the receptor polynucleotides when the host cell replicates.

[1179] The invention provides vectors for the maintenance (cloning vectors) or vectors for expression (expression vectors) of the receptor polynucleotides. The vectors can function in procaryotic or eukaryotic cells or in both (shuttle vectors).

[1180] Expression vectors contain cis-acting regulatory regions that are operably linked in the vector to the receptor polynucleotides such that transcription of the polynucleotides is allowed in a host cell. The polynucleotides can be introduced into the host cell with a separate polynucleotide capable of affecting transcription. Thus, the second polynucleotide may provide a trans-acting factor interacting with the cis-regulatory control region to allow transcription of the receptor polynucleotides from the vector. Alternatively, a trans-acting factor may be supplied by the host cell. Finally, a trans-acting factor can be produced from the vector itself.

[1181] It is understood, however, that in some embodiments, transcription and/or translation of the receptor polynucleotides can occur in a cell-free system.

[1182] The regulatory sequence to which the polynucleotides described herein can be operably linked include promoters for directing mRNA transcription. These include, but are not limited to, the left promoter from bacteriophage λ, the lac, TRP, and TAC promoters from E. coli, the early and late promoters from SV40, the CMV immediate early promoter, the adenovirus early and late promoters, and retrovirus long-terminal repeats.

[1183] In addition to control regions that promote transcription, expression vectors may also include regions that modulate transcription, such as repressor binding sites and enhancers. Examples include the SV40 enhancer, the cytomegalovirus immediate early enhancer, polyoma enhancer, adenovirus enhancers, and retrovirus LTR enhancers.

[1184] In addition to containing sites for transcription initiation and control, expression vectors can also contain sequences necessary for transcription termination and, in the transcribed region a ribosome binding site for translation. Other regulatory control elements for expression include initiation and termination codons as well as polyadenylation signals. The person of ordinary skill in the art would be aware of the numerous regulatory sequences that are useful in expression vectors. Such regulatory sequences are described, for example, in Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd. ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., (1989).

[1185] A variety of expression vectors can be used to express a receptor polynucleotide. Such vectors include chromosomal, episomal, and virus-derived vectors, for example vectors derived from bacterial plasmids, from bacteriophage, from yeast episomes, from yeast chromosomal elements, including yeast artificial chromosomes, from viruses such as baculoviruses, papovaviruses such as SV40, Vaccinia viruses, adenoviruses, poxviruses, pseudorabies viruses, and retroviruses. Vectors may also be derived from combinations of these sources such as those derived from plasmid and bacteriophage genetic elements, eg. cosmids and phagemids. Appropriate cloning and expression vectors for prokaryotic and eukaryotic hosts are described in Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd. ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., (1989).

[1186] The regulatory sequence may provide constitutive expression in one or more host cells (i.e., tissue specific) or may provide for inducible expression in one or more cell types such as by temperature, nutrient additive, or exogenous factor such as a hormone or other ligand. A variety of vectors providing for constitutive and inducible expression in prokaryotic and eukaryotic hosts are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art.

[1187] The receptor polynucleotides can be inserted into the vector nucleic acid by well-known methodology. Generally, the DNA sequence that will ultimately be expressed is joined to an expression vector by cleaving the DNA sequence and the expression vector with one or more restriction enzymes and then ligating the fragments together. Procedures for restriction enzyme digestion and ligation are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art.

[1188] The vector containing the appropriate polynucleotide can be introduced into an appropriate host cell for propagation or expression using well-known techniques. Bacterial cells include, but are not limited to, E. coli, Streptomyces, and Salmonella typhimurium. Eukaryotic cells include, but are not limited to, yeast, insect cells such as Drosophila, animal cells such as COS and CHO cells, and plant cells.

[1189] As described herein, it may be desirable to express the polypeptide as a fusion protein. Accordingly, the invention provides fusion vectors that allow for the production of the receptor polypeptides. Fusion vectors can increase the expression of a recombinant protein, increase the solubility of the recombinant protein, and aid in the purification of the protein by acting for example as a ligand for affinity purification. A proteolytic cleavage site may be introduced at the junction of the fusion moiety so that the desired polypeptide can ultimately be separated from the fusion moiety. Proteolytic enzymes include, but are not limited to, factor Xa, thrombin, and enterokinase. Typical fusion expression vectors include pGEX (Smith et al, Gene 67:31-40 (1988)), pMAL (New England Biolabs, Beverly, Mass.) and pRIT5 (Pharmacia, Piscataway, N.J.) which fuse glutathione S-transferase (GST), maltose E binding protein, or protein A, respectively, to the target recombinant protein. Examples of suitable inducible non-fusion E. coli expression vectors include pTrc (Amann et al, Gene 69:301-315 (1988)) and pET 11d (Studier et al., Gene Expression Technology: Methods in Enzymology 185:60-89 (1990)).

[1190] Recombinant protein expression can be maximized in a host bacteria by providing a genetic background wherein the host cell has an impaired capacity to proteolytically cleave the recombinant protein. (Gottesman, S., Gene Expression Technology: Methods in Enzymology 185, Academic Press, San Diego, Calif. (1990) 119-128). Alternatively, the sequence of the polynucleotide of interest can be altered to provide preferential codon usage for a specific host cell, for example E. coli. (Wada et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 20:2111-2118 (1992)).

[1191] The receptor polynucleotides can also be expressed by expression vectors that are operative in yeast. Examples of vectors for expression in yeast e.g., S. cerevisiae include pYepSec1(Baldari, et al., EMBO J. 6:229-234 (1987)), pMFa (Kurjan et al., Cell 30:933-943(1982)), pJRY88 (Schultz et al., Gene 54:113-123 (1987)), and pYES2 (Invitrogen Corporation, San Diego, Calif.).

[1192] The receptor polynucleotides can also be expressed in insect cells using, for example, baculovirus expression vectors. Baculovirus vectors available for expression of proteins in cultured insect cells (e.g., Sf 9 cells) include the pAc series (Smith et al., Mol. Cell Biol. 3:2156-2165 (1983)) and the pVL series (Lucklow et al, Virology 170:31-39 (1989)).

[1193] In certain embodiments of the invention, the polynucleotides described herein are expressed in mammalian cells using mammalian expression vectors. Examples of mammalian expression vectors include pCDM8 (Seed, B. Nature 329:840 (1987)) and pMT2PC (Kaufman et al., EMBO J. 6:187-195 (1987)).

[1194] The expression vectors listed herein are provided by way of example only of the well-known vectors available to those of ordinary skill in the art that would be useful to express the receptor polynucleotides. The person of ordinary skill in the art would be aware of other vectors suitable for maintenance propagation or expression of the polynucleotides described herein. These are found for example in Sambrook, J., Fritsh, E. F., and Maniatis, T. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd, ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1989.

[1195] The invention also encompasses vectors in which the nucleic acid sequences described herein are cloned into the vector in reverse orientation, but operably linked to a regulatory sequence that permits transcription of antisense RNA. Thus, an antisense transcript can be produced to all, or to a portion, of the polynucleotide sequences described herein, including both coding and non-coding regions. Expression of this antisense RNA is subject to each of the parameters described above in relation to expression of the sense RNA (regulatory sequences, constitutive or inducible expression, tissue-specific expression).

[1196] The invention also relates to recombinant host cells containing the vectors described herein. Host cells therefore include prokaryotic cells, lower eukaryotic cells such as yeast, other eukaryotic cells such as insect cells, and higher eukaryotic cells such as mammalian cells.

[1197] The recombinant host cells are prepared by introducing the vector constructs described herein into the cells by techniques readily available to the person of ordinary skill in the art. These include, but are not limited to, calcium phosphate transfection, DEAE-dextran-mediated transfection, cationic lipid-mediated transfection, electroporation, transduction, infection, lipofection, and other techniques such as those found in Sambrook, et al. (Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd, ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1989).

[1198] Host cells can contain more than one vector. Thus, different nucleotide sequences can be introduced on different vectors of the same cell. Similarly, the receptor polynucleotides can be introduced either alone or with other polynucleotides that are not related to the receptor polynucleotides such as those providing trans-acting factors for expression vectors. When more than one vector is introduced into a cell, the vectors can be introduced independently, co-introduced or joined to the receptor polynucleotide vector.

[1199] In the case of bacteriophage and viral vectors, these can be introduced into cells as packaged or encapsulated virus by standard procedures for infection and transduction. Viral vectors can be replication-competent or replication-defective. In the case in which viral replication is defective, replication will occur in host cells providing functions that complement the defects.

[1200] Vectors generally include selectable markers that enable the selection of the subpopulation of cells that contain the recombinant vector constructs. The marker can be contained in the same vector that contains the polynucleotides described herein or may be on a separate vector. Markers include tetracycline or ampicillin-resistance genes for prokaryotic host cells and dihydrofolate reductase or neomycin resistance for eukaryotic host cells. However, any marker that provides selection for a phenotypic trait will be effective.

[1201] While the mature proteins can be produced in bacteria, yeast, mammalian cells, and other cells under the control of the appropriate regulatory sequences, cell-free transcription and translation systems can also be used to produce these proteins using RNA derived from the DNA constructs described herein.

[1202] Where secretion of the polypeptide is desired, appropriate secretion signals are incorporated into the vector. The signal sequence can be endogenous to the receptor polypeptides or heterologous to these polypeptides.

[1203] Where the polypeptide is not secreted into the medium, the protein can be isolated from the host cell by standard disruption procedures, including freeze thaw, sonication, mechanical disruption, use of lysing agents and the like. The polypeptide can then be recovered and purified by well-known purification methods including ammonium sulfate precipitation, acid extraction, anion or cationic exchange chromatography, phosphocellulose chromatography, hydrophobic-interaction chromatography, affinity chromatography, hydroxylapatite chromatography, lectin chromatography, or high performance liquid chromatography.

[1204] It is also understood that depending upon the host cell in recombinant production of the polypeptides described herein, the polypeptides can have various glycosylation patterns, depending upon the cell, or maybe non-glycosylated as when produced in bacteria. In addition, the polypeptides may include an initial modified methionine in some cases as a result of a host-mediated process.

[1205] Host cells of particular interest include those derived from the tissues in which the receptor is expressed, including but not limited to lung, uterus, and particularly pregnant uterus, colon, liver, spleen, and adenocarcinoma, particularly poorly differentiated adenocarcinoma with signet ring cell features.

[1206] Uses of Vectors and Host Cells

[1207] It is understood that “host cells” and “recombinant host cells” refer not only to the particular subject cell but also to the progeny or potential progeny of such a cell. Because certain modifications may occur in succeeding generations due to either mutation or environmental influences, such progeny may not, in fact, be identical to the parent cell, but are still included within the scope of the term as used herein.

[1208] The host cells expressing the polypeptides described herein, and particularly recombinant host cells, have a variety of uses. First, the cells are useful for producing receptor proteins or polypeptides that can be further purified to produce desired amounts of receptor protein or fragments. Thus, host cells containing expression vectors are useful for polypeptide production.

[1209] Host cells are also useful for conducting cell-based assays involving the receptor or receptor fragments. Thus, a recombinant host cell expressing a native receptor is useful to assay for compounds that stimulate or inhibit receptor function. This includes ligand binding, gene expression at the level of transcription or translation, G-protein interaction, and components of the signal transduction pathway.

[1210] Cells of particular relevance are those in which the receptor is expressed as disclosed herein.

[1211] Host cells are also useful for identifying receptor mutants in which these functions are affected. If the mutants naturally occur and give rise to a pathology, host cells containing the mutations are useful to assay compounds that have a desired effect on the mutant receptor (for example, stimulating or inhibiting function) which may not be indicated by their effect on the native receptor.

[1212] Recombinant host cells are also useful for expressing the chimeric polypeptides described herein to assess compounds that activate or suppress activation by means of a heterologous amino terminal extracellular domain (or other binding region). Alternatively, a heterologous region spanning the entire transmembrane domain (or parts thereof) can be used to assess the effect of a desired amino terminal extracellular domain (or other binding region) on any given host cell. In this embodiment, a region spanning the entire transmembrane domain (or parts thereof) compatible with the specific host cell is used to make the chimeric vector. Alternatively, a heterologous carboxy terminal intracellular, e.g., signal transduction, domain can be introduced into the host cell.

[1213] Further, mutant receptors can be designed in which one or more of the various functions is engineered to be increased or decreased (e.g., ligand binding or G-protein binding) and used to augment or replace receptor proteins in an individual. Thus, host cells can provide a therapeutic benefit by replacing an aberrant receptor or providing an aberrant receptor that provides a therapeutic result. In one embodiment, the cells provide receptors that are abnormally active.

[1214] In another embodiment, the cells provide receptors that are abnormally inactive. These receptors can compete with endogenous receptors in the individual.

[1215] In another embodiment, cells expressing receptors that cannot be activated, are introduced into an individual in order to compete with endogenous receptors for ligand. For example, in the case in which excessive ligand is part of a treatment modality, it may be necessary to inactivate this ligand at a specific point in treatment. Providing cells that compete for the ligand, but which cannot be affected by receptor activation would be beneficial.

[1216] Homologously recombinant host cells can also be produced that allow the in situ alteration of endogenous receptor polynucleotide sequences in a host cell genome. This technology is more fully described in WO 93/09222, WO 91/12650 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,641,670. Briefly, specific polynucleotide sequences corresponding to the receptor polynucleotides or sequences proximal or distal to a receptor gene are allowed to integrate into a host cell genome by homologous recombination where expression of the gene can be affected. In one embodiment, regulatory sequences are introduced that either increase or decrease expression of an endogenous sequence. Accordingly, a receptor protein can be produced in a cell not normally producing it, or increased expression of receptor protein can result in a cell normally producing the protein at a specific level. Alternatively, the entire gene can be deleted. Still further, specific mutations can be introduced into any desired region of the gene to produce mutant receptor proteins. Such mutations could be introduced, for example, into the specific functional regions such as the ligand-binding site or the G-protein binding site.

[1217] In one embodiment, the host cell can be a fertilized oocyte or embryonic stem cell that can be used to produce a transgenic animal containing the altered receptor gene. Alternatively, the host cell can be a stem cell or other early tissue precursor that gives rise to a specific subset of cells and can be used to produce transgenic tissues in an animal. See also Thomas et al., Cell 51:503 (1987) for a description of homologous recombination vectors. The vector is introduced into an embryonic stem cell line (e.g., by electroporation) and cells in which the introduced gene has homologously recombined with the endogenous receptor gene is selected (see e.g., Li, E. et al., Cell 69:915 (1992)). The selected cells are then injected into a blastocyst of an animal (e.g., a mouse) to form aggregation chimeras (see e.g., Bradley, A. in Teratocarcinomas and Embryonic Stem Cells: A Practical Approach, E. J. Robertson, ed. (IRL, Oxford, 1987) pp. 113-152). A chimeric embryo can then be implanted into a suitable pseudopregnant female foster animal and the embryo brought to term. Progeny harboring the homologously recombined DNA in their germ cells can be used to breed animals in which all cells of the animal contain the homologously recombined DNA by germline transmission of the transgene. Methods for constructing homologous recombination vectors and homologous recombinant animals are described further in Bradley, A. (1991) Current Opinion in Biotechnology 2:823-829 and in PCT International Publication Nos. WO 90/11354; WO 91/01140; and WO 93/04169.

[1218] The genetically engineered host cells can be used to produce non-human transgenic animals. A transgenic animal is preferably a mammal, for example a rodent, such as a rat or mouse, in which one or more of the cells of the animal include a transgene. A transgene is exogenous DNA which is integrated into the genome of a cell from which a transgenic animal develops and which remains in the genome of the mature animal in one or more cell types or tissues of the transgenic animal. These animals are useful for studying the function of a receptor protein and identifying and evaluating modulators of receptor protein activity.

[1219] Other examples of transgenic animals include non-human primates, sheep, dogs, cows, goats, chickens, and amphibians.

[1220] In one embodiment, a host cell is a fertilized oocyte or an embryonic stem cell into which receptor polynucleotide sequences have been introduced.

[1221] A transgenic animal can be produced by introducing nucleic acid into the male pronuclei of a fertilized oocyte, e.g., by microinjection; retroviral infection, and allowing the oocyte to develop in a pseudopregnant female foster animal. Any of the receptor nucleotide sequences can be introduced as a transgene into the genome of a non-human animal, such as a mouse.

[1222] Any of the regulatory or other sequences useful in expression vectors can form part of the transgenic sequence. This includes intronic sequences and polyadenylation signals, if not already included. A tissue-specific regulatory sequence(s) can be operably linked to the transgene to direct expression of the receptor protein to particular cells.

[1223] Methods for generating transgenic animals via embryo manipulation and microinjection, particularly animals such as mice, have become conventional in the art and are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,736,866 and 4,870,009, both by Leder et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,873,191 by Wagner et al. and in Hogan, B., Manipulating the Mouse Embryo, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1986). Similar methods are used for production of other transgenic animals. A transgenic founder animal can be identified based upon the presence of the transgene in its genome and/or expression of transgenic mRNA in tissues or cells of the animals. A transgenic founder animal can then be used to breed additional animals carrying the transgene. Moreover, transgenic animals carrying a transgene can further be bred to other transgenic animals carrying other transgenes. A transgenic animal also includes animals in which the entire animal or tissues in the animal have been produced using the homologously recombinant host cells described herein.

[1224] In another embodiment, transgenic non-human animals can be produced which contain selected systems which allow for regulated expression of the transgene. One example of such a system is the cre/loxP recombinase system of bacteriophage P1. For a description of the cre/loxP recombinase system, see, e.g., Lakso et al. PNAS 89:6232-6236 (1992). Another example of a recombinase system is the FLP recombinase system of S. cerevisiae (O'Gorman et al. Science 251:1351-1355 (1991). If a cre/loxP recombinase system is used to regulate expression of the transgene, animals containing transgenes encoding both the Cre recombinase and a selected protein is required. Such animals can be provided through the construction of “double” transgenic animals, e.g., by mating two transgenic animals, one containing a transgene encoding a selected protein and the other containing a transgene encoding a recombinase.

[1225] Clones of the non-human transgenic animals described herein can also be produced according to the methods described in Wilmut, I. et al. Nature 385:810-813 (1997) and PCT International Publication Nos. WO 97/07668 and WO 97/07669. In brief, a cell, e.g., a somatic cell, from the transgenic animal can be isolated and induced to exit the growth cycle and enter Go phase. The quiescent cell can then be fused, e.g., through the use of electrical pulses, to an enucleated oocyte from an animal of the same species from which the quiescent cell is isolated. The reconstructed oocyte is then cultured such that it develops to morula or blastocyst and then transferred to a pseudopregnant female foster animal. The offspring born of this female foster animal will be a clone of the animal from which the cell, e.g., the somatic cell, is isolated.

[1226] Transgenic animals containing recombinant cells that express the polypeptides described herein are useful to conduct the assays described herein in an in vivo context. Accordingly, the various physiological factors that are present in vivo and that could effect ligand binding, receptor activation, and signal transduction, may not be evident from in vitro cell-free or cell-based assays. Accordingly, it is useful to provide non-human transgenic animals to assay in vivo receptor function, including ligand interaction, the effect of specific mutant receptors on receptor function and ligand interaction, and the effect of chimeric receptors. It is also possible to assess the effect of null mutations, that is mutations that substantially or completely eliminate one or more receptor functions.

[1227] Pharmaceutical Compositions

[1228] The receptor nucleic acid molecules, protein (particularly fragments such as the amino terminal extracellular domain), modulators of the protein, and antibodies (also referred to herein as “active compounds”) can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration to a subject, e.g., a human. Such compositions typically comprise the nucleic acid molecule, protein, modulator, or antibody and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.

[1229] As used herein the language “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” is intended to include any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, such media can be used in the compositions of the invention. Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions. A pharmaceutical composition of the invention is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration. Examples of routes of administration include parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, oral (e.g., inhalation), transdermal (topical), transmucosal, and rectal administration. Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, or subcutaneous application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide. The parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.

[1230] Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions (where water soluble) or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersion. For intravenous administration, suitable carriers include physiological saline, bacteriostatic water, Cremophor EL™ (BASF, Parsippany, N.J.) or phosphate buffered saline (PBS). In all cases, the composition must be sterile and should be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof. The proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. Prevention of the action of microorganisms can be achieved by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, ascorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for example, sugars, polyalcohols such as mannitol, sorbitol, sodium chloride in the composition. Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent which delays absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.

[1231] Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the active compound (e.g., a receptor protein or anti-receptor antibody) in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization. Generally, dispersions are prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle which contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying which yields a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof

[1232] Oral compositions generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They can be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets. For oral administration, the agent can be contained in enteric forms to survive the stomach or further coated or mixed to be released in a particular region of the GI tract by known methods. For the purpose of oral therapeutic administration, the active compound can be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, or capsules. Oral compositions can also be prepared using a fluid carrier for use as a mouthwash, wherein the compound in the fluid carrier is applied orally and swished and expectorated or swallowed. Pharmaceutically compatible binding agents, and/or adjuvant materials can be included as part of the composition. The tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.

[1233] For administration by inhalation, the compounds are delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from pressured container or dispenser which contains a suitable propellant, e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer.

[1234] Systemic administration can also be by transmucosal or transdermal means. For transmucosal or transdermal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art, and include, for example, for transmucosal administration, detergents, bile salts, and fusidic acid derivatives. Transmucosal administration can be accomplished through the use of nasal sprays or suppositories. For transdermal administration, the active compounds are formulated into ointments, salves, gels, or creams as generally known in the art.

[1235] The compounds can also be prepared in the form of suppositories (e.g., with conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter and other glycerides) or retention enemas for rectal delivery.

[1236] In one embodiment, the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems. Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Corporation and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,522,811.

[1237] It is especially advantageous to formulate oral or parenteral compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. “Dosage unit form” as used herein refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subject to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. The specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on the unique characteristics of the active compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an active compound for the treatment of individuals.

[1238] The nucleic acid molecules of the invention can be inserted into vectors and used as gene therapy vectors. Gene therapy vectors can be delivered to a subject by, for example, intravenous injection, local administration (U.S. Pat. No. 5,328,470) or by stereotactic injection (see e.g., Chen et al., PNAS91:3054-3057 (1994)). The pharmaceutical preparation of the gene therapy vector can include the gene therapy vector in an acceptable diluent, or can comprise a slow release matrix in which the gene delivery vehicle is imbedded. Alternatively, where the complete gene delivery vector can be produced intact from recombinant cells, e.g. retroviral vectors, the pharmaceutical preparation can include one or more cells which produce the gene delivery system.

[1239] The pharmaceutical compositions can be included in a container, pack, or dispenser together with instructions for administration.

[1240] This invention may be embodied in many different forms and should not be construed as limited to the embodiments set forth herein; rather, these embodiments are provided so that this disclosure will fully convey the invention to those skilled in the art. Many modifications and other embodiments of the invention will come to mind in one skilled in the art to which this invention pertains having the benefit of the teachings presented in the foregoing description. Although specific terms are employed, they are used as in the art unless otherwise indicated.

	Number	Date	Country
Parent	09741783	Dec 2000	US
Child	10165844	Jun 2002	US
Parent	09464685	Dec 1999	US
Child	09741783	Dec 2000	US
Parent	09324465	Jun 1999	US
Child	09464685	Dec 1999	US
Parent	09088857	Jun 1998	US
Child	09324465	Jun 1999	US
Parent	09383745	Aug 1999	US
Child	09324465	Jun 1999	US
Parent	09145745	Sep 1998	US
Child	09383745	Aug 1999	US
Parent	09234923	Jan 1999	US
Child	09383745	Aug 1999	US
Parent	09340880	Jun 1999	US
Child	09383745	Aug 1999	US

Novel nucleic acid sequences encoding G-protein coupled receptors

Information

Publication Number

Date Filed

Date Published

Inventors

Original Assignees

CPC

US Classifications

International Classifications

Abstract

Description

Claims

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

Continuation in Parts (8)